第一波罗夷论的注释巴利
Paṭhamapārājikakathāvaṇṇanā
6 这样用五首偈颂显示了礼敬三宝等之后,现在为了显示所承诺的判定,说“三种”等。其中,以“三种”等显示第一波罗夷学处的判定。“三种”是指依大便道、小便道、口道而有的三种道,这是连接关系。“乃至芝麻许”是指乃至芝麻种子那么大的程度,与“生支”连接。“道”是指大便、小便排出的门,也是饮食、胆汁、痰等进入和排出的门,所以对于被称为“道”的身体部位,“湿润之处”,这是连接关系。虽然应当说“在诸道中乃至芝麻许,对三者有行淫的意乐”,但通过采用“三种”这个表示类别的词,依同类含摄,以三聚含摄之后,再依分别,就显示了三十种道。巴利
6. Evaṃ pañcahi gāthāhi ratanattayapaṇāmādiṃ dassetvā idāni yathāpaṭiññātavinicchayaṃ dassetumāha ‘‘tividhe’’tiādi. Tattha ‘‘tividhe’’tiādinā paṭhamapārājikasikkhāpadavinicchayaṃ dasseti. Tividheti vaccapassāvamukhamaggānaṃ vasena tippakāre maggeti iminā sambandho. Tilamattampīti tilabījamattampi aṅgajātanti sambandho. Maggeti vaccapassāvānaṃ nikkhamanadvāratāya, annapānapittasemhādīnaṃ pavesananikkhamanadvāratāya ca maggavohāragate sarīrappadese, allokāseti sambandho. ‘‘Maggesu tilamattampi, tīsu sevanacetano’’ti vattabbepi ‘‘tividhe’’ti pakāravācividhasaddopādānena sajātisaṅgahavasena tīhi rāsīhi saṅgahetvā pabhedavasena tiṃsavidho maggo dassito hoti.
比如什么呢?为了说明那些作为波罗夷事例之口道等的所依有情,按照圣典中“三种女人:人女、非人女、畜生女”等(见《波罗夷》56)的方式,对所展示的人女、非人女、畜生女,各按三种道来算,就有九种道;同样,对所展示的三类二根者,也各按三种道来算,就有九种道;而对三种黄门,按口道和大便道来算,各各有两种道,所以是六种道;同样,对三种男子也是如此。这样一共就有三十种。巴利
Seyyathidaṃ? Pārājikavatthubhūtamukhādimaggānaṃ nissayabhūte satte dassetuṃ ‘‘tisso itthiyo manussitthī amanussitthī tiracchānagatitthī’’tiādinā (pārā. 56) nayena pāḷiyaṃ dassitamanussāmanussatiracchānagatitthīnaṃ paccekaṃ tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ vasena nava maggā, tatheva dassitānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ ubhatobyañjanakānaṃ vasena nava maggā, tiṇṇaṃ pana paṇḍakānaṃ mukhamaggavaccamaggānaṃ vasena paccekaṃ dve dve maggāti cha maggā, tathā tiṇṇaṃ pana purisānanti evaṃ tiṃsavidho hoti.
“行淫思”是指:在行淫、交合之中有思,这是词义拆解;意思是具有与淫欲相应的思。“湿润处”是指:在三十道中的某一道上,没有被自然风吹到的湿润部位;以此说明体外不属于波罗夷的范围。因为修饰语需要有所修饰的对象,所以把第二首偈颂中的“彼有学”这两个词引过来,连成“有行淫思的有学比丘”。巴利
Sevanacetanoti sevane methunapayoge cetanā assāti viggaho, methunarāgūpasaṃhitāya cetanāya samannāgatoti attho. Allokāseti tiṃsamaggānamaññatare magge pakativātena asaṃphuṭṭhe allapadese, iminā bāhiraṃ pārājikakkhettaṃ na hotīti dīpeti. Visesanassa visesāpekkhattā dutiyagāthāya ‘‘sasikkho so’’ti padadvayaṃ āharitvā ‘‘sevanacetano sasikkho so bhikkhū’’ti yojetabbaṃ.
男根,就是在身体这个肢体上生出来的,所以叫男根,也就是男性的性器官。虽然身体其他部分也有同样的性质,但按照习惯用法,只有这个部分这样称呼。令入,就是完成被称为二二相交的身体行为。败者,意思是:从难得的时机圆满所证得的、从难得的世间与出世间功德成就之乐中退堕下来,被烦恼之敌击败。这就是它的含义。巴利
Aṅge sarīre jātanti aṅgajātaṃ, purisanimittaṃ. Satipi avasesasarīrāvayavānaṃ tathābhāve ruḷhivasena tadeva tathā vuttaṃ. Pavesentoti dvayaṃdvayasamāpattisaṅkhātakāyikakiriyaṃ nipphādento. Parājitoti dullabhāya khaṇasampattiyā laddhabbato dullabhā lokiyalokuttaraguṇasampattisukhato parihāpetvā kilesasapattehi parājayamāpāditoti attho.
这里的连接是:还在修学阶段的比丘,带着想行淫的意图,在三种淫行方式的湿润处,哪怕只让男根进入像芝麻那么大一点,这名比丘就已经败了。到这里为止——巴利
Ayamettha yojanā – sasikkho sevanacetano tividhe magge allokāse aṅgajātaṃ tilamattampi pavesento so bhikkhu parājito hotīti. Ettāvatā –
如果有比丘,已经接受了比丘的学处和共住生活方式,没有舍弃学处,也没有表明自己软弱无力,却仍然行淫欲之事,哪怕只是跟畜生,他也是波罗夷,不共住。巴利
‘‘Yo pana bhikkhu bhikkhūnaṃ sikkhāsājīvasamāpanno sikkhaṃ apaccakkhāya dubbalyaṃ anāvikatvā methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭiseveyya, antamaso tiracchānagatāyapi, pārājiko hoti asaṃvāso’’ti (pārā. 44) –
应当知道,这是世尊所制定的学处所涵盖的。巴利
Bhagavatā paññattasikkhāpadaṃ saṅgahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
7 像这样,先用这个偈颂说明了以自己主动为根本的波罗夷,现在为了说明以他人主动为根本的波罗夷——也就是“比丘的怨敌把人女带到比丘面前,让她用大便道坐到生支上”这一类情形——而说“插入”等话。其中,“插入”是指:比丘的怨敌把睡着了的人女、放逸的人女等当中的任何一个带来,用前面所说的那些道当中的某一个道,让她坐上去对准比丘的生支时,那个道所发生的插入。应当这样连接:接受插入的人,就是有学。这里依据注疏的话“接受插入,就是同意,就在那一刹那生起享受心”,意思是:从顶端一直到根部插入的过程中,生起享受心的人,就在那一刹那从教法中退失。在“已插入”等语句里,也应当这样连接。巴利
7. Evaṃ imissā gāthāya attūpakkamamūlakaṃ pārājikaṃ dassetvā idāni ‘‘bhikkhupaccatthikā manussitthiṃ bhikkhussa santike ānetvā vaccamaggena (pārā. 58) aṅgajāte abhinisīdentī’’tiādinayappavattaṃ paropakkamamūlakaṃ pārājikañca dassetumāha ‘‘pavesana’’ntiādi. Tattha pavesananti bhikkhupaccatthikehi suttapamattādimanussitthiādīnamaññataraṃ ānetvā yathāvuttamaggānamaññataraṃ maggaṃ yathā pavisati, tathā bhikkhuno aṅgajāte abhinisīdāpane sambhavantaṃ maggappavesanamāha. Pavesanaṃ sādiyanto sasikkho soti yojanā. Ettha ‘‘pavesanaṃ sādiyati adhivāseti, tasmiṃ khaṇe sevanacittaṃ upaṭṭhāpetī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.58) aṭṭhakathāvacanato aggato yāva mūlaṃ pavesentesu assādacittaṃ upaṭṭhāpento taṅkhaṇeyeva sāsanato cutoti attho. Paviṭṭhantiādīsu padesupi evameva yojanā.
“已进入”是指进入的那一刹那。通过“已进入”等说法,应当取由各自行为所标示的那个刹那。因此,这里在表示紧密关联时使用了对格。关于“住立”:注释书中说“在精液流出时”,因为这是指完全没有任何动作的时间段,所以精液流出的时刻也应当包括在内。因此,按照《甘提巴达》中所说的方式,从已进入直到开始拔出之间所出现的住立时段,也应当取。“拔出”就是指拔出的时刻。巴利
Paviṭṭhanti paviṭṭhakkhaṇo. ‘‘Paviṭṭha’’ntiādinā tāya tāya kiriyāya upalakkhito khaṇo gahetabbo. Tenevettha accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ kataṃ. Ṭhitanti ettha ‘‘sukkavissaṭṭhisamaye’’ti aṭṭhakathāvacanassa sabbathā byāpārarahitaṃ kālaṃ sandhāya vuttattā sukkavissaṭṭhisamayopi gahetabbo. Teneva gaṇṭhipade vuttanayena paviṭṭhassa ca yāva uddharaṇārambho, tāva sambhavanto ṭhitakālopi gahetabbo. Uddharaṇanti nīharaṇakālo.
“或”表示选择,“亦”表示集合;这个“或”字,是在显示所选择的各个立场力量均等。这样,通过这两个字,就按照律文中“如果他接受插入,就接受已插入”等语句所呈现的方式,说明在插入等每一个刹那,只要因接受而犯的,就是波罗夷罪。“有学”,意思是与学处共住的人就是有学,也就是还没有舍弃学处的人。“接受”,就是生起享用之心。那个比丘。“除了行为”,是指除了自己主动去做。“退失”,意思是:不能靠“这是比丘的对手干的,不是我做的”这种借口脱罪;只要生起接受之心,就已经从教法中退失了。巴利
Vāti vikappe, apīti samuccaye, so vā-saddena vikappitānaṃ pakkhānaṃ tulyabalataṃ joteti. Iti imehi dvīhipi ‘‘so ce pavesanaṃ sādiyati, paviṭṭhaṃ sādiyatī’’tiādinā (pārā. 58) pāḷiyaṃ āgatanayena labbhamānaṃ pavesanādiekakkhaṇampi sādiyanapaccayā āpajjamānaṃ pārājikaṃ dasseti. Sasikkhoti sikkhāya saha vattatīti sasikkho, apaccakkhātasikkhoti attho. Sādiyantoti sevanacittaṃ upaṭṭhāpento. So bhikkhu. Ṭhapetvā kiriyanti attūpakkamanaṃ vinā. Cutoti ‘‘bhikkhupaccatthikehi katamidaṃ, na mayā’’ti lesena na muccati, sādiyanacitte sati sāsanato cutoyeva hotīti adhippāyo.
在这里,“有学”这个说法,是依据学处原文“没有舍弃学处、没有表明自己软弱”(波逸提44)所显示的义理而指出的。在它的词句分别(波逸提45)以及相应的注释中,已经对舍弃学处作了详细分析。简要地说,应当这样理解:舍弃学处是依心、对象、时间、方便、对人的认知而发生的,不是没有这些条件也能发生。也就是说,只有以想要从具足戒身份退失的心,才会舍弃学处;并不是嬉笑着或吵闹着说的人就算舍弃。这样,舍弃学处是依心而发生,不是没有心也能发生。巴利
Ettha ca sasikkhoti idaṃ ‘‘sikkhaṃ apaccakkhāya dubbalyaṃ anāvikatvā’’ti (pārā. 44) sikkhāpadapāṭhassa atthadassanavasena niddiṭṭhaṃ. Tassa padabhājane (pārā. 45), tadaṭṭhakathāya ca vibhattaṃ sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ saṅkhepato evaṃ veditabbaṃ – cittakhettakālapayogapuggalavijānanavasena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti, na tadabhāvena. Upasampannabhāvato cavitukāmatācitteneva hi sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti, na davā vā ravā vā vadantassa. Evaṃ cittavasena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti, na tadabhāvena.
同样地,如果有人说“我舍弃佛、我舍弃法、我舍弃僧、我舍弃学、律、巴帝摩卡、诵戒、和尚、阿阇梨、共住弟子、受教弟子、同和尚者、同阿阇梨者、同梵行者”——像这样所说的十四种佛等对象;以及有人说“请把我当作在家人、近事男、园民、沙弥、外道、外道弟子、非沙门、非释迦子”——像这样所说的八种在家人等对象;在这二十二种对象词中,不管用哪一种自己的说法,只要想说其中任何一种而说出了任何一种,就算舍弃学处。并不是取了树等某个名称来舍弃学处。这样,就是按所说的对象而有舍弃学处,并不是没有这个对象也能成立。巴利
Tathā ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhāmi, dhammaṃ paccakkhāmi, saṅghaṃ paccakkhāmi, sikkhaṃ, vinayaṃ, pātimokkhaṃ, uddesaṃ, upajjhāyaṃ, ācariyaṃ, saddhivihārikaṃ, antevāsikaṃ, samānupajjhāyakaṃ, samānācariyakaṃ, sabrahmacāriṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti evaṃ vuttānaṃ buddhādīnaṃ catuddasannaṃ, ‘‘gihīti maṃ dhārehi, upāsako, ārāmiko, sāmaṇero, titthiyo, titthiyasāvako, assamaṇo, asakyaputtiyoti maṃ dhārehī’’ti evaṃ vuttānaṃ gihiādīnaṃ aṭṭhannañcāti imesaṃ bāvīsatiyā khettapadānaṃ yassa kassaci savevacanassa vasena tesu yaṃ kiñci vattukāmassa yaṃ kiñci vadato sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti, na rukkhādīnaṃ aññatarassa nāmaṃ gahetvā sikkhaṃ paccakkhantassa. Evaṃ khettavasena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti, na tadabhāvena.
在这里,所谓“我舍弃”和“你认我为”这类现在时的说法,以及“我不需要佛了、我要佛还有什么用、佛对我没有意义、我已彻底脱离佛”等以动词表达但不带时间、并与前面十四句连在一起说出的“我不需要”等四句,只有依据这些本身表述的方式,才构成舍弃学处;而不是在说“已舍弃”“将舍弃”“你认我为”“你将认我为”“我应当舍弃”等过去、未来或假设的说法时构成。如此,依现在时以及不涉及时间的方式,才构成舍弃学处,没有这种方式就不构成。巴利
Tattha yadetaṃ ‘‘paccakkhāmī’’ti ca ‘‘maṃ dhārehī’’ti cāti vuttaṃ vattamānakālavacanaṃ, yāni ca ‘‘alaṃ me buddhena, kiṃ nu me buddhena, na mamattho buddhena, sumuttāhaṃ buddhenā’’tiādinā nayena ākhyātavasena kālaṃ anāmasitvā purimehi cuddasahi padehi saddhiṃ yojetvā vuttāni ‘‘alaṃ me’’tiādīni cattāri padāni, tesaṃyeva savevacanānaṃ vasena paccakkhānaṃ hoti, na ‘‘paccakkhāsi’’nti vā ‘‘paccakkhissa’’nti vā ‘‘maṃ dhāresī’’ti vā ‘‘maṃ dhāressatī’’ti vā ‘‘yaṃ nūnāhaṃ paccakkheyya’’nti vātiādīni atītānāgataparikappavacanāni bhaṇantassa. Evaṃ vattamānakālavasena ceva anāmaṭṭhakālavasena ca paccakkhānaṃ hoti, na tadabhāvena.
舍弃的方式有两种:身体的行为和言语的行为。其中,像“我舍弃佛”这样,用任何一种语言把话说出来,单单靠言语的行为就构成舍弃,而不是在写字,或者做手势等身体行为的时候构成。像这样,单单靠言语的行为就构成舍弃,没有这个就不构成。巴利
Payogo pana duvidho kāyiko ca vācasiko ca. Tattha ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’tiādinā nayena yāya kāyaci bhāsāya vacībhedaṃ katvā vācasikapayogeneva paccakkhānaṃ hoti, na akkharalikhanaṃ vā hatthamuddādidassanaṃ vā kāyapayogaṃ karontassa. Evaṃ vācasikapayogeneva paccakkhānaṃ hoti, na tadabhāvena.
舍戒的人有两种:一种是舍戒者本人,另一种是对方——也就是他向其舍戒的那个人。其中,舍戒者本人如果不是疯子、心乱的人、被剧苦逼恼的人当中的任何一种,才算数。而对方——他向其舍戒的那个人——如果是人类,又不是疯子等那一类人,而且当面在场,那么舍学处才成立。因为如果不在当面,通过使者或书信来传达,是不算数的。像这样,依照上面所说的人的条件,舍戒才成立,不具备这些条件就不成立。巴利
Puggalo pana duvidho yo ca paccakkhāti, yassa ca paccakkhāti. Tattha yo paccakkhāti, so sace ummattakakhittacittavedanaṭṭānaṃ aññataro na hoti. Yassa pana paccakkhāti, so sace manussajātiko hoti, na ca ummattakādīnaṃ aññataro, sammukhībhūto ca sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti. Na hi asammukhībhūtassa dūtena vā paṇṇena vā ārocanaṃ ruhati. Evaṃ yathāvuttassa puggalassa vasena paccakkhānaṃ hoti, na tadabhāvena.
了知也分两种:限定和不限定。其中,如果限定说“我向这个人或这些人告知”,假如他们像世间普通人那样,听到话在作意的时候就能明白,那么在他话说完之后立刻就能以“这个人厌离了”或“想还俗过在家生活”等任何方式知道他已经舍了学处,学处就算已经舍了。如果过后才想“这个人说了什么”然后才知道,或者是别人知道,那学处就没有舍。如果不限定而说,只要有任何一个人类按上面说的方式听懂了话的意思,学处就算已经舍了。像这样,是根据了知而构成舍学处,不是由于没有了知。但如果有人哪怕只是开玩笑地说舍,学处也并没有真正舍掉。巴利
Vijānanampi niyamitāniyamitavasena duvidhaṃ. Tattha yassa, yesaṃ vā niyametvā ‘‘imassa, imesaṃ vā ārocemī’’ti vadati. Sace te yathā pakatiyā loke manussā vacanaṃ sutvā āvajjanasamaye jānanti, evaṃ tassa vacanānantarameva tassa ‘‘ayaṃ ukkaṇṭhito’’ti vā ‘‘gihibhāvaṃ patthayatī’’ti vā yena kenaci ākārena sikkhāpaccakkhānabhāvaṃ jānanti, paccakkhātāva hoti sikkhā. Atha aparabhāge ‘‘kiṃ iminā vutta’’nti cintetvā jānanti, aññe vā jānanti, apaccakkhātāva hoti sikkhā. Aniyametvā ārocentassa pana sace vuttanayena yo koci manussajātiko vacanatthaṃ jānāti, paccakkhātāva hoti sikkhā. Evaṃ vijānanavasena paccakkhānaṃ hoti, na tadabhāvena. Yo pana antamaso davāyapi paccakkhāti, tena apaccakkhātāva hoti sikkhā.
因此,依据前面所说的那些心等,还没有舍弃学处的人,就被称为“具学者”。巴利
Iti imesaṃ vuttappakārānaṃ cittādīnaṃ vasena apaccakkhātasikkho ‘‘sasikkho’’ti vutto.
8-10 现在,为了驳斥那些恶比丘的狡辩——“如今,以覆盖物对覆盖物的碰触中,由于没有执取物被碰触,所以没有罪”——论主综合律典中以“比丘的仇人把女人带到比丘面前,让她用大便道、小便道或口,坐到比丘的男根上,以覆盖者对未覆盖者”等(波罗夷61)方式所说的覆盖段之义,说出“以覆盖物”等话。其中,“以覆盖物”指的是用皮革、粗布、锡片等遮盖。“令进入”这个词,表明覆盖物这一段是依据他人的行为来显示的,因此也应当联系到自身的行为上,并且与下面将要说的“败”相关联。“同样地”这个词,则是指出“令进入”等方式。巴利
8-10. ‘‘Idāni santhatena santhatassa ghaṭṭane upādinnakaghaṭṭanābhāvato doso natthī’’ti pāpabhikkhūnaṃ lesakappanaṃ paṭikkhipituṃ ‘‘bhikkhupaccatthikā manussitthiṃ bhikkhussa santike ānetvā vaccamaggena, passāvamaggena, mukhena aṅgajātaṃ abhinisīdenti santhatāya asanthatassā’’tiādinā (pārā. 61) nayena pāḷiyaṃ vuttasanthatavārānamatthaṃ saṅgaṇhanto āha ‘‘santhatenā’’tiādi. Tattha santhatenāti cammacoḷatipupaṭṭādīhi paṭicchāditena. ‘‘Pavesento’’ti iminā santhatavārassa paropakkamaṃ nissāya dassanamupalakkhaṇanti attūpakkamepi yojetabbataṃ dasseti, tassa vakkhamānena ‘‘parājito’’ti iminā sambandho. ‘‘Tathevā’’ti iminā pavesentotiādippakāraṃ parāmasati.
为了说明“这样进入时,什么时候成为败者(波罗夷)”,所以说“以所取”等。这里,“所取”是指被渴爱和邪见伴随的业,以自身果报的方式被执取、被把握,所以叫所取;这是为了显示自身男根、所依之人以及道(产道等)的摩擦处所摄的身净色。仅凭这一点,就应当取男根处未损坏的身净色、皮肤硬块、疮疖等。《甘提巴达》中说:“所谓‘所取’,就是身根。”与此相反,“非所取”是指遮盖它的衣服等。连接方式如下:以所取对所取,或以所取对非所取,在波罗夷境中摩擦时;或以非所取对所取,或以非所取对非所取,在波罗夷境中摩擦时。这里,带工具格词尾的诸词,是“以男根”一词的修饰语。巴利
Evaṃ pavesento kadā parājito hotīti āha ‘‘upādinnenā’’tiādi. Ettha upādinnenāti taṇhādiṭṭhīhi upetena kammunā attano phalabhāveneva ādinnaṃ gahitanti upādinnaṃ, etena attano aṅgajātassa, vatthupuggalānaṃ maggassa ca ghaṭṭanaṭṭhānagataṃ kāyappasādaṃ dasseti. Imināva aṅgajātagataṃ anaṭṭhakāyappasādaṃ cammakhilaṃ, piḷakādi ca gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Upādinnakaṃ nāma kāyindriya’’nti gaṇṭhipade vuttaṃ. Tabbipariyāyena ‘‘anupādinnaka’’nti tappaṭicchādakaṃ coḷādi vuttaṃ. Upādinnena upādinne, anupādinne vā pārājikakkhette ghaṭṭite, anupādinnakena vā upādinne anupādinne vā pārājikakkhette ghaṭṭiteti yojanā. Ettha ca karaṇavacanantāni padāni ‘‘aṅgajātenā’’ti imassa visesanāni.
到这里为止,按照有覆与无覆四种情况,已经说明了自作时在波罗夷境上犯波罗夷。现在为了说明他作时也一样,所以说“若”等话。“此处”指的是这四种情况。“于波罗夷境进入时”中的“时”字,总括了进入、停留、拔出这三个刹那。因为“彼”字和“凡”字永远相关联,所以在取“彼”字时,也要把“凡”字带进来;靠它们的作用,“亦”字有总括的意思。这里的义理连接是:被比丘的怨敌带来,使坐在比丘男根上的人女、黄门等,在三道中任何一道所摄的波罗夷境被进入时,或者按“时”字所总括的进入、停留、拔出中任一刹那,如果随喜——就像蛇口等进入时不害怕,被欲贪渴爱所制伏而随喜——那个比丘也成波罗夷。用“若随喜”这句带有疑虑的话,暗示不随喜就无罪。巴利
Ettāvatā santhatacatukkavasena attūpakkame sati pārājikakkhette pārājikaṃ dassetvā idāni parūpakkamepi dassetumāha ‘‘sace’’tiādi. Etthāti etesu catūsu vikappesu. Pārājikakkhette paviṭṭhe tūti ettha tu-saddena pavesanaṭṭhituddhārakkhaṇattayaṃ samuccinoti. Yaṃtaṃ-saddānaṃ niccasambandhattā hi ‘‘so’’ti taṃ-saddopādāne ‘‘yo’’ti yaṃ-saddopi ajjhāharitabbo, sāmatthiyena sampiṇḍanattho apisaddo ca. Ayamettha atthayojanā – bhikkhupaccatthikehi ānetvā bhikkhuno aṅgajāte abhinisīdāpitamanussitthiādīnaṃ tīsu maggesu aññataramaggasaṅkhātaṃ pārājikakkhettaṃ paviṭṭhe vā tu-saddena sampiṇḍitapavesanaṭṭhituddhārānamaññatarakkhaṇe vā sace yo sādiyati, sappamukhādippavesanakāle viya anuttasitvā kāmarāgapipāsābhibhūto yadi sādiyati, sopi bhikkhu parājito hotīti yojanā. ‘‘Sace sādiyatī’’ti iminā sāsaṅkavacanena na sādiyati, anāpattīti sūcitaṃ hoti.
以“波罗夷田”这个词限定之后,为了说明在其他地方违犯的人,在这种情形下可能生起的其余罪,所以说了“田”等话。“此处”要理解为“在此”并连接起来。虽然“田”是笼统的说法,但因为前面已经用“波罗夷田”特别限定了,而且后面还要制定土喇咤亚、恶作等,所以依“没有其他解释”的道理,就能得出这个意思:土喇咤亚和恶作的田。以“耳孔、鼻孔”等将要说的方式,说的就是活人身体上的土喇咤亚、恶作之田。巴利
‘‘Pārājikakkhette’’ti iminā byavacchinne aññasmiṃ ṭhāne vītikkamantassa imasmiṃyeva vikappe sambhavantiyo itarāpattiyo dassetumāha ‘‘khette’’tiādi. ‘‘Etthā’’ti ānetvā sambandhanīyaṃ. ‘‘Khette’’ti sāmaññaniddesepi heṭṭhā ‘‘pārājikakkhette’’ti visesitattā, uparithullaccayādīnañca vidhīyamānattā aññathānupapattilakkhaṇāya sāmatthiyā thullaccayadukkaṭānaṃ khetteti ayamattho labbhati. ‘‘Kaṇṇacchiddakkhināsāsū’’tiādinā nayena vakkhamānesu jīvamānakasarīragatathullaccayadukkaṭakkhettesūti vuttaṃ hoti.
在这两种情形里,因为没法说“以有覆盖等让有覆盖等进入,以所取等碰触所取等时能忍受的人无犯”,所以在波罗夷情形中已说的一切变例,在这里套用时应当这样套用:在偷兰遮情形中,无论有覆盖还是无覆盖,无论用有覆盖的还是无覆盖的男根行淫,无论碰触的是所取还是非所取,是用所取碰触的,同样是用非所取碰触的,就为他判定偷兰遮。同样,在恶作情形中,有覆盖或……中略……碰触时,就为他判定恶作。应当这样套用。巴利
Imesu dvīsu khettesu ‘‘santhatādinā santhatādiṃ pavesentassa upādinnādīhi upādinnādīnaṃ ghaṭṭane adhivāsentassa anāpattī’’ti vattumasakkuṇeyyatāya pārājikakkhette vuttasabbavikappe ettha yojentehi evaṃ yojetabbaṃ – thullaccayakkhette santhate vā asanthate vā santhatena vā asanthatena vā aṅgajātena sevantassa upādinne vā anupādinne vā upādinnena, tathā anupādinnena vā ghaṭṭite thullaccayaṃ tassa viniddiseti. Evaṃ dukkaṭakkhette santhate vā…pe… ghaṭṭite dukkaṭañca tassa viniddiseti yojetabbaṃ.
在这里,在一切情况下、三种境界中,“已执取”这个词都包括活人身上的净色、生殖器,以及那里生出的皮肤硬块和疮疖;但在恶作境界中,还包括手指等其他肢体部分。在三种境界中,“未执取”这个词包括遮盖生殖器等的衣物等;但在恶作境界中,则包括生殖相中已坏失的身净色、皮肤硬块、疮疖、毛发等。这些是未执取的。而对于生殖器以外的已执取肢体,在三种境界中进入的,都只是恶作。巴利
Iha sabbattha tīsupi khettesu upādinna-saddena anaṭṭhakāyappasādaṃ aṅgajātañca tatthajātacammakhilapiḷakā ca gayhanti, dukkaṭakkhette pana aṅguliādiitarāvayavāpi. Tīsupi khettesu anupādinna-saddena aṅgajātādipaṭicchāditavatthādayo ca gayhanti, dukkaṭakkhette pana nimitte naṭṭhakāyappasādacammakhilapiḷakaromādīni. Imāni ca anupādinnāni. Aṅgajātetaropādinnāvayave ca tīsupi khettesu pavesentassa dukkaṭameva.
11 到此为止,已经按照活人身体上有覆盖物和没有覆盖物的情况,分别说明了:对每种情况,在以有覆盖、无覆盖两种方式,在波罗夷、偷兰遮、恶作三种范畴中行淫的人,以及别人行事时随喜的人,各自依情形得到波罗夷、偷兰遮、恶作罪。现在,为了堵住恶比丘的借口——“对死尸那样行淫的人没有罪过”,要依据经文中已经说到的上述三种范畴,说明其中可得的三类罪,所以接下来说“对死者……”等话。巴利
11. Ettāvatā jīvamānasarīre santhatāsanthatavasena paccekaṃ tividhesupi pārājikathullaccayadukkaṭakkhettesu santhatāsanthatavaseneva duvidhena nimittena sevantassa paropakkame sati sādiyantassa labbhamānapārājikathullaccayadukkaṭāpattiyo yathāsambhavaṃ dassetvā idāni ‘‘matasarīre pana tathā tathā sevantānaṃ doso natthī’’ti pāpabhikkhūnaṃ lesokāsapaṭibāhanatthaṃ pāḷiyaṃ dassitesu yathāvuttesu tīsu khettesu labbhamānā tisso āpattiyo dassetumāha ‘‘mate’’tiādi.
这里,“已死之人”这个说法,要把“人女等的身体”补进去,然后作意思的贯通。通过这样,就显示了“未被啃食”等所说的诸相所依靠的地方。就像后面将以“只留下相”等方式说的偈颂那样,即使整个身体都被啃食了,相存在或不存在,就是有罪或无罪的判断标准,所以“未被啃食”这个说法不能和“已死之人”分开,而要把“相”这个词补进去,用它来限定“已死之人”。或者,也可以把后面以“只留下相”等所说的偈颂里的“相”这个词引过来,与之连接。巴利
Tattha ‘‘mate’’ti etassa ‘‘manussitthiādīnaṃ sarīre’’ti ajjhāharitvā atthayojanā kātabbā. Iminā ‘‘akkhāyite’’tiādinā dassitānaṃ nimittānaṃ nissayaṃ dassitaṃ hoti. ‘‘Nimittamattaṃ sesetvā’’tiādinā nayena vakkhamānagāthāyaṃ viya sakalasarīre khāditepi nimittassa vijjamānāvijjamānabhāvoyeva āpattiyābhāvābhāvassa pamāṇanti ‘‘akkhāyite’’ti etena ‘‘mate’’ti etaṃ avisesetvā ‘‘nimitte’’ti ajjhāharitvā taṃ tena visesitabbaṃ. Atha vā ‘‘nimittamatta’’ntiādinā vakkhamānagāthāya ‘‘nimitte’’ti padaṃ ānetvā yojetabbaṃ.
“未被啃食”是指:在一切方面都未被啃食、已经成为波罗夷事之相的相。“大部分被啃食”则是指:只啃食了一点点、大部分还留着的相。他们说:“在四分之中,被啃食了三分,这个相就叫做大部分被啃食。”“淫欲”是指:因为被贪染缠缚而犯下类似性质的罪,所以这是交合者的淫欲;对于死女等对象,虽然并没有因贪染缠缚而产生类似的性质,但在那种情况下的违犯,依照惯用法也称为“淫欲”。巴利
Akkhāyiteti sabbathā akkhāyite pārājikavatthubhūte nimitte. Yebhuyyakkhāyitepi cāti kiñci kiñci khāditvā bahukāvasiṭṭhe nimitte. ‘‘Yassa catūsu bhāgesu tibhāgamattaṃ khāditaṃ, taṃ nimittaṃ yebhuyyakkhāyitaṃ nāmā’’ti vadanti. Methunanti rāgapariyuṭṭhānena sadisabhāvāpattiyā mithunānaṃ idaṃ methunaṃ, matitthiādīnaṃ rāgapariyuṭṭhānena sadisattābhāvepi tattha vītikkamo ruḷhiyā ‘‘methuna’’nti vuccati.
波罗夷的意思就是已经被击败、已经落到败北的地步。这个“波罗夷”一词,用在学处、罪和人这三类上。其中,像经文里说“阿难,这是不可能的,没有这个道理:如来会因为跋耆人或跋耆子的缘故,把已经为声闻弟子制定的波罗夷学处废除”,这里应当知道是用在学处上。像“比丘,你犯了波罗夷罪”,这是用在罪上。像“我们不是波罗夷,被带走的那个人才是波罗夷”,这是用在人上。至于“以波罗夷法而破坏”这类语境,他们说这个词也用在法上。不过,因为那里的“法”有时指罪,有时指学处本身,所以不应该把它单独另立一类。巴利
Pārājikotiparājito, parājayamāpannoti attho. Ayañhi pārājika-saddo sikkhāpadāpattipuggalesu vattati. Tattha ‘‘aṭṭhānametaṃ ānanda anavakāso, yaṃ tathāgato vajjīnaṃ vā vajjiputtakānaṃ vā kāraṇā sāvakānaṃ pārājikaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññattaṃ samūhaneyyā’’ti (pārā. 43) evaṃ sikkhāpade vattamāno veditabbo. ‘‘Āpatti tvaṃ bhikkhu āpanno pārājika’’nti (pārā. 67) āpattiyā. ‘‘Na mayaṃ pārājikā, yo avahaṭo, so pārājiko’’ti (pārā. 155) evaṃ puggale. ‘‘Pārājikena dhammena anuddhaṃseyyā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 384) pana dhamme vattatīti vadanti. Yasmā pana tattha dhammoti katthaci āpatti, katthaci sikkhāpadameva adhippetaṃ, tasmā so visuṃ na vattabbo.
在这里,学处:谁违越了它,它就把谁击败,所以称为“波罗夷”。罪:谁犯了它,它就把谁击败,所以也称为“波罗夷”。人:因为他已经被击败、已经陷入败北,所以称为“波罗夷”。在学处和罪当中,“波罗夷”这个词的意思是“击败”,所以“波罗夷”是作格结构(主动者)的用法;而在指人时,意思是“被击败”,所以应当知道这是受格结构(被动者)的用法。“男子”这个词,在这里指的就是前面所说的那位比丘本人。这是用共通的名相,来显示其特殊含义。巴利
Tattha sikkhāpadaṃ yo taṃ atikkamati taṃ parājeti, tasmā ‘‘pārājika’’nti vuccati. Āpatti pana yo naṃ ajjhāpajjati taṃ parājeti, tasmā ‘‘pārājikā’’ti vuccati. Puggalo yasmā parājito parājayamāpanno, tasmā ‘‘pārājiko’’ti vuccati. Sikkhāpadāpattīsu pārājika-saddo parājetīti ‘‘pārājiko’’ti kattusādhano, puggale pana parājīyatīti kammasādhanoti veditabbo. ‘‘Naro’’ti iminā pubbe vuttabhikkhuyeva adhippeto. Sāmaññajotanā visese avatiṭṭhatīti.
12 “大部分被啃食”:把食物分成四份,留下其中一份,吃掉其余三份。“吃了一半”:留下相等的一份,吃掉其余部分。“粗重违犯”就是土喇咤亚(thullaccaya),因为犯了这个就成为罪,所以叫土喇咤亚罪。这里应当理解,“土喇咤亚”这个说法是就波逸提等罪来说的,不是指波罗夷和僧残。“其余的”:指腋窝等其余部位。注疏里说过:“在其余身体部位,如腋窝等处,则是恶作。”所谓“恶作”,就是“做坏了”;“恶作”这个词因为是固定中性的,所以即使它修饰的是阴性的“罪”这个词,也用中性形式来限定。巴利
12.Yebhuyyakkhāyiteti catūsu koṭṭhāsesu ekakoṭṭhāsāvasesaṃ katvā khādite. Upaḍḍhakkhāyiteti samabhāgāvasesaṃ khādite. Thūlo accayo thullaccayo, soyeva āpajjīyatīti āpattīti thullaccayāpatti. Pācittiyādayo sandhāyettha thullaccayavohāro, na pārājikasaṅghādiseseti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Seseti avasese upakacchakādīsu. Vuttañhi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘avasesasarīre upakacchakādīsu dukkaṭa’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.59-60). Duṭṭhu katanti dukkaṭaṃ, dukkaṭa-saddo niyatanapuṃsakattā itthiliṅgassāpi āpatti-saddassa saliṅgena visesanaṃ hoti.
13 13. “只留下相而啃食”这一句的意思是:即使全身都被啃食,只要三相中还留下任何一个相。这里的“也”字表示进一步排除,意思是:连那种情况都算,其他情况就更不用说了。所谓“在那个相没有被啃食,或者大部分被啃食”的情形,是在前面说的三种相中,只要对其中任何一个相行淫,就犯波罗夷罪,这就是这里的意旨。“也行淫”中的“也”字表示关联,因此并不只是关联下面所说的内容。铺展等种种变通情形,也应按照前面所说的方式在这里同样套用。巴利
13.Nimittamattaṃ sesetvā khāyitepīti ettha tiṇṇamaññataraṃ nimittaṃ sesetvā sakalasarīre khāditepi. Pi-saddo byatireke, pageva itareti dīpeti. Tasmiṃ nimitte akkhāyite vā yebhuyyakkhāyite vāti dvidhā vuttesu tīsu nimittesu aññatarasmiṃ nimitte methunaṃ sevatopi parājayo pārājikāpatti hotīti adhippāyo . Sevatopīti ettha pi-saddo apekkhāyaṃ. Tasmā na kevalaṃ heṭṭhā vuttānamevāti apekkhati. Santhatādayo vikappā yathāvuttanayena etthāpi yojetabbā.
14 “膨胀等状态出现时”这一句里,按照注疏的说法:“当身体膨胀、腐烂,布满青蝇,被虫群爬满,九个疮口流着脓血,已经成了死尸的样子,连靠近都做不到时,这时就不再属于波罗夷和土喇咤亚的范畴;对这样的身体,不管从哪个部位行淫,都只犯恶作。”因此应当理解:在所有情况下,凡是属于被啃食等一切变化状态的波罗夷、土喇咤亚、恶作范畴,都已经被涵盖在内了。在那里也同样不是无犯,为了说明这一点,所以说“恶作”。“被啃食、已被啃食”等说法中,应当知道这些“被啃食、已被啃食”等,全都是针对死尸而言,要联系到“不是对活人”来理解。巴利
14. ‘‘Uddhumātādisampatte’’ti ettha ‘‘yadā pana sarīraṃ uddhumātakaṃ hoti kuthitaṃ nīlamakkhikāsamākiṇṇaṃ kimikulasamākulaṃ navahi vaṇamukhehi paggharitapubbakuṇapabhāvena upagantumpi asakkuṇeyyaṃ, tadā pārājikavatthuñca thullaccayavatthuñca jahati, tādise sarīre yattha katthaci upakkamato dukkaṭamevā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.59-60) aṭṭhakathāvacanato sabbatthāpi cāti akkhāyitādisabbavikappopagatāni pārājikathullaccayadukkaṭakkhettāni gahitānīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tatthāpi vītikkamo anāpatti na hotīti dassetumāha ‘‘dukkaṭa’’nti. ‘‘Khāyitakkhāyita’’ntiādīsu khāyitakkhāyitañca nāmetaṃ sabbaṃ matasarīrakeyeva veditabbaṃ, na jīvamāneti yojetabbaṃ.
15 15. 对于“活着的人又怎么说?”这个问题,回答说“然而切断之后”等等。其中,“伤口的摄集”,是指从伤口收摄来说。“于彼”,是指标相所安住、被拔除的那个部位。这里第二个“然而”一词,是在点明此处虽未显示、但依注疏所传的理路可以了知的一种特殊含义。因为注疏中说:“即使标相完全被啃食,连皮肤也没有了,只要标相的形状还显现,还能进入,就仍然是波罗夷。”依照对死者所说的这一判定,对于活着的人也一样可以了知:如果连皮肤都被完全拔除,标相的形状显现,还能进入,在那里行事的人就仍然是波罗夷——这段话要表达的就是这个应当如此了知的含义。巴利
15. Jīvamāne kathanti āha ‘‘chinditvā panā’’tiādi. Tattha vaṇasaṅkhepatoti vaṇasaṅgahato. Tasminti yattha ṭhitaṃ nimittaṃ uppāṭitaṃ, tasmiṃ padese. Ettha dutiyo pana-saddo idha adassitaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ āgatanayena viññāyamānaṃ atthavisesaṃ joteti. Aṭṭhakathāyahi ‘‘yadipi nimittaṃ sabbaso khāyitaṃ, chavicammampi natthi, nimittasaṇṭhānaṃ paññāyati, pavesanaṃ jāyati, pārājikamevā’’ti evaṃ ajīvamāne vuttavinicchayānusārena jīvamānepi chavicammamattaṃ ce sabbaso uppāṭitaṃ, nimittasaṇṭhānaṃ paññāyati, pavesanakkhamaṃ hoti, tattha sevantassa pārājikamevāti viññāyamānamatthaṃ jotetīti vuttaṃ hoti.
16 16. “从此处之后,依标相而说”,这是前后文的连接。“已落下的”,就是“在已落下的(部位)”,或者也可以这样读。“依标相而说”,意思是:从标相所在的部位已落下的肉片,这是连接。意思是说,切断或切除之后,在那已落下的标相肉片上。这是明确指出:以淫欲之心而行事的人,犯恶作。巴利
16. Tato nimittatoti sambandho. Patitāyāti patitāyaṃ, ayameva vā pāṭho. Nimittatoti nimittappadesato patitāyaṃ maṃsapesiyanti sambandho. Chinditvā vā tacchetvā vā patitāyaṃ tassaṃ nimittamaṃsapesiyanti attho. Methunarāgena upakkamantassa dukkaṭaṃ viniddiseti yojanā.
17 在“即使只有指甲背那么大”等偈颂处,应当把“切断后”等义注内容引进来连接。在“satī”(存在)这个词上,“残余的”是补足的读法。在“jīvamāne”(活着)这个词上,“身体”是补足的读法。而在活着的身体上,切断、切除之后,标相部位被挖除,即使还有指甲背那么大的肉残留,或者有筋腱残留,这时行淫欲的人就构成波罗夷(驱摈罪)。这是句义连接。巴利
17.‘‘Nakhapiṭṭhippamāṇepī’’tiādigāthāya ‘‘chinditvā’’tiādikā aṭṭhakathā ānetvā sambandhitabbā. Satīti ettha ‘‘avasiṭṭhe’’ti pāṭhaseso. Jīvamāneti ettha ‘‘sarīre’’ti pāṭhaseso. Jīvamānasarīre pana chinditvā tacchetvā nimitte uppāṭite nakhapiṭṭhippamāṇepi maṃse, nhārumhi vā avasiṭṭhe sati methunaṃ paṭisevanto parājitoti yojanā.
18 在“耳孔、眼……”这首偈颂里,要把“活着的”引进来连接起来,“身体”是补足的读法。从“马、牛、水牛等”这些说法,因为下文要讲马等,所以用排除法可以推知是指“人”。意思是:在活着的人的身体上,耳……(中略)……或者在伤口中。这是句子的连接方式。“膀胱道”是指尿道内部。“或者在伤口中”是指被刀等造成的伤口中。“生支”是指即使只有芝麻那么大的生支部分。“以染”是指以淫欲之染。巴利
18. ‘‘Kaṇṇacchiddakkhī’’ti gāthāya ‘‘jīvamāne’’ti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ, ‘‘sarīre’’ti pāṭhaseso. ‘‘Assagomahisādīna’’ntiādinā assādīnaṃ vakkhamānattā pārisesato ‘‘manussāna’’nti labbhati. Manussānaṃ jīvamānasarīre kaṇṇa…pe… vaṇesu vāti yojanā. Vatthikoseti muttapathabbhantare. Vaṇesu vāti satthakādīhi katavaṇesu. Aṅgajātanti tilamattampi aṅgajātekadesaṃ. Rāgāti methunarāgena.
19 19. “在身体其余部位”是指除了耳孔等前面说过的身体部位之外的身体部位。因此说“在腋窝、大腿等部位”,所谓腋窝就是手臂根部内侧。“大腿等”是指大腿内侧等。用“等”这个字涵盖了前面说过的其余身体部位。应当把“男根”拿来连接上去。“插入”从文势可以得出这个意思,就是说插入芝麻粒大小的男根。“以欲染行事的人”是指以欲染而违犯的人。“以铺设”等所说的方式,在这里也应当套用。巴利
19.Avasesasarīrasminti kaṇṇacchiddādiyathāvuttasarīrāvayavavajjitasarīrappadese. Tenāha ‘‘upakacchūrukādisū’’ti upakacchaṃ nāma bāhumūlantaraṃ. Ūrukādisūti ūruvemajjhādīsu. Ādi-saddena vuttāvasesaṃ sarīrappadesaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. ‘‘Aṅgajāta’’nti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. ‘‘Pavesetvā’’ti sāmatthiyā labbhati, aṅgajātaṃ tilabījamattaṃ pavesetvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Vasā methunarāgassa sevamānassāti methunarāgena vītikkamantassāti attho. ‘‘Santhatenā’’tiādinā vuttappakāro etthāpi yojetabbo.
20 20.「马、牛、水牛等」中的「等」字,摄括了牛羚、鹿等。马等是显而易见的。因为下文将说「死者的」,所以从文势可以推得「活着的」。「行」——由于随顺「以欲染之力」这句话,应作这样的连接:以欲染之力,即使只插入芝麻粒大小的男根部位,也触犯土喇咤亚罪。这里应当读作「骆驼、驴、大象、马、牛、水牛等」。这样一来,以注疏末尾所举的、表示类别的「等」字,就能摄括一切未说出的众生——他们具有鼻孔、尿道等堪受土喇咤亚犯处的特征。如果以「马、牛、水牛等」第一句末尾所举的「等」字,就已经摄括了骆驼、驴、大象,那么后面再说它们就成了多余。巴利
20.Assagomahisādīnanti ādi-saddena gokaṇṇagavajādayo saṅgahitā. Assādayo pākaṭāyeva. ‘‘Matāna’’nti vakkhamānattā ‘‘jīvamānāna’’nti sāmatthiyā labbhati. Sevanti ‘‘vasā methunarāgassā’’ti anuvattamānattā methunarāgavasena tilabījamattampi aṅgajātappadesaṃ pavesento thullaccayaṃ phuseti yojanā. Ettha ca ‘‘oṭṭhagadrabhadantīnaṃ, assagomahisādina’’nti pāṭhena bhavitabbaṃ. Evañhi sati aṭṭhakathāvasāne niddiṭṭhena pakāratthavācinā ādi-saddena thullaccayavītikkamārahanāsāvatthikosavanto avuttā sabbepi sattā gayhanti. ‘‘Assagomahisādīna’’nti paṭhamapādāvasāne niddiṭṭhena ādi-saddena oṭṭhagadrabhadantīnampi saṅgaho hotīti tesaṃ punavacanaṃ niratthakaṃ siyāti.
21 21. “这样行持的人犯恶作”,这是连接关系。“一切畜生”:因为横着走、横向生长,所以叫畜生;它们全都是畜生,所以叫“一切畜生”,指的就是这一切畜生。“这样”这个词,因为承接了“依欲染之力”等说法,所以意思是说:以欲染之力,哪怕只是把芝麻粒大小的男根部位插入一切畜生的眼等处,也犯恶作。在这里,对于铺陈等不同情形,也不能说没有过失,这一点也要一并接上。巴利
21. Tathā sevamānassa dukkaṭanti sambandho. Sabbatiracchānanti tiriyaṃ añcanti vaḍḍhantīti tiracchā, sabbe ca te tiracchācāti sabbatiracchā, tesaṃ sabbatiracchānaṃ. ‘‘Tathā’’ti iminā ‘‘vasā methunarāgassā’’tiādīnaṃ parāmaṭṭhattā sabbatiracchānānaṃ akkhiādīsu tilabījamattampi aṅgajātappadesaṃ methunarāgena pavesentassa dukkaṭanti vuttaṃ hoti. Etthāpi santhatādivikappe niddosabhāvo na sakkā vattunti tampi yojetabbaṃ.
22 22. 像这样,先说明了在畜生有生命的身躯上可能犯的罪,接着为了说明在它们死后的尸体上也可能犯的罪,所以说“他们”等语。有人说:用“他们”这个词,是把人和畜生都包括进来了。因为已经在人的死尸和活身上,就波罗夷、偷兰遮、恶作这三种处所,显示了三种罪,所以再次包括人就没有意义,应当把人排除,用“随顺一切畜生”这个词来连接,意思是:他们一切畜生趣的众生。“在湿身中”,是指在还没有达到膨胀等状态的湿润死尸中,在三种处所里,不论有铺设还是没有铺设,依欲染之力而行淫的人,三种罪都可能发生——这是与“随顺”等语一起配合理解的。巴利
22. Evaṃ tiracchānānaṃ jīvamānakasarīre labbhamānā āpattiyo dassetvā tesaṃyeva matasarīrepi sambhavanakaāpattiyo dassetumāha ‘‘tesa’’ntiādi. ‘‘Tesa’’nti iminā manussatiracchānagatānaṃ gahaṇanti vadanti. Manussānaṃ matāmatasarīre pārājikathullaccayadukkaṭakkhettesu tissannaṃ āpattīnaṃ dassitattā, puna gahaṇe payojanābhāvā te vajjetvā anuvattamānasabbatiracchānanti iminā yojetabbaṃ, tesaṃ sabbatiracchānagatānanti attho. Allasarīresūti uddhumātakādibhāvamasampattesu allamatasarīresu tividhe khettasmiṃ asanthate, santhate vā sati methunarāgassa vasā sevato tividhāpi āpatti siyāti anuvattamānapadehi saha yojanā.
在三种处中:在人的死尸中,按前面所说的方式,分为未宣说、大部分宣说两类,即称为三道(波罗夷、突喇遮、恶作三道)的波罗夷处;以及在大部分宣说、一半宣说两类中,同样称为三道的处所;在未宣说、大部分宣说两类中,称为耳孔、鼻孔、生殖器、伤口的突喇遮处;以及在大部分宣说、一半宣说两类中,同样称为耳孔、鼻孔、生殖器、伤口的处所;在未宣说、大部分宣说、一半宣说、大部分宣说各类中,称为其余身体的恶作处——在这样三种处中。“有”,就是存在的时候。意思是:不论有铺设还是没有铺设,依欲染之力而享用的人,按情形相应,会有称为波罗夷、突喇遮、恶作的三种罪。巴利
Tividhe khettasminti matamanussasarīre vuttanayena akkhāyitayebhuyyakkhāyitabhede maggattayasaṅkhāte pārājikakkhette ca yebhuyyakkhāyitaupaḍḍhakkhāyitabhede tasmiṃyeva maggattayasaṅkhāte ca, akkhāyitayebhuyyakkhāyitabhede kaṇṇacchiddakkhināsāvatthikosavaṇasaṅkhāte ca thullaccayakkhette upaḍḍhakkhāyitayebhuyyakkhāyitabhede tasmiṃyeva kaṇṇacchiddakkhināsāvatthikosavaṇasaṅkhāte ca, akkhāyitayebhuyyakkhāyitaupaḍḍhakkhāyita yebhuyyakkhāyitabhede avasesasarīrasaṅkhāte dukkaṭakkhette cāti tividhepi khette. Satīti vijjamāne. Santhate vā asanthate vā methunarāgassa vasā sevato yathārahaṃ pārājikathullaccayadukkaṭasaṅkhātā tividhā āpatti bhaveyyāti attho.
当这些身体变成肿胀等状态时,在三种方式中——也就是前面讲铺设等变化时所说的那三种方式——不论在哪一种,以淫欲贪去享用,就犯下应当犯的恶作;而当身体变成肿胀等状态时,则一切处都是恶作。这可以按人身中所说的方式来理解。为了显示畜生趣身体中的差别,才说了“他们于身体的一切状态中”等话,因此恶作应照前面所说的方式来了知。正如注疏中所说:“然而,在腐烂的尸体中,照前面所说的方式,一切处都是恶作。”巴利
Etesameva ca uddhumātādibhāvaṃ sampatte sarīre santhatādivuttavikappayuttesu tīsu maggesu yattha katthaci methunarāgena sevato āpajjitabbadukkaṭañca uddhumātādisampatte sabbatthāpi ca dukkaṭanti manussasarīre vuttanayena viññātuṃ sakkāti imasmiṃ tiracchānagatasarīre visesamattaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tesaṃ allasarīresū’’tiādīnaṃ vuttattā dukkaṭaṃ pubbe vuttanayena veditabbaṃ. Yathāha aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘kuthitakuṇape pana pubbe vuttanayeneva sabbattha dukkaṭa’’nti.
23 在外触碰者,这是句子的连接方式。相,指排尿处。虽然用通称说女人,但因为第四偈将要说是畜生趣女人,所以根据剩余义理,这里只取人女和非人女,由此也包含非人女。在这一偈之后的下一偈中,承接这里的女人一词,那里也可能包含非人女;但为了显示身触僧残所依的只是人女,应当知道那里所说的女人这一增语,正是表明这个意思。巴利
23. Bahi chupantassāti yojanā. Nimittaṃ muttakaraṇaṃ. ‘‘Itthiyā’’ti sāmaññena vuttepi catutthagāthāya ‘‘tiracchānagatitthiyā’’ti vakkhamānattā pārisesato iminā manussāmanussitthīnameva gahaṇaṃ, iminā amanussitthiyāpi gahaṇassa. Imissānantaragāthāya ito ‘‘itthiyā’’ti anuvattite tatrāpi amanussitthiyāpi gahaṇaṃ siyāti tampi vajjetvā kāyasaṃsaggasaṅghādisesassa vatthubhūtaṃ manussitthimeva dassetuṃ tattha vuttaṃ ‘‘itthiyā’’tiadhikavacanameva ñāpakanti veditabbaṃ.
《大义注》(波罗夷注 1.59-60)里以通说的方式说:“以淫欲贪心用口触碰女人的相,犯土喇咤亚”;《法蕴犍度》里也以通说的方式说:“诸比丘,不应以染心触碰男根,谁触碰,犯土喇咤亚”(《大品》252);而且,对于还没到肿胀等状态、刚死的女人,无论相是没被啃过还是大部分被啃过,由于这个相本身仍可以成为波罗夷事,所以在那种情况下,从外面触碰的也是土喇咤亚。这个道理也不该区分死人和活人,只凭“女人的”这一通说的说法来理解就可以了。巴利
Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.59-60) ‘‘itthinimittaṃ methunarāgena mukhena chupati, thullaccaya’’nti sāmaññena vuttattā ca dhammakkhandhake ‘‘na ca bhikkhave rattacittena aṅgajātaṃ chupitabbaṃ, yo chupeyya, āpatti thullaccayassā’’ti (mahāva. 252) sāmaññavacanato ca uddhumātādibhāvamasampattāya allamatamanussitthiyā ca akkhāyite vā yebhuyyakkhāyite vā nimitte sati pārājikavatthubhāvato tatthāpi bahi chupantassa thullaccayanti ayamatthopi matāmatavisesaṃ akatvā ‘‘itthiyā’’ti imināva sāmaññavacanena gahetabbo.
24 24.“以相”:用自己的男根。“以口”:用原本的口。“女人的相”:活着的女人(人女)的男根/女根。可是,在身触学处的制立事例中,对于死女人一事,说:“比丘无犯僧残,犯土喇咤亚”(《波罗夷》281),所以不应把死女人算进去。同样,在夜叉女一事中,以身体接触的贪染心触碰夜叉女的身体,也说:“比丘无犯僧残,犯土喇咤亚”;而且在这下面第二僧残中将会说:“对黄门、夜叉女、鬼女,他有土喇咤亚”(《律抉择》341),所以非人女也不应算进去。因此说“活着的女人(人女)的男根/女根”。因为若想插入内部,就不可能生起身体接触的贪染心;而“以身体接触的贪染心”这一说法,也表明是想在外面触碰,所以即使没有“在外面”这个词连着说,这个意思也能得到。“重罪”:就是僧残。巴利
24.Nimittenāti attano aṅgajātena. Mukhenāti pakatimukhena. Nimittaṃ itthiyāti jīvamānakamanussitthiyā aṅgajātaṃ. Yasmā pana kāyasaṃsaggasikkhāpadavinītavatthūsu matitthivatthumhi matitthiyā sarīre kāyasaṃsaggarāgena yo chupati, tassa ‘‘anāpatti bhikkhu saṅghādisesassa, āpatti thullaccayassā’’ti (pārā. 281) vuttattā matamanussitthī na gahetabbā. Tatheva yakkhivatthumhi kāyasaṃsaggarāgena yakkhiniyā sarīraṃ yena phuṭṭhaṃ, tassa ‘‘anāpatti bhikkhu saṅghādisesassa, āpatti thullaccayassā’’ti vuttattā, idheva upari dutiyasaṅghādisese ‘‘paṇḍake yakkhipetīsu, tassa thullaccayaṃ siyā’’ti (vi. vi. 341) vakkhamānattā ca amanussitthīpi na gahetabbā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘jīvamānakamanussitthiyā aṅgajāta’’nti. Anto pavesetukāmatāya sati kāyasaṃsaggarāgāsambhavato ‘‘kāyasaṃsaggarāgenā’’ti iminā ca bahi chupitukāmatā viññāyatīti ‘‘bahī’’ti anuvattanaṃ vināpi tadattho labbhati. Garukanti saṅghādiseso.
25 25. “同样地,在外触及者”是句义连接。意思是说:不插入内部,只在外表触碰。“以两种贪染”是指以身体接触的贪染,或以淫欲的贪染。“对男子也一样”是指对活着的男子也一样。“也”这个字表明:并非只按上面所说的方式触碰女人的性器才有罪,对男子也一样,这才显示出来。“相”指的就是男根。“活着的男子”这个限定是从哪里得来的?从注释书《波罗夷注》中的这句话得来:“以身体接触的贪染或以淫欲的贪染,不插入活着的男子的阴茎鞘,以性器触碰性器,犯恶作。”(《波罗夷注》1.59-60)巴利
25. Tatheva bahi chupantassāti yojanā, anto appavesetvā bahiyeva chupantassāti vuttaṃ hoti. Ubhayarāgenāti kāyasaṃsaggarāgena, methunarāgena vā. Purisassāpīti jīvamānakapurisassapi. Pi-saddo na kevalaṃ vuttanayena itthiyā nimittaṃ phusantasseva āpatti, atha kho purisassāpīti dīpeti. ‘‘Nimitta’’nti muttakaraṇameva vuccati. ‘‘Jīvamānakapurisassā’’ti ayaṃ viseso kuto labbhatīti ce? ‘‘Kāyasaṃsaggarāgena vā methunarāgena vā jīvamānakapurisassa vatthikosaṃ appavesento nimittena nimittaṃ chupati, dukkaṭa’’nti ito aṭṭhakathāvacanato (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.59-60) labbhati.
26 六群比丘爬上正在渡阿吉拉瓦底河的牛背,以淫欲染心用男根触碰女根。针对这件事,为了说明《大品》252段所说的“诸比丘,不应以染心触根,若触者,犯土喇咤亚”这一法理,所以说了“以相”等话。这里也因为“同样”一词的连带关系,可以得出“在外”的意思。应当这样连接理解:以淫欲染心,以自己的男根在外触碰畜生雌性的女根,犯土喇咤亚。巴利
26. Aciravatitarantānaṃ gunnaṃ piṭṭhiṃ abhiruhantā chabbaggiyā bhikkhū methunarāgena aṅgajātena aṅgajātaṃ chupiṃsūti imasmiṃ vatthumhi ‘‘na ca bhikkhave rattacittena aṅgajātaṃ chupitabbaṃ, yo chupeyya, āpatti thullaccayassā’’ti (mahāva. 252) āgatanayaṃ dassetumāha ‘‘nimittenā’’tiādi. Etthāpi ‘‘tathā’’ti imassānuvattanato ‘‘bahī’’ti labbhati. Attano nimittena tiracchānagatitthiyā nimittaṃ methunarāgato bahi chupantassa thullaccayaṃ hotīti yojanā.
27 为了说明“从淫欲染心”这个说法所限定的含义,所以接着说“以身触染心”等等。这里同样要借助“以身触染心”这个说法的功能,理解为是在外面触碰。“相”指的是小便道。“触碰”就是接触。巴利
27. ‘‘Methunarāgato’’ti iminā byavacchinnamatthaṃ dassetumāha ‘‘kāyasaṃsaggarāgenā’’tiādi. Etthāpi ‘‘kāyasaṃsaggarāgenā’’tivacanasāmatthiyā bahi chupanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Nimittassāti passāvamaggassa. Chupaneti phusane.
28 28.“在那开口处”这一句,这里要拆词为“在那 开口处”。“开口处”就是张开的地方。因为“在口中”是关联词,而其他关联的对象又没有指明,再加上顺着所听闻的内容来看,所听闻的关联力量最强,所以虽然从前一偈颂“在畜生趣女人的口中”只能了解到所听闻的关联,但在这首偈颂的制戒事缘(《波罗夷》73)中,已经提到“某位比丘去往尸林,看见一个断头者,把性器插入那开口处的口中”这个断头的事例,因此这里应该只取人类的口。不过,如果说在畜生和非人类的口中这样插入也没有过失,那么为了能够这样说,在那里也应当以此作为标示,所以应当理解为:一切足以构成波罗夷者的口中。那性器。这里的连接是:在足以构成波罗夷者的开口处口中,把它置于空中,不碰到任何地方,取出、举起的人,犯恶作。或者,也可以连接为“在畜生的开口处口中”,其余情况的收摄应当以标示的方式来做。巴利
28.Tamāvaṭṭakateti ettha ‘‘taṃ āvaṭṭakate’’ti padacchedo. Āvaṭṭakateti vivaṭe. ‘‘Mukhe’’ti sambandhisaddattā, aññassa sambandhino ca aniddiṭṭhattā sutānulomikānaṃ sutasambandhasseva balavattā ca purimānantaragāthāya ‘‘tiracchānagatitthiyā mukhe’’ti kiñcāpi sutasseva sambandho viññāyati, tathāpi imāya gāthāya vinītavatthumhi (pārā. 73) ‘‘aññataro bhikkhu sivathikaṃ gantvā chinnasīsaṃ passitvā vaṭṭakate mukhe acchupantaṃ aṅgajātaṃ pavesesī’’ti dassitachinnasīsavatthussa saṅgahitattā manussamukhameva gahetabbaṃ siyā. Tiracchānagatānaṃ, pana amanussānañca mukhe tathā paveso niddosoti vattumasakkuṇeyyattā tatthāpi idameva upalakkhaṇanti pārājikappahonakānaṃ sabbesaṃ mukheti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Taṃ aṅgajātaṃ. Tattha āvaṭṭakate pārājikappahonakānaṃ mukhe ākāsagataṃ katvā katthaci aphusāpetvā nīharantassa ukkhipantassa dukkaṭanti yojanā. Atha vā tiracchānānaṃ āvaṭṭakate mukheti yojetvā tadaññasaṅgaho upalakkhaṇavasena kātabbo.
29 “如是”是指“置于空中”,也就是执取前面所说的那种方式。“以四边”是表示伴随工具的具格说法。因为“边”是关联词,所以依语义关联可以得出“相”。“女人”是通称词,因此文句省略的部分就是“一切”。因为是表示种类的词,所以用单数。“以四边、下底”这些词虽然没有明确说出关联词,但由于属于交媾波罗夷的范畴,而且在四集合注疏末尾的偈颂中已经摄入了这个判定,在这个判定结束时又说“如于女相所说,如是应知一切处之相”,因为已经对相之判定作了这样的指示,所以依语义关联可以得出“相”。这应当依“插入”的所依来理解。“肢节”一词贯通上下文。巴利
29.Tathāti ‘‘ākāsagataṃ katvā’’ti yathāvuttappakāraṃ parāmasati. Catūhi passehīti sahatthe karaṇavacanaṃ. ‘‘Passehī’’ti sambandhisaddattā ‘‘nimittassā’’ti sāmatthiyā labbhati. ‘‘Itthiyā’’ti sāmaññasaddattā ‘‘sabbassā’’ti pāṭhaseso. Jātivācakattā ekavacanaṃ. ‘‘Catūhi passehi, heṭṭhimattala’’nti ca imesaṃ sambandhipadassa aniddesepi methunapārājikādhikārattā ca santhatacatukkassa aṭṭhakathāvasāne imāya gāthāya saṅgahitassa imassa vinicchayassa pariyosāne ‘‘yathā ca itthinimitte vuttaṃ, evaṃ sabbattha lakkhaṇaṃ veditabba’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.61-62) nimittavinicchayassātidesassa katattā ca sāmatthiyena ‘‘nimittassā’’ti labbhati. Idameva ‘‘pavesetvā’’ti etassa ādhāravasena gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Aṅgajāta’’nti anuvattati.
把这句话补完整之后,应当这样连接文义来说明:就像把男根插入张开的口中,再把它移到空中然后抽出来,这犯恶作;同样,把男根插入一切女人那个被称为小便道的部位,以它的四边和下底都不碰到的方式,移到空中然后抽出来,也犯恶作。巴利
Evaṃ vākyaṃ pūretvā ‘‘yathā āvaṭṭakate mukhe aṅgajātaṃ pavesetvā tamākāsagataṃ katvā nīharantassa dukkaṭaṃ, tathā sabbassā itthiyā nimitte passāvamaggasaṅkhāte aṅgajātaṃ pavesetvā tassa catūhi passehi saha heṭṭhimattalaṃ cattāro passe, heṭṭhimattalañca acchupantaṃ ākāsagataṃ katvā nīharantassa dukkaṭa’’nti yojetvā attho vattabbo.
30 30. “在被拔出的唇肉等中”:拆解词义就是“那些唇肉被拔出的人”。这里说的是他们的牙齿。“或者向外长出的”:就是从原本的唇肉向外长出而停留着的牙齿。“努力者”:就是用男根去触碰的人。巴利
30.Uppāṭitoṭṭhamaṃsesūti uppāṭitaṃ oṭṭhamaṃsaṃ yesanti viggaho. Tesu dantesu. Bahinikkhantakesu vāti pakatiyā oṭṭhamaṃsato bahi nikkhamitvā ṭhitesu vā dantesu. Vāyamantassāti aṅgajātena chupantassa.
31 把依附在肉相上的骨头相互摩擦,就是“作骨相击”。在骨聚所成的道上,就是“于道中”。以两种贪,是指以交合贪或以身触贪。努力者,是指把男根插入并使其活动的人。巴利
31.Aṭṭhisaṅghaṭṭanaṃ katvāti nimittamaṃsasannissayāni aṭṭhīni saṅghaṭṭetvā. Maggeti aṭṭhisaṅghātamaye magge. Duvidharāgatoti methunarāgena vā kāyasaṃsaggarāgena vā. Vāyamantassāti aṅgajātaṃ pavesetvā cārentassa.
32 32.“拥抱者”:就是拥抱的人。在握手等行为里,所谓“手”,是指从肘部一直到指甲尖端。抓握手以及和手相连的部分,叫“握手”。触摸身体其余部分以及和它相连的部分,叫“触摸”。不过《无疑解》里说“用手抓女人的身体或和身体相连的部分,叫握手”,这和义注不一致。所以,应该只按照义注里所说的方式来理解受持。在“触摸”里,那里说的“用手触摸身体以及和它相连的部分”,也不合理;因为用身体其余部分去触摸,同样只是恶作。“在接吻等”里:由“等”字,也包括抓头发等。“这是方法”:以此指出“女人以交合贪,在握手等行为中,犯恶作”这个意思。巴利
32.Āliṅgantassāti parissajantassa. Hatthagāhādīsu hattho nāma kapparato paṭṭhāya yāva agganakhā. Hatthassa, tappaṭibandhassa ca gahaṇaṃ hatthaggāho. Avasesasarīrassa, tappaṭibandhassa ca parāmasanaṃ parāmāso. Nissandehe pana ‘‘mātugāmassa sarīrassa vā tappaṭibandhassa vā hatthena gahaṇaṃ hatthaggāho’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ aṭṭhakathāya na sameti. Tasmā yathāvuttanayasseva aṭṭhakathāsu āgatattā soyeva sārato paccetabbo. Parāmasepi ‘‘hatthena sarīrassa, tappaṭibandhassa ca parāmasana’’nti yaṃ tattha vuttaṃ, tampi na yujjati. Avasesasarīrāvayavenāpi parāmasato dukkaṭameva hotīti. Cumbanādīsūti ādi-saddena veṇiggāhādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. ‘‘Ayaṃ nayo’’ti etena ‘‘itthiyā methunarāgena hatthaggāhādīsu dukkaṭa’’nti imamatthaṃ atidisati.
33 33. 为了说明在人与非人之外的其余畜生中,以最低界限而言,成为行淫波罗夷事的有情,所以说了“无足”等语。应当用“无足、二足、四足”这些限定语来限定所说的“有情类”。在无足有情类中,蛇:在陆行类里,从最高界限的吞象蟒蛇,到最低界限的龙;鱼:在水生类里,从最高界限身长五百由旬的帝弥罗宾嘎喇等鱼,到最低界限的鲤、鲫等鱼。在二足有情类中,鸽:从最高界限的金翅鸟,到最低界限的鸽和鸽类鸟,有人说是斑鸠。在四足有情类中,巨蜥:从最高界限的象,到最低界限的巨蜥——这些就是有情。“以下”:指最低界限。“波罗夷之事”:这是省略说法,完整意思是行淫波罗夷的诸事。巴利
33. Manussāmanussehi aññesu tiracchānagatesu heṭṭhimaparicchedena methunadhammapārājikavatthubhūte satte dassetumāha ‘‘apade’’tiādi. ‘‘Apade, dvipade, catuppade’’ti imehi visesanehi visesitabbaṃ ‘‘sattanikāye’’ti idaṃ vattabbaṃ. Apade sattanikāye. Ahayoti thalacaresu ukkaṭṭhaparicchedato hatthigilanake ajagare upādāya heṭṭhimaparicchedena nāgā ca. Macchāti jalajesu uparimakoṭiyā pañcasatayojanikāni timirapiṅgalādimacche upādāya heṭṭhimantato pāṭhīnapāvusādayo macchā ca. Dvipade sattanikāye. Kapotāti uparimakoṭiyā garuḷe upādāya heṭṭhimantato kapotākapotapakkhī ca. Pārāvatāti keci. Catuppade sattanikāye. Godhāti uparimakoṭiyā hatthiṃ upādāya heṭṭhimantato godhā cāti ime sattā. Heṭṭhāti heṭṭhimaparicchedato. Pārājikassavatthūti methunadhammapārājikassa vatthūnīti pāṭhaseso.
34 “欲行”:对淫行的渴爱,与那称为淫欲的渴爱相应的心,就是欲行心。“于道中”:指在粪道等任何一种道中。“道的插入”:指自己排尿器官的插入。由于会导致出家生活和巴帝摩卡防护戒的终结与毁灭,所以是终极,也就是犯了波罗夷的人;因为那件事是终极状态的因,所以波罗夷罪称为“终极事”。这正是第一,因为它在四条波罗夷中最初宣说,所以称“第一终极事”;所谓“第一终极事”,说的就是第一波罗夷。巴利
34.Sevetukāmatā methunasevāya taṇhā, tāya methunarāgasaṅkhātāya sampayuttaṃ cittaṃ sevetukāmatācittaṃ. Maggeti vaccamaggādīnaṃ aññatare magge. Maggassa attano muttakaraṇassa pavesanaṃ. Pabbajjāya, pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlassa vā ante vināse bhavoti antimo, pārājikāpanno puggalo, tassa vatthu antimabhāvassa kāraṇattā pārājikāpatti antimavatthūti vuccati, tadeva paṭhamaṃ catunnaṃ pārājikānaṃ ādimhi desitattā paṭhamantimavatthu, tassa paṭhamantimavatthuno, paṭhamapārājikassāti vuttaṃ hoti.
35 “周边”是指在罪的附近,也就是存在于波罗夷罪附近的前分阶段。“其余三者”是指剩下的不与取等三种波罗夷法。“周边的土喇咤亚”与“宣说”相连。是怎么宣说的呢?在第二条波罗夷中说:“使(她)动摇,犯土喇咤亚罪”;在第三条波罗夷中说:“为人挖掘陷阱,那人掉下去后生起苦受,犯土喇咤亚罪”;在第四条波罗夷中说:“听懂的人犯波罗夷罪,没听懂的人犯土喇咤亚罪”。以上就是宣说。巴利
35. Sāmantā āpattisamīpe bhavaṃ sāmantaṃ, pārājikāpattiyā samīpe pubbabhāge bhavanti attho. Sesānaṃ pana tiṇṇampīti avasesānaṃ adinnādānādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ pārājikadhammānaṃ. Thullaccayaṃ sāmantamiti udīritanti sambandho. Kathamudīritaṃ? ‘‘Phandāpeti, āpatti thullaccayassā’’ti (pārā. 94) dutiye, ‘‘manussaṃ uddissa opātaṃ khaṇati, patitvā dukkhavedanaṃ uppādeti, āpatti thullaccayassā’’ti, tatiye, ‘‘paṭivijānantassa āpatti pārājikassa, appaṭivijānantassa āpatti thullaccayassā’’ti (pārā. 215) catutthe samudīritaṃ.
在这里,对于第四波罗夷的土喇咤亚罪来说,有邻近罪的情况是这样的:如果有人对某人妄称上人法,只要对方还没有了知,那么因为妄称这个因缘,就成立土喇咤亚罪;当妄称之后,对方了知了所妄称的内容,就成立波罗夷罪,这样是说得通的。而且应当知道,这种情况已经被“对尚未了知的人说了之后,就是土喇咤亚”这句话涵盖在内了。巴利
Ettha ca catutthapārājikassa thullaccayāpattiyā sāmantāpattibhāvo yassa uttarimanussadhammaṃ samullapati, so yāva na paṭivijānāti, tāva samullapanapaccayā thullaccayāpattisambhāve, samullapite tasmiṃ samullapitamatthe paṭivijānante pārājikāpattisambhāve ca yujjati. So ca ‘‘appaṭivijānantassa vutte thullaccaya’’nti imināva saṅgahitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
36 36. 对于不知道的人,看见因风而僵直的生支,就按自己的喜好去违犯,在女人们前来时并不知情;就像在大林里白天睡觉的比丘,别人做了什么他也不知道——这就是这里所说的意思。用“同样”这个词,是把“应知为无罪”这一句也拉过来适用。对于不乐受的人:当比丘的敌人们把他制服后去违犯,或让别人去违犯时,就像把头伸进蛇口一样惊恐而不能忍受;又像在大林里白天安住的比丘,虽然知道别人加害,却像身体被火燃烧一样惊恐而不能忍受——这就是其含义。在“不知者”这里,还应加上“亦”字。在佛陀的教法中,像乳海之水一样清净,因为是最先出现的,所以叫“初”;那被称为违犯的业,就是“初业”;谁有这初业,谁就是“初业者”。这里应取苏定那比丘为初业者。上文和下文这些词句出现的地方,也应按这个方式理解其义。这里以及下面一切学处中,以因缘等为开头的十七种共通抉择,在杂事中简略说明,在后文详细解释,将会显现出来。因此应知此处没有显示。巴利
36.Ajānantassa vātūpatthaddhaṃ aṅgajātaṃ disvā attano ruciyā vītikkamaṃ katvā mātugāmesu gacchantesu ajānamānassa, mahāvane divā niddupagatabhikkhuno viya parehi kiriyamānaṃ ajānantassāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tathevāti iminā ‘‘anāpattīti ñātabba’’nti idamākaḍḍhati. Assādiyantassāti bhikkhupaccatthikesu abhibhavitvā vītikkamaṃ karontesu ca kārāpentesu ca, sappamukhaṃ paviṭṭhakāle viya uttasitvā anadhivāsentassa ca, mahāvane divāvihāropagatabhikkhuno viya paropakkamaṃ ñatvāpi kāye ādittaagginā viya uttasitvā anadhivāsentassāti attho. ‘‘Ajānantassā’’ti ettha api-saddo yojetabbo. Buddhasāsane khīrasāgarasalilanimmale sabbapaṭhamaṃ pātubhūtattā ādi ca taṃ vītikkamasaṅkhātaṃ kammañcāti ādikammaṃ, taṃ etassa atthīti ādikammī, ettha sudinno bhikkhu, tassa ādikamminoti gahetabbo. Uparipi imesaṃ padānaṃ āgatāgataṭṭhāne imināva nayena attho veditabbo. Idha ca upari sabbasikkhāpadesu ca nidānādivasena sattarasavidho sādhāraṇavinicchayo pakiṇṇake saṅkhepato, uttare vitthārato ca āvi bhavissati. Tasmā ettha na dassitoti veditabbaṃ.
37-38 在律藏中解释“律”。能导向、能使人达到戒的圆满、定的圆满和慧的圆满,这叫作“法”;通过身门和语门不违犯,这叫作“防护”;与它相对立的,即不防护,叫作“非法”;非法在这里被止息、被断除,所以叫“离非法”,也就是“律”。这里说的就是在“离非法”这个“律”上。巴利
37-38.Vinayeti vinayapiṭake. Anayūparameti neti pāpeti sīlasampadaṃ samādhisampadaṃ paññāsampadañcāti nayo, kāyavacīdvārehi avītikkamasaṅkhāto saṃvaro, tappaṭipakkho asaṃvaro anayo nāma, tassa uparamo nivatti etthāti anayūparamo, vinayo, tattha anayūparame vinaye.
正是从这一点出发,才说它是最上的、最殊胜的。也可以理解为:在非法的止息、断除上,它是最上、最殊胜的。所谓“最上”,意思是说最殊胜的教法光辉就在这里,所以叫最上;对“律”也应该这样理解。因为经中说“律被称为教法的寿命”,所以意思是说它具足了最上教法的成就。巴利
Tato eva parame ukkaṭṭhe. Anayassa vā uparame nivattane parame ukkaṭṭheti gahetabbaṃ. Parā uttamā mā sāsanasirī etthāti paramo, vinayoti evampi gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Vinayo nāma sāsanassa āyū’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.paṭhamasaṅgītikathā; pārā. aṭṭha. 1.paṭhamasaṅgītikathā; khu. pā. aṭṭha. 5.mahāsaṅgītikathā; theragā. aṭṭha. 1.251) vacanato uttamasāsanasampattiyutteti attho.
对于“善人”:品行端正的人就是善人,是想要修学、以增上戒学而庄严自己、喜爱戒行的良家子。于律中,对彼而言,其关联是:律即是引导,且如眼目。因为能止息灾祸,又因是最上义,所以对善人、良家子来说,律就如同引导、如同眼目。“乐之引导”:能带来世间与出世间的乐,所以叫乐之引导。这也是对“引导”一词的限定说明。巴利
Sujanassāti sobhaṇo jano sujano, sikkhākāmo adhisīlasikkhāya sobhamāno piyasīlo kulaputto, tassa nayane nayanūpame vinayeti sambandho. Anayūparamattā, paramattā ca sujanassa kulaputtassa nayane nayanūpame. Sukhānayaneti lokiyalokuttarabhedaṃ sukhaṃ ānetīti sukhānayanaṃ, tasmiṃ. Idañca ‘‘nayane’’ti etassa visesanaṃ.
如果有人问:这个限定语是什么意思?应当知道,这是为了显示此处所说的殊胜之处——它与通过譬喻方式所理解的一般“引导”不同。那殊胜之处是什么呢?一般的“引导”会成为贪、嗔等烦恼的所依,也会成为现世苦和来世苦的因缘。而这部律的引导,对这位良家子弟来说并非如此,它一向只是导向解脱之乐的因缘。为了显示这一殊胜之处,才这样说。也就是说,依照律去修行而不违越,以戒律仪的成就为根本,依次生起无悔等善法,直到最终证得无余涅槃,由此带来世间与出世间的快乐——在这个意义上,就说它是“律”。巴利
Etaṃ visesanaṃ kimatthanti ce? Upamābhāvena gahitapakatinayanato idha sambhavantaṃ visesaṃ dassetunti veditabbaṃ. Kataro so visesoti ce? Pakatinayanaṃ rāgadosādikilesūpanissayo hutvā diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikadukkhassa ca paccayo hoti. Idaṃ pana vinayanayanaṃ imassa kulaputtassa evaṃ ahutvā ekaṃsena mokkhāvahanasukhasseva paccayo hotīti imassa visesassa dassanatthaṃ. Yathā vinayamavirādhetvā paṭipajjanena sijjhanakasīlasaṃvaramūlakaavippaṭisārādianupādisesaparinibbānāvasā- naphalasampattivasena uppajjanakalokiyalokuttarasukhāvahane vinayeti vuttaṃ hoti.
精勤乐这里,“亦”是省略的读法。意思是:既乐于在律的精勤加行上,也以诵读、听闻、思惟等方式在律中努力。或者,依据“离贪是诸法中最上”的说法,精勤就是涅槃,意思是乐于涅槃。意乐:“意”指胜解。或者,意是不可动摇之义,这里把律的抉择说为“意乐”,即依大寺住者的诸师之见,于其中。“此处”:指在这律的抉择中。“乐”:即极度欢喜。“不乐”:这里把否定词与末尾的“ramate”相连,因此其关联是:凡不乐者。巴利
Padhānaratoti ettha ‘‘apī’’ti pāṭhaseso. Padhāne vinayābhiyoge ratopi, vinaye ajjhāyanasavanacintanādivasena vāyamantopīti attho. Atha vā ‘‘virāgo seṭṭho dhammāna’’nti (dha. pa. 273; netti. 170; kathā. 872) vacanato padhānaṃ nibbānaṃ, tasmiṃ ratoti attho . Sāramateti ‘‘sāra’’nti adhimate. Atha vā sāraṃ apheggumataṃ mahāvihāravāsīnaṃ ācariyamataṃ etthāti ‘‘sāramato’’ti vinayavinicchayo vutto, tasmiṃ. Idhāti imasmiṃ vinayavinicchaye. Ratoti accantābhirato. ‘‘Na rato’’ti ettha na-kāraṃ ‘‘ramate’’ti osānapadena yojetvā yo pana na ramateti sambandho.
在长老、新学、中间比丘和比丘尼当中,如果有人不因为不断转诵、听闻、忆念、思惟而欢喜、不乐于此,那么这个人虽然在律中乐于精勤,也虽然在律藏中以读诵、听闻等方式相应努力,他算不算通达律藏的人呢?这里显示:他根本不算。想要在律藏上有通达能力的人,首先应当在这里认真地下功夫——这就是本段的意趣。巴利
Theranavamajjhimabhikkhubhikkhunīnaṃ antare yo pana puggalo niccaparivattanasavanānussaraṇacintanavasena na ramate na kīḷati, so puggalo vinaye padhānaratopi vinayapiṭake ajjhayanasavanādivasena yuttapayuttopi paṭu hoti kiṃ, na hotevāti dasseti. Vinayapiṭake pāṭavamākaṅkhantehi paṭhamaṃ tāvettha sakkaccaṃ abhiyogo kātabboti adhippāyo.
为了连同这个意思以及它的利益、传承和最终目的一起显示出来,所以说了“此”等话。“此”指的是正在被宣说的这部律的抉择,要和“知”连起来理解。“若”是句子里省略的主语。如果有良家子具备念、正知和信,正确地了知、明白了这部律的抉择。是什么样的情况呢?回答说“利之阐明”。因为戒是世间和出世间成就的根本和基础,所以这里把戒叫做“利”,它阐明、显示这个,所以叫“利之阐明”,这是词义分析。因为经中说“依止于戒……解开缠结”,而解开一切烦恼缠结的出世间智,要以近行定、胜解智、各种神通、色界无色界八等至为立足处,所以在作为一切世间出世间功德成就之根本的四遍净戒中,主要以巴帝摩卡防护戒为根本,因为这部律的抉择能显示它,所以说为“利之阐明”。巴利
Imamevatthaṃ ānisaṃsapāraṃpariyapayojanena saha dassetumāha ‘‘ima’’ntiādi. Imanti vuccamānaṃ vinayavinicchayaṃ, ‘‘avedī’’ti iminā sambandho. ‘‘Yo’’ti pāṭhaseso. Yo kulaputto satisampajaññasaddhāsampanno imaṃ vinayavinicchayaṃ sammā avedi aññāsi. Kiṃ bhūtanti āha ‘‘hitavibhāvana’’nti. Lokiyalokuttarasampattiyā mūlasādhanattā sīlamidha hitaṃ nāma, taṃ vibhāveti pakāsetīti hitavibhāvanoti viggaho. ‘‘Sīle patiṭṭhāya…pe… vijaṭaye jaṭa’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.23, 192; mi. pa. 2.1.9) vuttattā sabbakilesajaṭāvijaṭanalokuttarañāṇassa padaṭṭhānasopacārasābhiññārūpārūpaaṭṭhasamādhīnaṃ padaṭṭhānatāya sabbalokiyalokuttaraguṇasampadānaṃ mūlabhūtesu catupārisuddhisīlesu padhānaṃ pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlaṃ, tappakāsakattā ayaṃ vinayavinicchayo ‘‘hitavibhāvano’’ti vutto.
所谓“修习”,就是一次又一次地让它在心中建立起来,所以叫修习,也就是说应当被修习。正因为它能使人看清什么是真正的利益,所以追求利益的人应当一次又一次地把它安放在心中——这就是这里所说的律的抉择。“具妙味”呢,味就是被品尝、被享受的意思,有词味、义味、悲味等味以及解脱味;这个律的抉择具有美好的味,所以叫具妙味。“bhavaṃ”就是“bhavantaṃ”,意思是存在、好好地存在,也就是说它具足妙味而存在,即成为具妙味者。这话说的是什么呢?就是说:这个律的抉择具足了诗人所说的“结合、明净、均等、甜蜜、柔和、义显、崇高、光泽、可爱、等持”这十种可被品尝的词的生命功德所摄的词味成就,也具足了在三十五种义庄严中,以适合的自性说等为主的义庄严所摄的义味成就,并且随宜开显了悲味、希有味、寂静味等相应的味,因此说它具妙味。巴利
Bhāvananti bhāvīyati punappunaṃ cetasi nivesīyatīti bhāvano, bhāvanīyoti vuttaṃ hoti. Hitavibhāvakattāyeva hitatthīhi punappunaṃ citte vāsetabboti vuttaṃ hoti, taṃ evaṃvidhaṃ vinayavinicchayaṃ. Surasambhavanti rasīyati assādīyatīti raso, saddaraso attharaso karuṇādiraso vimuttiraso ca, sobhaṇo raso etassāti suraso, vinayavinicchayo, taṃ surasaṃ. Bhavaṃ bhavantaṃ, santanti vuttaṃ hoti, surasaṃ samānaṃ, surasaṃ bhūtanti attho. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? ‘‘Sileso pasādo samatā madhuratā sukhumālatā atthabyatti udāratā ojo kanti samādhī’’ti evaṃ vuttehi kavijanehi assādetabbasilesādidasavidhasaddajīvitaguṇasaṅkhātasaddarasasampattīhi ca sabhāvākhyānaṃ upamā rūpakaṃ dīpakaṃ āvuttīti evamādikkamaniddiṭṭhapañcatiṃsaatthālaṅkāresu anurūpasabhāvākhyānādippadhānaatthālaṅkārasaṅkhātaattharasasampattīhi ca yathāsambhavaṃ pakāsitabbakaruṇārasaabbhutarasasantarasādīhi ca yuttattā surasaṃ imaṃ vinayavinicchayanti vuttaṃ hoti.
或者,通过这部著作应当了解:这里主要制定的别解脱律仪戒,决定能导向定;而定又是慧的立足处,慧又能使人到达涅槃。因此,这部律的抉择作为根本原因,次第地带来涅槃不死果味的成就,它以最值得品尝的方式,凭借坚毅解脱之味而成为具有妙味者,所以这样说。在这里,“生起”中的“saṃ”指的是身体和心的乐,因为它从这部律的抉择而生起,所以叫“生起”。这部律的抉择就是身心之乐的根本原因;又按前面所说的方式,由于它具有妙味性,所以它是所说的味成就之精华丰沛流注所生起的意乐,以及由此产生的、以色为依托的身体之乐二者的生源头,这就是它的含义。到这里,已经说明了这部律的抉择应当被正确理解的理由。巴利
Atha vā iminā pakaraṇena padhānato vidhīyamānapātimokkhasaṃvarasīlassa ekantena samādhisaṃvattanikattā samādhissa ca paññāya padaṭṭhānattā paññāya ca nibbānapāpanato mūlakāraṇaṃ hutvā kamena nibbānāmataphalarasasampadāyakaṃ imaṃ vinayavinicchayaṃ paramassādanīyarūpena dhitivimuttirasena surasabhūtanti vuttaṃ hotīti ca veditabbaṃ. Sambhavanti ettha saṃ vuccati sukhaṃ kāyikaṃ cetasikañca, taṃ bhavati etasmāti sambhavo, vinayavinicchayo, taṃ, kāyacittasukhānaṃ mūlakāraṇabhūtaṃ, vuttanayena surasattā ca yathāvuttarasasampadasāramahussavena sambhūtamānasikasukhassa, taṃsamuṭṭhānarūpanissayakāyikasukhassa ca pabhavabhūtanti attho. Ettāvatā imassa vinayavinicchayassa sammā viññātabbatāya kāraṇaṃ dassitaṃ hoti.
如果有人这样清楚地了解这部汇集了种种功德珍宝的律抉择,那么这位良家子会变成什么样的人呢?他会与巴利(持律者)优波离相等。所谓“巴利”,是因为守护教法,所以律被称为“护”;正如所说:“律就是教法的寿命。”他拥有这个,所以是“持律者”。也就是说,他以教理、实践、通达这三种方式,持有被称为三种教法之命根的律制所摄的教法,因此获得“持律者”这个名称。那位优波离长老,就是正等正觉者、妙法轮王坐在四众之中,打开如莲花般的口,宣说“诸比丘,在我的声闻比丘弟子中,持律第一的就是优波离”这第一位的、特别以守护资格而获得“持律者”称号的优波离长老。这里说的就是与他相等。巴利
Evaṃ nānāguṇaratanākaraṃ imaṃ vinayavinicchayaṃ sampajānanto so kulaputto kiṃ hotīti ce? Pālinā upālinā samo bhavati. Pālināti sāsanaṃ pāletīti ‘‘pālo’’ti vinayo vuccati, vuttañhi ‘‘vinayo nāma sāsanassa āyū’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.paṭhamasaṅgītikathā; pārā. aṭṭha. 1.paṭhamasaṅgītikathā; khu. pā. aṭṭha. 5.mahāsaṅgītikathā; theragā. aṭṭha. 1.251) so assa atthīti pālī, pariyattipaṭipattipaṭivedhavasena tividhasāsanassa jīvitabhūtavinayapaññattisaṅkhātasāsanadharattā ‘‘pālī’’ti laddhanāmena upālinā, ‘‘etadaggaṃ bhikkhave mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ vinayadharānaṃ yadidaṃ upālī’’ti (a. ni. 1.219, 228) catuparisamajjhe nisinnena saddhammavaracakkavattinā sammāsambuddhena mukhapadumaṃ vikāsetvā pakāsitaetadaggaṭṭhānena visesato sāyanarakkhanakabhāvena paṭiladdhapālītināmadheyyena upālimahātherena samo hotīti vuttaṃ hoti.
是在什么范围内相等呢?在教法中。所谓“教法”,就是前面说的三种教法。在这当中,又特别指那像承载一切动物、植物的大地一样,承载着行道与通达这两者的教理教法;而且因为在其中以讲律为主题,所以就在这属于律藏这一部分的教理教法里相等。这就是这里的意思。巴利
Kasmiṃ visaye samo bhavatīti ce? Sāsane. Sāsaneti yathāvutte tividhe sāsane, tatrāpi thāvarajaṅgamasakalavatthuvitthārādharamaṇḍalasadise paṭipattipaṭivedhadvayadhāre pariyattisāsane, tatthāpi vinayakathādhikārattā labbhamāne vinayapiṭakasaṅkhātapariyattisāsanekadese samo bhavatīti attho.
是在什么样的教法里呢?是在魔饵教法里。魔的饵就是魔饵,是魔的领域;因为他的教法是有害的,所以叫魔饵教法,就在那里面。在蕴等五种魔当中,以欲贪等为根源的烦恼魔是主要的一种,为了让人们舍弃以烦恼魔的境界——也就是被称为“饵”的女人身体等所依处和所触等对象——所以按照“若有比丘……不共住”这样的方式宣说,因此那有害的魔饵,也就是名为魔饵教法的律制教法,这就是这里的意思。巴利
Kiṃbhūte sāsane? Mārabalisāsane. Mārassa bali mārabali, māragocaro, tassa sāsanaṃ hiṃsakaṃ mārabalisāsanaṃ, tasmiṃ. Khandhādīsu pañcasu māresu padhānabhūtakāmarāgādipabhavakilesamārassa gocarabhāvena balisaṅkhātaitthisarīrādinissayaphoṭṭhabbādivisayassa pariccajāpanatthaṃ ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu…pe… asaṃvāso’’tiādinā (pārā. 44) nayena vuttattā tassa mārabalissa hiṃsakaṃ hotīti mārabalisāsananāmadheyyavinayapaññattisaṅkhātasāsaneti attho.
或者也可以说:因为在水注疏中将会讲到“用钩、用网、用手或用筌”,所以这里“钩”这个字指的是杀鱼用的倒刺。那就是魔的钩——在不存在时投掷、应当避开,所以叫“魔钩教法”,就在这当中。由于前面已经说过“魔的遍网”,因此,为了捕捉在轮回大海中流转、被称为烦恼奴隶的凡夫之鱼,魔这位大渔夫所抛出的钩,就是以女色、声音等五种欲乐为诱饵、与欲贪等烦恼紧紧绑在一起的大钩。通过彼分舍断、超越舍断等方式舍弃这些烦恼的人,就属于律制所摄的教法,这是这里的意趣。巴利
Atha vā ‘‘baḷisenapi jālena, hatthena kuminena vā’’ti udakaṭṭhakathāya vakkhamānattā baḷisa-saddena macchamāraṇakaṇṭakamāha, taṃ mārassa baḷisaṃ asati khipati vajjetīti mārabaḷisāsanaṃ, tasmiṃ, ‘‘samantapāso mārassā’’ti vuttattā saṃsārasāgare parivattamānakasaṃkilesadāsaputhujjanasaṅkhātamacche gaṇhituṃ māramahākevaṭṭena pakkhittabaḷisasaṅkhātaitthirūpasaddādipañcakāmaguṇā- misāvutakāmarāgādikilesamahābaḷisaṃ tadaṅgappahānavītikkamappahānādivasena pajahante vinayapaññattisaṅkhāte sāsaneti adhippāyo.
在这里,如果有人对这个律的抉择——也就是“于此”所指的这部律的判定——并不感到欢喜,那么这个人即使对那无上止息、对那能引导善人获得安乐的最上殊胜的律感到欢喜、极为欢喜,甚至以它为主要修行,或者在律中从事诵习等修持,他能成为熟练者、更熟练者吗?根本不可能。所以,想在律中变得熟练的人,就应该在这上面认真下功夫。应当知道,这就是简要说明意趣的义理连接。或者也可以这样连接:如果有人对四种正勤中的精进感到欢喜、极为欢喜,而“于此欢喜”是说,他因为对这部律的抉择感到欢喜,所以在那无上止息、能引导善人获得安乐的律中成为熟练者、善巧者——这样连接是不合理的。巴利
Ettha ca sāramate idha imasmiṃ vinayavinicchaye yo pana na ramate, so puggalo anayūparame tato eva parame uttame sujanassa sukhānayane nayane nayanupame vinaye rato abhirato padhānaratopi vinaye ajjhāyanādīsu yogamāpajjantopi paṭu hoti paṭutaro hoti kiṃ, na hoteva. Tasmā vinaye pāṭavatthinā ettheva sakkaccābhiyogo kātabboti saṅkhepato sādhippāyā atthayojanā veditabbā. Atha vā padhāne catubbidhe sammappadhāne vīriye rato abhirato yo pana naro sāramate idha imasmiṃ vinayavinicchaye yato ramate, ato tasmā so anayūparame sujanassa sukhānayane vinaye paṭu hoti kusalo hotīti yojanāti no khanti.
凡是了知、认清了这部能说明利益、彰显利益、应当修习、应当亲近、由妙味而生、具有妙味、等同于妙味、已成为妙味、以乐为因的律抉择的人,这个人就等同于优波离大长老——在能舍断魔境与魔钩的教法中,也就是在舍断魔所依止的欲贪与烦恼欲之钩的教法中,在三种胜者教法中,在其中作为行道与通达之基础的教理教法中,在其中等同于整个教法之命根的、被称为律制定的教理教法那一部分中,依据圣典在律教理里被安立为最上者,在守护教法时以它为根本,因此被称为守护者的律教理更为殊胜,与优波离、优波离大长老相等。这就是句义的连接。巴利
Hitavibhāvanaṃ hitappakāsakaṃ bhāvanaṃ bhāvanīyaṃ āsevitabbaṃ surasambhavaṃ surasaṃ samānaṃ surasaṃ bhūtaṃ sambhavaṃ sukhahetukaṃ imaṃ vinayavinicchayaṃ yo avedi aññāsi, so puggalo mārabaḷisāsane māravisayappahānakare, atha vā mārabaḷisassa mārassa vatthukāmāmisāvutakilesakāmabaḷisassa asane vajjamāne sāsane tividhepi jinasāsane, tatthāpi paṭipattipaṭivedhānaṃ patiṭṭhānabhūte pariyattisāsane, tatrāpi sakalasāsanassa jīvitasamāne vinayapaññattisaṅkhātapariyattisāsanekadese pālinā vinayapariyattiyaṃ etadagge ṭhapanena sāsanapālane taṃmūlabhāvato pālasaṅkhātavinayapariyattiyā pasatthatarena upālinā upālimahātherena samo bhavatīti yojanā.
《律抉择》的注释巴利
Vinayavinicchayavaṇṇanāya
第二波罗夷论的解释巴利
Dutiyapārājikakathāvaṇṇanā
39 现在为了说明第二条波罗夷罪的判定,经文说“取者”等等。这里“以盗心”是省略的补足语。它要和每一个单独使用的词搭配起来理解,也就是:以盗心取的人,就是波罗夷——这样连接。对于属于别人的园林等物,先挑起争执、打败主人,然后以盗心拿走;在为这件事所做的先前准备阶段,犯恶作;让主人心生疑惑时,犯土喇咤亚;随后因为彼与自己双方都放弃了责任,就不再具备巴帝摩卡防护戒的圆满,于是成为波罗夷——这就是这里要说的意思。巴利
39. Idāni dutiyaṃ pārājikavinicchayaṃ dassetumāha ‘‘ādiyanto’’tiādi. Tattha ‘‘theyyacittenā’’ti pāṭhaseso. So ca paccattekavacanantehi sabbapadehi yojetabbo, theyyacittena ādiyanto parājitoti sambandho. Parasantakaṃ ārāmādiṃ abhiyuñjitvā sāmikaṃ parājetvā theyyacittena gaṇhanto tadatthāya kate pubbapayoge dukkaṭaṃ, sāmikassa vimatuppādane thullaccayañca āpajjitvā tassa ca attano ca dhuranikkhepena pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlasampattiyā adāyādo hutvā parājito hotīti vuttaṃ hoti.
应当把“如是”“也”“波罗夷”“以盗心”这些词和“搬运者”等四个词合在一起连接起来。以盗心搬运的人,同样也是波罗夷,这就是句子的连接方式。用头等部位搬运属于他人的物品时,以盗心碰触物品就犯恶作,移动时就犯土喇咤亚,犯土喇咤亚之后,从头换到肩上等种种搬运动作,也同样成为波罗夷——这就是这段话的意思。巴利
‘‘Tathā’’ti ca ‘‘apī’’ti ca ‘‘parājito’’ti ca ‘‘theyyacittenā’’ti iminā saha ekato katvā ‘‘haranto’’tiādīhi catūhipi padehi yojetabbaṃ. Theyyacittena harantopi tathā parājitoti yojanā sīsādīhi parasantakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ haranto theyyacittena bhaṇḍassa āmasane dukkaṭañca phandāpane thullaccayañca āpajjitvā sīsato khandhoharaṇādipayogaṃ karontopi tathā parājito hotīti attho.
以盗心拿走(他人寄存之物)的人,同样也(犯)波罗夷,这是句义连接。这里的意思是:别人为了藏匿等目的把物品寄放在自己这里,当对方来索要“把我的东西还给我”时,自己说“我没拿”等妄语,以盗心取走;在对方产生怀疑的阶段犯土喇咤亚,之后同样因舍弃责任而成为波罗夷。用“我没有拿”等话否认、拒绝归还而拿走的人,就称为“拿走者”。巴利
Theyyacittena avaharantopi tathā parājitoti yojanā. Ayaṃ panettha attho – aññehi saṅgopanādiṃ sandhāya attani upanikkhittabhaṇḍaṃ ‘‘dehi me bhaṇḍa’’nti codiyamāno ‘‘na mayā gahita’’ntiādinā musā vatvā theyyacittena gaṇhantopi tassa vimatuppādane thullaccayamāpajjitvā tatheva dhuranikkhepena parājito hotīti. ‘‘Nāhaṃ aggahesi’’ntiādinā avajānitvā paṭikkhipitvā haranto ‘‘avaharanto’’ti vutto.
以偷盗心破坏他人的行路威仪,同样构成波罗夷。这是文句的关联。
然而,若是有人正在搬走别人的物品等,另一个人心想“我要连同那件物品一起把他抓住”,便以偷盗心加以阻拦,使他转向自己想要的方向,破坏他原本的行路姿态——那么,当他抬起第一只脚时,就犯土喇咤亚;当第二只脚跨出界限时,同样成为波罗夷。这就是此处的含义。巴利
Theyyacittena iriyāpathaṃ vikopentopi tathā parājitoti yojanā. Yaṃ pana aññesaṃ bhaṇḍaharaṇakamanussādīnamaññataraṃ ‘‘tena bhaṇḍena saha gaṇhāmī’’ti bhaṇḍaṃ harantaṃ theyyacittena nivāretvā attanā icchitadisābhimukhaṃ katvā tassa pakatiiriyāpathaṃ vikopentopi paṭhamapāduddhārena thullaccayamāpajjitvā dutiyapadavārātikkamena tatheva parājito hotīti attho.
以偷盗之心,把物品从它所在的位置移开,同样也构成波罗夷。这是句子的连接方式。对于放在陆地等处的物品,如果有人以偷盗之心,想把它搬走,于是把它从原来放置的地方移开,那么,在第二次寻找等一直到触摸结束的所有加行中,都犯恶作;在摇动物品时,犯土喇咤亚。就像后面将要说的那些方式一样,只要把物品从原处移开哪怕只有头发尖那么一点点,也同样构成波罗夷。这就是这段话的意思。巴利
Theyyacittena ṭhānā cāventopi tathā parājitoti yojanā. Thalādīsu ṭhitaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ theyyacittena avaharitukāmatāya ṭhitaṭṭhānato apanentopi dutiyapariyesanādīsu āmasanāvasānesu sabbesupi payogesu dukkaṭāni ca phandāpane thullaccayañca āpajjitvā upari vakkhamānappakāresu viya ṭhitaṭṭhānato kesaggamattampi apanento tatheva parājito hotīti attho.
有人问:在这首偈颂里,针对“应取、应夺、应搬运、应破坏威仪路、应从处所移开、应越过约定”这六项,出自分别解释的六项中,前五项都收摄了,为什么第六项没有收摄呢?应当这样理解:这首偈颂并不是为了展示那六项分别解释而说的,而是为了依据对这些项目的判定,说明注疏中所讲的二十五种搬运,并且想要显示作为其组成部分的五个五法组,所以才说的,因此这里没有说第六项。或者也可以这样理解:在后文将要说的第三个五法组中,它已经被舍堕搬运这一项收摄;在第五个五法组中,它已经被预备搬运这一项收摄。因此,为了不混杂地显示“不同物品五法组”和“单一物品五法组”这两者,这里没有取第六项,应当这样知道。巴利
Evametāya gāthāya ‘‘ādiyeyya hareyya avahareyya iriyāpathaṃ vikopeyya ṭhānācāveyya saṅketaṃ vītināmeyyā’’ti (pārā. 92) padabhājanāgatesu chasu padesu ādo pañca padāni saṅgahetvā chaṭṭhaṃ padaṃ kasmā na saṅgahitanti ce? Ayaṃ gāthā na taṃpadabhājanaṃ dassetuṃ vuttā, atha kho tesaṃ padānaṃ vinicchayaṃ sandhāya aṭṭhakathāsu (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.92) vuttapañcavīsatiavahāre dassetuṃ tadavayavabhūtapañcapañcakāni dassetukāmena vuttā, tasmā ettha chaṭṭhaṃ padaṃ na vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Atha vā vakkhamāne tatiyapañcake nissaggiyāvahārapadena, pañcamapañcake parikappāvahārapadena ca saṅgayhamānattā ettha nānekabhaṇḍapañcakadvayaṃ asaṅkarato dassetuṃ chaṭṭhaṃ padaṃ na gahitanti veditabbaṃ.
40 在“不与取波罗夷”这件事上,当有人犯了这件事、需要作出判定时,共有二十五种搬运的构成要素。它们被归纳成五个五法组:不同物品五法组、单一物品五法组、亲手五法组、前加行五法组、盗搬运五法组。这里用这首偈颂,先把不同物品五法组和单一物品五法组这两个五法组所包含的十种搬运收摄起来,为了接着说明剩下三个五法组,所以开始说“于彼”。其中,“于彼”是指在这首偈颂里。“不同物品”的构词是:不同,而且有单一物品属于它们,即“有不同物品和单一物品者”。应当依照有识物与无识物来理解不同物品五法组,也应当依照有识物来理解单一物品五法组。“五”是数量,属于它们,因此是“五法组”,即那些五法组。“搬运”:诸搬运,意思是盗贼的行为。这里说“这些”:紧接前偈中以“正取”等所指示的正取等。在修行相续中,他增长、生起殊胜的判定,因此是“明辨者”,即持律者,由那位明辨者。应当了知:对于他人的园林等有识物,或对奴隶、孔雀等纯粹有识物,为了搬取而作的如上所说的正取等,以移离处所为终结的五种搬运,成为如上所说的不同物品和单一物品的对象而转起,因此不同物品五法组和单一物品五法组成为十种搬运。由于持律者能资助判定所犯之事,所以应当如实了知此义。巴利
40. Imasmiṃ adinnādānapārājike vatthumhi otiṇṇe kattabbavinicchayassa pañcavīsatiavahārānaṃ aṅgāni honti, te ca nānābhaṇḍapañcakaṃ ekabhaṇḍapañcakaṃ sāhatthikapañcakaṃ pubbapayogapañcakaṃ theyyāvahārapañcakanti niddiṭṭhā pañcapañcakabhedā, tattha imāya gāthāya nānekabhaṇḍapañcakadvayappabhede dasa avahāre saṅgahetvā avasesapañcakattayaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tatthā’’ti āraddhaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tissaṃ gāthāyaṃ. Nānekabhaṇḍānanti nānā, eko ca bhaṇḍo yesanti viggaho. Saviññāṇakaaviññāṇakabhaṇḍavasena nānābhaṇḍapañcakañca saviññāṇakabhaṇḍavaseneva ekabhaṇḍapañcakañca veditabbaṃ. Pañca parimāṇā yesante pañcakā, tesaṃ. Avahārāti avaharaṇāni, corakammānīti vuttaṃ hoti. Eteti anantaragāthāya ‘‘ādiyanto’’tiādinā niddiṭṭhā ādiyantādayo. Paṭipattisantāne visesaṃ vinicchayaṃ bhāveti uppādetīti vibhāvī, vinayadharo, tena vibhāvinā. Viññātabbāti paresaṃ ārāmādisaviññāṇakavatthūni vā dāsamayūrādiṃ kevalaṃ saviññāṇakavatthumattaṃ vā avaharituṃ katā yathāvuttasarūpā ādiyanādayo ṭhānācāvanapariyosānā pañca avahārā yathāvuttanānābhaṇḍaekabhaṇḍavisayā hutvā pavattantīti nānābhaṇḍapañcakaṃ ekabhaṇḍapañcakanti dasa avahārā bhavantīti vinayadharena otiṇṇassa vatthuno vinicchayopakārakattā tathato ñātabbāti attho.
41 41. 为了说明二十五种偷盗方式,在应当讲述的五个五法组中,先展示了“不同物品五法组”和“单一物品五法组”这两个五法组,现在为了展示剩下的三个五法组,而说“亲手”等。其中,“亲手”就是自己的手,由自己的手所做,或者与自己的手相关,就叫亲手,也就是偷盗;意思是盗贼亲手实施的偷盗。“命令”就是由命令所产生的,叫命令偷盗;意思是盗贼对任何人下令说“取这个物品”,由此完成的偷盗。“舍弃”就是丢弃,即偷盗;意思是在税关处或预设场所站立,而将物品投掷于外。巴利
41. Evaṃ pañcavīsati avahāre dassetuṃ vattabbesu pañcasu pañcakesu nānekabhaṇḍapañcakāni dve dassetvā idāni avasesapañcakattayaṃ dassetumāha ‘‘sāhatthā’’tiādi. Tattha sāhatthoti sako hattho, tena nibbatto, tassa vā sambandhīti sāhattho, avahāro, corena sahatthā kato avahāroti attho. Āṇattiko cevāti āṇattiyā nibbatto āṇattiko, avahāro, corassa ‘‘imaṃ nāma bhaṇḍaṃ gaṇhā’’ti yassa kassaci āṇāpanena siddho avahāro ca. Nissaggoti nissajjanaṃ nissaggo, avahāro, suṅkaghātaṭṭhāne, parikappitokāse vā ṭhatvā bhaṇḍassa bahi pātananti vuttaṃ hoti.
“义成就”是指成就了被称为波罗夷罪的那个义,所以叫义成就。这里说的是:如果偷盗者按照命令去做而毫无违背,在决定偷盗时,或者以“把某人的东西偷来”这样不指定具体对象的方式下令,或者指定所偷物品的具体种类、偷取的时间、地点、方式等任何一种差别来下令;又或者以把脚油、饮料、鞋子等任何物品倒进油瓶等容器里这类行为作为加行——这些加行,因为在实际完成行为之前就已经在成就被称为波罗夷罪的那个义了,所以说这是义成就偷盗。巴利
Atthasādhakoti pārājikāpattisaṅkhātaṃ atthaṃ sādhetīti atthasādhako, so avahāro ca yathāṇattikaṃ avirādhetvā ekaṃsena avaharantassa ‘‘asukassa bhaṇḍaṃ avaharā’’ti avisesena vā avaharitabbavatthuviseso gahaṇakālo gahaṇadeso gahaṇākāro cāti evamādivisesānamaññatarena visesetvā vā āṇāpanañca ekaṃsena pādagghanakatelapivanakaṃ upāhanādikiñcivatthuṃ telabhājanādīsu pātanādippayogo cāti evamādippayogo ca kiriyāsiddhiyā puretarameva pārājikasaṅkhātassa atthassa sādhanato atthasādhako avahāro cāti vuttaṃ hoti.
“放下负担”:放下负担就是舍弃责任,这也就是偷取。意思是说,对于他人所有的园林等管理对象,以及寄存的财物等,盗贼放弃这些东西,或者物主虽然想着“我无论何时、用什么办法都要拿回来”,却始终没有实际行动,这种状态就叫作放下负担所摄的偷取。这样一来,前面所说的放下负担,加上亲手等四种,合起来就是五种偷取,构成一个五法组;亲手等五种则称为“亲手五法组”。应当知道,“等”字是省略的说法。巴利
Dhuranikkhepanañcāti dhurassa nikkhepanaṃ dhuranikkhepanaṃ, tañca avahāro, parasantakānaṃ ārāmādīnaṃ abhiyogavisaye ca upanikkhittassa bhaṇḍādino visaye ca corassa sāmino vissajjane ca sāmino ca, yadā kadāci yathākathañci gaṇhissāmīti gahaṇe nirussāhabhāvasaṅkhāto dhuranikkhepāvahāro cāti vuttaṃ hoti. Iti idaṃ dhuranikkhepanañca yathāvuttappakāraṃ sāhatthādicatukkañca pañcannaṃ avahārānaṃ samūho pañcakaṃ, sāhatthādipañcakaṃ ‘‘sāhatthapañcaka’’nti vuccati. Ādi-saddo luttaniddiṭṭhoti veditabbaṃ.
42 关于“前加行与俱加行”这一句,这里的“加行”一词应当分别与“前”和“俱”搭配。依据注释书的说法“依命令而应知为前加行”,当不违背命令而取物时,下令说“你去偷某人的某件物品”,这叫做前加行,也就是偷盗。以身或语来施行命令,就是加行;因为在被命令者取物之前,所以是“前”,而它又是加行,因此前加行就是偷盗,应当这样理解。注释书说“依从一处移动而应知为俱加行”,这是举例说明的话;从一处移动,以及取他人土地时打桩、移动等,应知为俱加行偷盗。巴利
42.Pubbasahapayogā cāti ettha ‘‘pubbapayogo sahapayogo’’ti payoga-saddo paccekaṃ yojetabbo. ‘‘Āṇattivasena pubbapayogo veditabbo’’ti aṭṭhakathāvacanato (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.92) yathāṇattikamavirādhetvā gaṇhato ‘‘asukassa itthannāmaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ avaharā’’ti āṇāpanaṃ pubbapayogo nāma avahāro. Kāyena, vācāya vā payujjanaṃ āṇāpanaṃ payogo, āṇattassa bhaṇḍaggahaṇato pubbattā pubbo ca so payogo cāti pubbapayogo avahāroti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Ṭhānācāvanavasena sahapayogo veditabbo’’ti aṭṭhakathāvacanassa upalakkhaṇapadattā ṭhānācāvanañca parāyattabhūmigahaṇe khīlasaṅkamanādikañca sahapayogo avahāroti veditabbo.
“共同盗取”是指:许多人聚在一起,商量说“我们去偷某某东西”,然后所有人一起去,或者大家同意后由一个人去,以偷盗的心拿走别人的东西,这就叫共同搬运。要知道:即使只有一个人以偷盗的心以步行的方式或乘车的方式拿走,所有参与商量的人都犯波罗夷。商量好之后再去偷,就是共同盗取。按照语法规则来理解这个词的构成。“共同盗取”是“共同搬运”的另一种说法。正如经文所说:“许多人商量好后,一个人去偷东西,所有人都犯波罗夷。”因此,在共同商量的人当中,即使只有一个人以偷盗的心以步行的方式或乘车的方式拿走,所有参与商量的人全都犯波罗夷,应当这样理解。巴利
Saṃvidāharaṇanti bahūhi ekato hutvā ‘‘idaṃ nāma bhaṇḍaṃ avaharissāmā’’ti saṃvidahitvā sabbehi, ekato vā sabbesaṃ anumatiyā ekena vā gantvā parasantakassa theyyacittena haraṇasaṅkhāto saṃvidāvahāro ca. Samaṃ ekī hutvā visuṃ ekenāpi theyyacittena pāde vā pādārahe vā gahite katamantanānaṃ sabbesampi pārājikaṃ hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ . Saṃvidahitvā mantetvā avaharaṇaṃ saṃvidāharaṇaṃ. Niruttinayena saddasiddhi veditabbā. ‘‘Saṃvidāharaṇa’’nti ‘‘saṃvidāvahāro’’ti imassa vevacanaṃ. ‘‘Sambahulā saṃvidahitvā eko bhaṇḍaṃ avaharati, āpatti sabbesaṃ pārājikassā’’ti (pārā. 118) vacanato evaṃ sahakatamantanesu ekenāpi theyyacittena pāde vā pādārahe vā gahite katamantanānaṃ sabbesaṃ pārājikaṃ hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
约定盗取:用上午等时间段来划定范围并让人知道,这叫约定;依这个约定所做的盗取行为,就叫约定盗取。不过,如果限定了午饭前等某个时间,说“就在这个时间偷某某物品”,而那人果然在那个时间按所说的偷了那件物品,那么立约定的人在立约定的那一刹那就犯波罗夷。这是简略的理解方式。巴利
Saṅketakammanti pubbaṇhādikālaparicchedena sañjānanaṃ saṅketo, tena kataṃ kammaṃ avaharaṇaṃ saṅketakammaṃ nāma. Taṃ pana purebhattādīsu kañci kālaṃ paricchinditvā ‘‘imasmiṃ kāle itthannāmaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ avaharā’’ti vutte tasmiṃyeva kāle taṃyeva yathāvuttaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ avaharati ce, saṅketakārakassa saṅketakkhaṇeyeva pārājikanti saṅkhepato veditabbaṃ.
“以相”是指:因为它是盗取他人财物的原因,所以眨眼等动作就叫“相”;由这个相所产生的,就是“以相”;被称为盗取的行为,就是盗取。如果接受命令的人看到那个相之后,按照所说的规定,取走所说的财物,那么作相的人在作相的那一刹那,就犯波罗夷。如果违背所说的规定而取走,作相的人就不犯,只有盗取的人才犯波罗夷。前行等为首,就是“前行等为首”;前行等为首共有五种,这就是它们的分别。巴利
Nemittanti parabhaṇḍāvahārassa hetuttā akkhinikhaṇanādi nimittaṃ nāma, tena nibbattaṃ nemittaṃ, avaharaṇasaṅkhātakammaṃ avahāro. ‘‘Mayā akkhimhi nikhaṇite vā bhamumhi ukkhitte vā itthannāmaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ avaharā’’ti āṇattena taṃ nimittaṃ disvā vuttameva bhaṇḍaṃ vuttaniyāmamavirādhetvā gahitaṃ ce, nimittakārakassa nimittakaraṇakkhaṇeyeva pārājikaṃ hoti. Vuttaniyāmaṃ virādhetvā gahitaṃ ce, nimittakārako muccati, avahārakasseva pārājikaṃ. Pubbapayogo ādi yassa taṃ pubbapayogādi, pubbapayogādi ca taṃ pañcakañcāti viggaho.
43 盗取、强夺、计划、隐藏、诡计这五种,以这些为首的作为复合前分,凡是以这些盗取等为始的取财方式,就称为盗取……乃至……诡计等取财方式;这里说的“以盗取方式取财”……乃至……“以诡计方式取财”。其中,“以盗取方式取财”:thena被称为coro(贼),他的状态就是theyya(盗);这里na音的省略要按语法规则来理解。以这种方式取财,就叫以盗取方式取财;包括撬门闩等不让人看见而取,以及用假秤、假量器、假钱币等欺骗而取,都叫以盗取方式取财。巴利
43. Theyyañca pasayhañca parikappo ca paṭicchanno ca kuso ca theyyapasayhaparikappapaṭicchannakusā, te ādī upapadabhūtā yesaṃ avahārānaṃ te theyya…pe… kusādikā, avahārā, iminā theyyāvahāro ca…pe… kusāvahāro cāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha theyyāvahāroti theno vuccati coro, tassa bhāvo theyyaṃ, ettha na-kāralopo niruttinayena daṭṭhabbo, tena avaharaṇaṃ theyyāvahāro, sandhicchedādivasena adissamānena gahaṇañca kūṭamānakūṭakahāpaṇādīhi vañcetvā gahaṇañca theyyāvahāro.
强行压制、制服对方后把东西拿走,这叫强夺。就像抢掠村庄的人制服了主人后夺取财物;又像国王的士兵等人,在压制住对方后,于固定征收的税赋之外多拿多占,这也叫强夺。巴利
Pasayha abhibhavitvā avaharaṇaṃ pasayhāvahāro, gāmavilopakā viya sāmike abhibhavitvā gahaṇañca rājabhaṭādayo viya abhibhavitvā nibaddhakaraggahaṇe adhikaggahaṇañca pasayhāvahāro.
把衣料等物先划定范围、再作打算后拿走,这叫“盘算取”。它又按对物品的盘算和对地点的盘算分成两种。
其中,进入黑暗的地方,看到放在那里的衣料、线等物品,在拿那些箱笼等东西时,心里先盘算:“如果我拿衣服,就不拿线”等等,这样盘算之后再拿起来,因为是以对物品的盘算为先,所以叫“物品盘算取”。
进入园林、僧房等处,看到令人起贪心的物品,心里先盘算好内室、楼阁、平台、门、门楼等任何一个地方,想:“如果在这中间被人看见,我就装作是拿起来看看;如果没被看见,我就拿走。”然后拿了东西走,越过了先前盘算好的那个地方,因为是以对地点的盘算为先,所以叫“地点盘算取”。简要来说,应当这样理解。巴利
Vatthasuttādikaṃ paricchijja kappetvā avaharaṇaṃ parikappāvahāro, so ca bhaṇḍokāsaparikappavasena duvidho hoti. Tattha nikkhittabhaṇḍaṃ andhakārappadesaṃ pavisitvā suttādibhaṇḍāni tattha nikkhittāni, te peḷādayo gaṇhantassa ‘‘vatthāni ce gaṇhissāmi, suttāni ce na gaṇhissāmī’’tiādinā nayena parikappetvā ukkhipanaṃ bhaṇḍaparikappapubbakattā bhaṇḍaparikappāvahāro nāma. Ārāmapariveṇādīni pavisitvā lobhanīyaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ disvā gabbhapāsādatalapamukhamāḷakapākāradvārakoṭṭhakādiṃ yaṃ kiñci ṭhānaṃ parikappetvā ‘‘etthantare diṭṭho ce, oloketuṃ gahitaṃ viya dassāmi, no ce, harissāmī’’ti parikappetvā ādāya gantvā parikappitaṭṭhānātikkamo okāsaparikappapubbakattā okāsaparikappāvahāro nāmāti saṅkhepato veditabbo.
用草、树叶等把物品盖住后偷走,这叫“覆藏取”。比如有人在园林等处游玩,或者僧团的人巡行时,把装饰品等物品解下来放在一边。有人看见后,心想:“要是弯腰去拿,会被怀疑。”于是站在旁边,用草、树叶、尘土、沙子等把它盖起来,等物主找来找去都找不到、回到住处之后,再以偷盗的心把它拿走。或者对同一件物品,以偷盗的心用拇指等把它按进泥里等,让它陷下去,只要物品的下半部分被碰到、上半部分已经越过去,这也叫“覆藏取”。巴利
Tiṇapaṇṇādīhi paṭicchannassa bhaṇḍassa avaharaṇaṃ paṭicchannāvahāro, uyyānādīsu kīḷamānehi vā saṅghaparivisantehi vā manussehi omuñcitvā ṭhapitaṃ alaṅkārādikaṃ yaṃ kiñci bhaṇḍaṃ disvā ‘‘oṇamitvā gaṇhante āsaṅkantī’’ti ṭhatvā tiṇapaṇṇapaṃsuvālukādīhi paṭicchādetvā sāmikesu pariyesitvā adisvā sālayesu gatesu pacchā theyyacittena gahaṇañca tadeva bhaṇḍaṃ kaddamādīsu theyyacittena aṅguṭṭhādīhi pīḷetvā osīdāpetvā heṭṭhābhāgena phuṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ uparibhāgena atikkamanañca paṭicchannāvahāroti vuttaṃ hoti.
用签来盗取,就叫签取。意思是:以盗心移动签,去盗取别人份额中价值相等或更高的物品。如果比丘在僧团分配衣时,想用投签的方式,盗取别人份额中价值与自己份额相等或更高,或者价值五马萨咖、超过五马萨咖的物品,便把自己份额中落下的签拿起来,想投到别人的份额里;在拿起时和投到别人份额时,还不犯波罗夷。但如果他从别人的份额里把写有别人名字的签拿起来,哪怕只移开发尖那么一点,就犯波罗夷。如果他是先从别人那里把签拿起来,在拿起时、投到自己份额时、以及拿起写有自己名字的签时,都不犯波罗夷;但在投到别人份额时,签从手中脱落,哪怕只落开发尖那么一点,就犯波罗夷。巴利
Kusena avahāro kusāvahāro, theyyacittena kusaṃ saṅkāmetvā parakoṭṭhāsassa agghena mahantassa vā samasamassa vā gahaṇanti attho. Yo pana bhikkhu kusapātanena saṅghassa cīvaresu bhājiyamānesu attano koṭṭhāsena samaṃ vā adhikaṃ vā ūnakaṃ vā agghena pañcamāsakaṃ vā atirekapañcamāsakaṃ vā agghanakaṃ aññassa koṭṭhāsaṃ avaharitukāmo attano koṭṭhāse patitaṃ kusaṃ parakoṭṭhāse pātetukāmo uddharati, taṅkhaṇe ca parassa koṭṭhāse pātitakkhaṇe ca na pārājikaṃ anāpajjitvā parakoṭṭhāsato paranāmalikhitaṃ kusaṃ ukkhipento tato kesaggamattampi apanāmeti, pārājiko hoti. Yadi paṭhamaṃ parakoṭṭhāsato kusaṃ uddharati, uddhaṭakkhaṇe ca attano koṭṭhāse pātitakkhaṇe ca sakanāmalikhitaṃ kusaṃ uddharaṇakkhaṇe ca pārājikaṃ anāpajjitvā parakoṭṭhāse pātanakkhaṇe hatthato kesaggamattampi mutte pārājiko hoti.
如果他把两个签都藏起来,等所有比丘各自取了自己的那份离开后,物主来到他藏签的那份前,说:“我的签怎么不见了?”盗者说:“我的签也不见了。”然后把自己的那份拿给他看,像是他的东西一样;接着不管有没有跟他争吵,只要拿走,之后又去取另一份,那么在取出的当下就犯波罗夷。如果对方说:“我不把我的那份给你,你自己去找你的那份拿吧。”他听了这话,虽然知道自己的那份是无主的,却仍旧去取对方的那份,在取出的当下就犯波罗夷。如果对方因为害怕争吵,心想“争吵有什么用”,就说:“这也许是你的,也许是我的,你拿好的那份吧。”这样给了之后,就算已经取了,不犯波罗夷。如果对方说“你拿你喜欢的吧”,他因为害怕争吵,把自己那份好的留下,拿了差的那份离开,后来盗者再去拿时,这叫做取走挑剩下的部分,不犯波罗夷。签阄窃取的判定应当这样理解。这是二十五种窃取中的简说,详细解说则应依照《一切欢喜》律注中所说的方式来了知。巴利
Yadi dvepi kuse paṭicchādetvā sabbesu bhikkhūsu sakasakakoṭṭhāsaṃ ādāya gatesu yasmiṃ kusaṃ paṭicchādesi, tassa sāmikena āgantvā ‘‘mayhaṃ kuso kasmā na dissatī’’ti vutte coro ‘‘mayhampi kuso na dissatī’’ti vatvā attano koṭṭhāsaṃ tassa santakaṃ viya dassetvā tasmiṃ vivaditvā vā avivaditvā vā gahetvā gate itaraṃ koṭṭhāsaṃ uddharati ce, uddhaṭakkhaṇeyeva pārājiko hoti. Yadi paro ‘‘mayhaṃ koṭṭhāsaṃ tuyhaṃ na demi, tvaṃ tuyhaṃ koṭṭhāsaṃ vicinitvā gaṇhāhī’’ti vadati, evaṃ vutte so attano assāmikabhāvaṃ jānantopi parassa koṭṭhāsaṃ uddharati, uddhaṭakkhaṇe pārājiko hoti. Yadi paro vivādabhīrukattā ‘‘kiṃ vivādenā’’ti cintetvā ‘‘mayhaṃ vā pattaṃ hotu tuyhaṃ vā, varakoṭṭhāsaṃ tvaṃ gaṇhāhī’’ti vadeyya, dinnakaṃ nāma gahitaṃ hotīti pārājikaṃ na hotīti. Yadi ‘‘tava ruccanakaṃ gaṇhāhī’’ti vutto vivādabhayena attano pattaṃ varabhāgaṃ ṭhapetvā lāmakabhāgaṃ gahetvā gato, coro pacchā gaṇhanto vicitāvasesaṃ nāma aggahesīti pārājiko na hoti. Evaṃ kusāvahāravinicchayo veditabbo. Ayamettha pañcavīsatiyā avahāresu saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana samantapāsādikāya vinayasaṃvaṇṇanāya vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
44 到此为止,已经用不与取波罗夷判决支分的形态,讲完了应当掌握的二十五种偷取方式。现在,当进入不与取判决时,不应仓促判罪,而要先观察五种情况,所以开始说“物、时、价、处、用”等。巴利
44. Ettāvatā adinnādānapārājikassa vinicchayāvayavarūpena uggahetabbe pañcavīsati avahāre dassetvā idāni adinnādānavinicchaye sampatte sahasā āpattiṃ anāropetvā paṭhamaṃ oloketabbāni pañca ṭhānāni dassetuṃ ‘‘vatthukālagghadese cā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ.
这里,“物”指的是被偷走的东西。这话是什么意思呢?即使偷盗者说“我偷了某某东西”,也要先审查那件东西是有主还是无主。如果是有主的,还要确定偷取的时候物主对那件东西是有顾恋还是无顾恋。如果是在物主有顾恋时偷取的,就对那件东西估价:如果价值一个摩沙迦或不到一个摩沙迦,按突吉罗处理;如果超过一个摩沙迦但不到五个摩沙迦,按偷兰遮处理;如果价值五个摩沙迦或超过五个摩沙迦,按波罗夷处理。如果是在物主无顾恋时偷取的,就不犯波罗夷。不过,如果物主让人把东西取回来,那就应当归还那件东西或同等价值的东西。巴利
Tattha vatthu nāma avahaṭabhaṇḍaṃ. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Avahārakena ‘‘mayā itthannāmaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ avahaṭa’’nti vuttepi tassa bhaṇḍassa sassāmikaassāmikabhāvaṃ upaparikkhitvā sassāmikaṃ ce, avahārakāle tesaṃ sālayabhāvaṃ vā nirālayabhāvaṃ vā niyametvā sālayakāle ce gahitaṃ, bhaṇḍaṃ agghāpetvā māsakaṃ vā ūnamāsakaṃ vā hoti, dukkaṭena, atirekamāsakaṃ vā ūnapañcamāsakaṃ vā hoti, thullaccayena, pañcamāsakaṃ vā atirekapañcamāsakaṃ vā hoti, pārājikena kātabbo. Sāmikānaṃ nirālayakāle ce gahitaṃ, natthi pārājikaṃ. Bhaṇḍasāmike pana bhaṇḍaṃ āharāpente taṃ vā bhaṇḍaṃ tadagghanakaṃ vā dātabbanti.
所谓“时间”,是指偷取的时间。物品的价值有时候很高,有时候则一般。因此,判定被偷物品的价值时,要依照偷取的时间来定,为了判定价值,就必须判断时间。这就是这段话要表达的意思。巴利
Kālo nāma avahārakālo. Bhaṇḍaṃ nāmetaṃ kadāci mahagghaṃ hoti, kadāci samagghaṃ. Tasmā avahaṭabhaṇḍassa agghaṃ paricchindantehi avahaṭakālānurūpaṃ katvā paricchindanatthaṃ kālavinicchayo kātabboti vuttaṃ hoti.
所谓“价”,就是被盗物品的价值。这里,所有物品的价值并不是始终一样的:新物品价值高,如果是旧物品,价值就一般。因此,在偷取的时候,要先确定物品是新的还是旧的,然后再判定它的价值。这就是这段话的意思。巴利
Aggho nāma avahaṭabhaṇḍassa aggho. Ettha ca sabbadā bhaṇḍānaṃ aggho samānarūpo na hoti, navabhaṇḍaṃ mahagghaṃ hoti, purāṇaṃ ce samagghaṃ. Tasmā avahārakāle bhaṇḍassa navabhāvaṃ vā purāṇabhāvaṃ vā niyametvā aggho paricchinditabboti adhippāyo.
所谓“处”,就是盗取货物的地点。这里的意思是:一切货物在产地时价格都一样,盗到别处后因为变得昂贵,所以要先为判定价值而划定盗取所到之处,再依那个地方的价值,由规定相应罪者判定与那价值相应的罪。这就是本段的意旨。巴利
Deso cāti bhaṇḍāvahāradeso. Ettha ca sabbassāpi bhaṇḍassa uṭṭhānadese samagghaṃ hutvā aññattha mahagghattā avahaṭabhaṇḍe agghaṃ paricchinditvā tadanurūpā āpattiyo niyamantehi agghaṃ paricchindanatthāya avahāradesaṃ niyametvā tasmiṃ dese agghavasena tadanurūpā āpattiyo kāretabbāti adhippāyo.
所谓“使用”,是指物品在被拿走之前,已经被别人使用过。在这里,任何物品只要被用过,价值就会降低。所以应当先问物主:即使那件物品还是全新的,只要曾经以任何方式被用过一次,在估价时就要把价值相应减扣。这里说的就是这个意思。巴利
Paribhogo nāma avahaṭabhaṇḍe avahārato pubbe parehi kataparibhogo. Ettha ca yassa kassaci bhaṇḍassa paribhogena aggho parihāyatīti bhaṇḍasāmikaṃ pucchitvā tasmiṃ bhaṇḍe navepi ekavārampi yena kenaci pakārena paribhutte parihāpetvā aggho paricchinditabboti vuttaṃ hoti.
用这样的方法审察这五处之后,判定必须作出。为了说明这一点,才说:“智者了知这五处之后,也应当由智者作出判定。”巴利
Evamādinā nayena etāni pañca ṭhānāni upaparikkhitvāva vinicchayo kātabboti dassetumāha ‘‘pañcapi ñatvā etāni kattabbo paṇḍitena vinicchayo’’ti.
45 到此为止,已经讲明了不与取判定中二十五种偷取方式和五种观察角度。现在,为了堵住未来恶比丘可能钻的空子,如来想说明:属于他人的任何物品,不管放在哪里,不管用什么方式拿走,都不可能得到解脱——巴利
45. Ettāvatā adinnādānavinicchayāvayavabhūte pañcavīsati avahāre ca pañcaṭṭhānāvalokanañca dassetvā idāni anāgate pāpabhikkhūnaṃ lesokāsapidahanatthaṃ parasantakaṃ yaṃ kiñci vatthuṃ yattha katthaci ṭhitaṃ yena kenaci pakārena gaṇhato mokkhābhāvaṃ dassetukāmena tathāgatena yā panetā –
地上和陆地上的;
住在虚空的,以及随后的那些。
住在虚空中的和住在水中的;
船和车乘的所在也是如此。
重担、愉悦与住处
田地与宅地本身,以及……
村落、林地、水。
齿木树长出
还有盗取者与埋藏物;
收税杀生者、众生;
无足的、二足的,以及
四足的、多足的。
还有刺探者与轴木守护者;
还有共同摄持。
约定业与相
“那”是最佳论母。巴利
Bhūmaṭṭhañca thalaṭṭhañca; Ākāsaṭṭha mathāparaṃ; Vehāsaṭṭho dakaṭṭhañca; Nāvā yānaṭṭhameva ca. Bhārā rāma vihāraṭṭhaṃ; Khetta vatthuṭṭhameva ca; Gāmā raññaṭṭha mudakaṃ; Dantapono vanappati. Haraṇako panidhi ceva; Suṅkaghātakaṃ pāṇakā; Apadaṃ dvipadañceva; Catuppadaṃ bahuppadaṃ. Ocarakoṇirakkho ca; Saṃvidāharaṇampi ca; Saṅketakammaṃ nimitta- Miti tiṃ settha mātikā. –
这些已经安立。为了依彼等在词句分别中的次第及彼注疏所传方法说明判定,先要说明关于地处的判定,所以说“第二,或池”等等。巴利
Nikkhittā , tāsaṃ yathākkamaṃ padabhājane, tadaṭṭhakathāya ca āgatanayena vinicchayaṃ dassetukāmo paṭhamaṃ tāva bhūmaṭṭhe vinicchayaṃ dassetumāha ‘‘dutiyaṃ vāpī’’tiādi.
这里,“第二,以盗心寻找时,犯恶作”,这是前后文的关联方式。一切词句都应这样理解。有人想挖出被上方生长的树藤、砖石等覆盖的大宝藏,心想“我一个人办不到”,于是以盗心去寻找同伴,那么从他躺卧之处起身等一切行动中,都犯恶作。这就是这段话的意思。锄头是用来挖地的,篮子或其他容器是用来运土的。在这两样东西上:如果锄头没有柄,为了做柄而去砍树取木;如果没有锄头,为了制作锄头而去挖不合适的土地取铁;为了制作篮子而割叶子;为了编篮子而割藤蔓;在这些寻找的过程中如果说妄语,就犯恶作和波逸提;在其他行为中,只犯恶作。应当这样理解。巴利
Tattha dutiyaṃ theyyacittena pariyesato dukkaṭanti sambandho. Evaṃ sabbapadesu. Upari sañjātāhi rukkhalatāhi, iṭṭhakapāsāṇādīhi ca sañchannaṃ mahānidhiṃ uddharitukāmena ‘‘mayā ekeneva na sakkā’’ti attano aññaṃ sahāyaṃ pariyesituṃ theyyacittena sayitaṭṭhānā uṭṭhānādīsu sabbapayogesu dukkaṭaṃ hotīti attho. Kudālaṃ bhūmikhaṇanatthāya piṭakaṃ vāpi paṃsuuddharaṇatthāya yaṃ kiñci bhājanaṃ. Imesu dvīsu kudālassa ce daṇḍo natthi, daṇḍatthāya rukkhato daṇḍaṃ chindato ca kudālo ce na hoti, kudālakaraṇatthāya ayobījaṃ uddharaṇatthāya akappiyapathaviṃ khaṇantassapi pacchikaraṇatthāya paṇṇāni chindatopi piṭakavāyanatthāya valliṃ chindatopi ubhayatthāpi pariyesane musā bhaṇatopi dukkaṭañceva pācittiyañca, itarapayogesu dukkaṭamevāti veditabbaṃ.
前往的意思是:寻找第二人(同伴)等之后,不论找到还是没找到,凡是朝藏宝地点走去的人,每迈一步都犯恶作。这里应当知道:巴利圣典《波罗夷》94中说“以盗心寻找第二人(同伴)等”,因为那里说的是“以盗心”,而这里说的是“以盗心”,所以如果是善心生起,心想“得到这个宝藏后,我要供佛,或者要设僧食”等等,以这样的方式行善,那就没有犯戒。前行的意思是:这属于不与取的前方便,所以在寻找第二人(同伴)等前行阶段,犯恶作。巴利
Gacchatoti dutiyādiṃ pariyesitvā laddhā vā aladdhā vā nidhiṭṭhānaṃ gacchantassa pade pade dukkaṭanti attho. Ettha ca ‘‘theyyacitto dutiyaṃ vā pariyesatī’’tiādi pāḷiyaṃ (pārā. 94) ‘‘theyyacitto’’ti vuttattā, idha ‘‘theyyacittenā’’ti vacanato ‘‘imaṃ nidhiṃ labhitvā buddhapūjaṃ vā karissāmi, saṅghabhattaṃ vā karissāmī’’ti evamādinā nayena kusalacittappavattiyā sati anāpattīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Pubbayogatoti adinnādānassa pubbapayogabhāvato, dutiyapariyesanādīsu pubbapayogesu dukkaṭanti attho.
恶作有八种:前行恶作、俱行恶作、不可触摸恶作、恶习恶作、律制恶作、已知恶作、白告恶作、应诺恶作。其中,所谓“以盗心寻求第二者,或锄头,或篮子,或前往,犯恶作”,这叫作前行恶作。在这里,若事情属于波逸提的范畴,就犯波逸提;在其余的前行阶段,则只是恶作。所谓“砍伐生长在那里的木材或藤蔓,犯恶作”,这叫作俱行恶作。在这里,因为是与不与取同时进行的行动,所以在波逸提的事项上以及其他情况下,都只是恶作,这就是这里的区别。在珍珠、宝石等十种宝物中,在稻米等七种谷物中,以及在一切武器、器具等物中,因为触摸而犯的恶作,是不可触摸恶作。触摸香蕉、椰子、波罗蜜等树上的果实而说的恶作,是恶习恶作。upacaraṇaṃ 就是 upaciṇṇaṃ,意思是接触。duṭṭhu upaciṇṇaṃ 就是恶劣地接触;在恶劣接触的情况下犯的恶作,就是恶习恶作。在乞食的时候,钵里落进了尘土,不把钵接过来,或者不洗干净,接受布施的食物,因此犯的恶作,是律制恶作,也就是律藏中制定的恶作。虽然其余的恶作也都是律藏中制定的,但按照习惯,就像用“mayūra”等词来指孔雀等一样,唯独这一种被称为律制恶作。所谓“听到了却不说,犯恶作”,这叫作已知恶作。在十一种呵责法中说“白告时犯恶作”,这是白告恶作。所谓“诸比丘,那位比丘的前期行为不清楚,而且在应诺时犯恶作”,这叫作应诺恶作。在这八种恶作中,这里所要犯的恶作,就是前行恶作。因此说“由前行”。为了偈颂的韵律顺口,没有采用前缀,本应说“pubbapayogato”,却说成了“pubbayogato”,应当这样理解。巴利
Dukkaṭañca aṭṭhavidhaṃ hoti pubbapayogadukkaṭaṃ sahapayogadukkaṭaṃ anāmāsadukkaṭaṃ durupaciṇṇadukkaṭaṃ vinayadukkaṭaṃ ñātadukkaṭaṃ ñattidukkaṭaṃ paṭissavadukkaṭanti. Tattha ‘‘theyyacitto dutiyaṃ vā kudālaṃ vā piṭakaṃ vā pariyesati gacchati vā, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti vuttaṃ pubbapayogadukkaṭaṃ nāma. Idha pācittiyaṭṭhāne pācittiyaṃ, itaresu pubbapayogesu dukkaṭaṃ. ‘‘Tatthajātakaṃ kaṭṭhaṃ vā lataṃ vā chindati, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti vuttaṃ sahapayogadukkaṭaṃ. Idha adinnādānasahitapayogattā pācittiyavatthumhi, itaratra ca dukkaṭamevāti ayamettha viseso. Muttāmaṇiādīsu dasasu ratanesu, sāliādīsu sattasu dhaññesu, sabbesu ca āvudhabhaṇḍādīsu āmasanapaccayā dukkaṭaṃ anāmāsadukkaṭaṃ. Kadalināḷikerapanasādirukkhaṭṭhameva phalaṃ āmasantassa vuttaṃ dukkaṭaṃ durupaciṇṇadukkaṭaṃ. Upacaraṇaṃ upaciṇṇaṃ, parāmasananti attho. Duṭṭhu upaciṇṇaṃ durupaciṇṇaṃ, durupaciṇṇe dukkaṭaṃ durupaciṇṇadukkaṭaṃ. Bhikkhācārakāle patte rajasmiṃ patite pattaṃ appaṭiggahetvā vā adhovitvā vā bhikkhāpaṭiggahaṇena dukkaṭaṃ vinayadukkaṭaṃ, vinaye paññattaṃ dukkaṭaṃ vinayadukkaṭaṃ. Kiñcāpi avasesadukkaṭānipi vinaye paññattāneva, tathāpi ruḷhiyā mayūrādisaddehi morādayo viya idameva tathā vuccati. ‘‘Sutvā na vadanti, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti vuttaṃ ñātadukkaṭaṃ nāma. Ekādasasu samanubhāsanāsu ‘‘ñattiyā dukkaṭa’’nti vuttaṃ ñattidukkaṭaṃ. ‘‘Tassa bhikkhave bhikkhuno purimikā ca na paññāyati, paṭissave ca āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (mahāva. 207) vuttaṃ paṭissavadukkaṭaṃ nāma. Imesu aṭṭhasu dukkaṭesu idha āpajjitabbaṃ dukkaṭaṃ pubbapayogadukkaṭaṃ nāma. Tenāha ‘‘pubbayogato’’ti. Gāthābandhasukhatthaṃ upasaggaṃ anādiyitvā ‘‘pubbapayogato’’ti vattabbe ‘‘pubbayogato’’ti vuttanti gahetabbaṃ.
在这里,虽然有些恶作并不包括在上面说的这些恶作里,比如在两部分别中出现的白天睡觉等恶作,以及犍度中出现的许多恶作,但这些在这里都应该归入律藏恶作。因为《萨罗他迪波尼》(2.94)中说:“在律藏中制定的恶作,就是律藏恶作。”不过在《波罗夷义注》(1.94)中,只是拿沾了尘土的恶作来指称“律藏恶作”,这仅仅是一种举例说明。否则的话,说“八种恶作”这个数量限定就没有意义了。虽然前行恶作等也应该归入律藏恶作,但为了先举出几种,再把其余的合在一起说明,所以对它们作了单独列举,应当知道,这就像虽然包含在经分中,却仍然把应颂、偈颂等八种单独列出来一样。巴利
Ettha ca kiñcāpi imesu dukkaṭesu asaṅgahitāni ubhatovibhaṅgāgatāni divāseyyādidukkaṭāni ceva khandhakāgatāni ca bahūni dukkaṭāni santi, tāni panettha vinayadukkaṭeyeva saṅgahitabbāni. ‘‘Vinaye paññattaṃ dukkaṭaṃ vinayadukkaṭa’’nti hi sāratthadīpaniyaṃ (sārattha. ṭī. 2.94) vuttanti. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.94) pana rajokiṇṇadukkaṭasseva ‘‘vinayadukkaṭa’’nti gahaṇaṃ upalakkhaṇamattaṃ. Itarathā aṭṭha dukkaṭānīti gaṇanāparicchedoyeva niratthako siyāti pubbapayoge dukkaṭādīnampi vinayadukkaṭeyeva saṅgahetabbabhāvepi katipayāni dassetvā itaresamekato dassanatthaṃ tesaṃ visuṃ gahaṇaṃ suttaṅgasaṅgahitattepi geyyagāthādīnaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ visuṃ dassanaṃ viyāti veditabbaṃ.
46 在那里生长的木材,是指在那个长久放置的宝藏上面长出来的湿木材或干木材。或藤蔓,是指那样的藤蔓。这是一种举例,因为应当理解为还包括草等和小灌木。在两种情况下,是指在湿的和干的两方面。砍伐湿树等时,不构成波逸提而只是恶作,这里说明了其原因,即“从同行”。意思是说,因为与不与取的行为同时进行,所以即使在应当构成波逸提的情形下,也只是恶作。说“从同行在两种情况下都是恶作”时,是在显示第一偈中所说的前行与这一偈中所说的同行之间的差别。巴利
46.Tatthajātakaṃ kaṭṭhaṃ vāti tasmiṃ ciranihitanidhūpari jātaṃ allaṃ sukkhaṃ kaṭṭhaṃ vā. Lataṃ vāti tādisaṃ valliṃ vā. Idaṃ upalakkhaṇaṃ tiṇādīnaṃ khuddakagacchānañca gahetabbattā. Ubhayatthāpīti alle ca sukkhe cāti vuttaṃ hoti. Allarukkhādīni chindato pācittiyaṃ ahutvā dukkaṭamattassa bhavane kāraṇaṃ dasseti ‘‘sahapayogato’’ti. Avahārena sahitapayogattā pācittiyaṭṭhānepi dukkaṭamevāti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Sahapayogato ubhayatthāpi dukkaṭa’’nti vadanto paṭhamagāthāya dassitapubbapayogato imāya dassitasahapayogassa visesaṃ dasseti.
47 “地”是指可用的地或不可用的地。挖掘不可用的地时,因为和偷盗是同一行为,所以只犯恶作。“堆积”,是指把土聚成一堆。按照注疏里说的“堆积就是把土堆到一边”,虽然 ūha 这个词根有“思量”的意思,但词根有多种含义,这里应该按 vi 这个前缀来理解为“堆聚”。用锄头、手或篮子把已经堆好的土举起来、移走的人,按动作的次数来算,每次都犯恶作。“或只是土”这里,应当知道是用“或”字把没提到的内容也收摄进来了。“触摸”,是指用手去摸宝藏的瓮。“或”,是收摄的意思。“恶作”,就是恶劣地做,因为违背、做错了导师所教导的事,所以叫恶作。这在《附随》339 中已经说过。巴利
47.Pathavinti kappiyaṃ vā akappiyaṃ vā pathaviṃ. Akappiyapathaviṃ khaṇato sahapayogattā dukkaṭameva. Byūhatoti paṃsuṃ ekato rāsiṃ karontassa. ‘‘Viyūhati ekapasse rāsiṃ karotī’’ti aṭṭhakathāvacanato ūha-iccetassa dhātuno vitakke uppannattepi dhātūnamanekatthattā vi-upasaggavasena idha rāsikaraṇe vattatīti gahetabbaṃ. Rāsibhūtaṃ paṃsuṃ kudālena vā hatthena vā pacchiyā vā uddharantassa ca apanentassa ca payogagaṇanāya dukkaṭaṃ paṃsumeva vāti ettha avuttasamuccayatthena vā-saddena saṅgahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Āmasantassāti nidhikumbhiṃ hatthena parāmasantassa. Vāti samuccaye. Dukkaṭanti duṭṭhu kataṃ kiriyaṃ satthārā vuttaṃ virādhetvā khalitvā katattāti dukkaṭaṃ. Vuttañcetaṃ parivāre (pari. 339) –
关于“恶作”所说的内容,你应当如实地听清楚。
有过失、偏离正道、出错,以及恶作。巴利
‘‘Dukkaṭanti hi yaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ suṇohi yathātathaṃ; Aparaddhaṃ viraddhañca, khalitaṃ yañca dukkaṭa’’nti.
把行为做得很恶劣、很反常,这就叫恶作。这一点在《附随》里也说过:巴利
Duṭṭhu vā virūpaṃ kataṃ kiriyāti dukkaṭaṃ. Vuttampi cetaṃ parivāre (pari. 339) –
一个人做了恶事,不管是公开还是暗中,
他们说这是“恶作”,因此就称为“恶作”。巴利
‘‘Yaṃ manusso kare pāpaṃ, āvi vā yadi vā raho; ‘Dukkaṭa’nti pavedenti, tenetaṃ iti vuccatī’’ti.
像这样,按照“彼处所生”等两首偈颂所说的砍断恶作、挖掘恶作、堆土恶作、拔出恶作、触摸恶作这五种同时进行的恶作,由前前方便所犯的恶作罪,到后后恶作时便逐渐平息。如果在每一种方便结束时,因为生起惭愧而停下来,那么只需对每一种恶作发露,就能得到清净。《大注疏》中说:没有放下重担而让它动摇的人,达到土喇咤亚时,触摸恶作就平息了。如果依据巴利原文来理解,前前诸罪的平息,因为巴利文中说“白时恶作,两次羯磨语时土喇咤亚平息”,应当知道仅凭唱念就能获得。然而,按照这部经的次第,《大注疏》中所说的罪之平息,在这条不与取学处中也应当作为标准,在这里应当得出结论。巴利
Evaṃ ‘‘tatthajātaka’’ntiādigāthādvayāgataṃ chedanadukkaṭaṃ khaṇanadukkaṭaṃ byūhanadukkaṭaṃ uddharaṇadukkaṭaṃ āmasanadukkaṭanti pañcasu sahapayogadukkaṭesu purimapurimapayogehi āpannā dukkaṭāpattiyo pacchimaṃ pacchimaṃ dukkaṭaṃ patvā paṭipassambhanti, taṃtaṃpayogāvasāne lajjidhammaṃ okkamitvā oramati ce, taṃtaṃdukkaṭamattaṃ desetvā parisuddho hoti. Dhuranikkhepamakatvā phandāpentassa thullaccayaṃ patvā āmasanadukkaṭaṃ paṭipassambhatīti mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.94) vuttaṃ. Yathāpāḷiyā gayhamāne purimapurimāpattīnaṃ paṭipassaddhi ‘‘ñattiyā dukkaṭaṃ, dvīhi kammavācāhi thullaccayā paṭipassambhantī’’ti pāḷiyaṃ (pārā. 414, 421, 428, 439) āgatattā anussāvanāya eva labbhatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Imassa pana suttassa anulomavasena mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttā imasmiṃ adinnādānasikkhāpadepi āpattipaṭipassaddhi pamāṇanti niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṃ.
48 “令它晃动,犯土喇咤亚;令它离开原处,犯波罗夷。”(《波罗夷》94)这里说到,在令它离开原处时,波罗夷以及属于它邻近罪的土喇咤亚,应当通过说明“处所差别”的方式来讲。现在为了显示这一点,所以说了“瓶口、绳索”等话。其中,“在瓶口”指瓶口的边缘处。“把绳索放进去”就是把捆绑用的绳索放进去。“在桩上”指铁桩或黑檀木桩。应当知道它们的关联是:对于已捆绑的瓶子,处所的差别要依据诸绳索的束缚情况来了知。巴利
48. ‘‘Phandāpeti, āpatti thullaccayassa. Ṭhānā cāveti, āpatti pārājikassā’’ti (pārā. 94) vuttaṃ ṭhānācāvane pārājikañca tassa sāmantāpattibhūtaṃ thullaccayañca ṭhānabhedaviññāpanamukhena vattabbanti idāni taṃ dassetumāha ‘‘mukhepāsa’’ntiādi. Tattha mukhe kumbhimukhavaṭṭiyaṃ. Pāsaṃ pavesetvāti bandhanaṃ pāsaṃ pakkhipitvā. Khāṇuketi ayokhāṇumhi, khadirakhāṇuke vā. Baddhakumbhiyā ṭhānabhedo bandhanānaṃ vasā ñeyyoti sambandho.
49 现在,用“二”等说法来显示处所的差别。通过“在一个木桩上”这句话,说明了在二个方向、或三个、或四个方向上挖掘木桩,按照所绑木桩的数量计算而可能成立的各种处所差别。应当这样连接文句:“以圆圈……中略……或者所作的二处。”“或”字则用来标示集合。巴利
49. Idāni ṭhānabhedaṃ dasseti ‘‘dve’’tiādinā. ‘‘Ekasmiṃ khāṇuke’’ti iminā dvīsu disāsu vā tīsu catūsu vā disāsu khāṇuke khaṇitvā baddhakhāṇugaṇanāya sambhavanto ṭhānabhedo upalakkhito hoti. Valayaṃ…pe… katāya vā dve ṭhānānīti yojanā. Vāti samuccaye upalakkhito hoti.
50 50. 这样显示了处所的差别之后,现在为了依据处所来说明应当犯的诸罪,所以说“于拔出者”等文。“锁链”就是绳索。“土喇咤亚”是指在应向一人发露的诸罪中,因为粗重、因为属于过失,所以名为土喇咤亚。这一点在《附随》中已经这样说过:巴利
50. Evaṃ ṭhānabhedaṃ dassetvā idāni ṭhānavasena āpajjitabbā āpattiyo dassetumāha ‘‘uddharantassā’’tiādi. Saṅkhalinti dāmaṃ. Thullaccayanti ekassa santike desetabbāsu āpattīsu thūlattā, accayattā ca thullaccayaṃ nāma. Vuttañhetaṃ parivāre –
所谓“重罪”,是指所说的那个。巴利
‘‘Thullaccayanti yaṃ vuttaṃ;
你好好听着,如实去听。
有一人在其跟前为他说法;
而如果有人接受它,
没有过失能和它相比;
因此,这样说:巴利
Taṃ suṇohi yathātathaṃ; Ekassa mūle yo deseti; Yo ca taṃ paṭigaṇhati; Accayo tena samo natthi; Tenetaṃ iti vuccatī’’ti. (pari. 339);
这里,本来应该说“thūlaccaya”(偷兰遮),但就像“来世得善趣,那有苦果”等句子中那样,要知道 l 字母重复成双,而且在复合词中 ū 字母要缩短为 u。然后,从断链之后。所谓“使之离位”,就是从所站的位置,哪怕只移动一根头发尖那么一点,也算移动。这里,按照注释书中所说“向上、向下或横向,哪怕只移动一根头发尖那么一点,就犯波罗夷”,所说的“横向”指四个方向,加上向上和向下,一共六个方位。在这六方中,如果对着某一方移动坛罐,在那一侧接触到的区域,哪怕只差一根头发尖那么一点还没越过,就因为使它颤动而犯偷兰遮;如果越过了,就因为已经离开原位而犯波罗夷,应当这样理解。正是针对这个意思,才说“若使之离位,则成离位”。同样的道理,也适用于不会颤动而令其离位的埋藏坛罐。巴利
Ettha ca thūlaccayanti vattabbe ‘‘samparāye ca (saṃ. ni. 1.49) suggati, taṃ hoti kaṭukapphala’’ntiādīsu (dha. pa. 66) viya lakārassa dvittaṃ, saṃyoge ūkārassa rasso ca veditabbo. Tato saṅkhalikabhedato paraṃ. Ṭhānā cāvetīti ṭhitaṭṭhānato kesaggamattampi apaneti. Ettha ca nāvaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘uddhaṃ vā adho vā tiriyaṃ vā antamaso kesaggamattampi saṅkāmeti, āpatti pārājikassā’’ti (pārā. 99) vuttanayena ‘‘tiriya’’nti vuttā catasso disā, uddhamadho cāti chaṭṭhānāni. Tāsu ekaṃ disaṃ apanīyamānāya kumbhiyā taṃdisābhimukhaṃ itaradisāyaṃ ṭhitapasse orimadisāya ṭhitapassena phuṭṭhokāsassa kesaggamattampi anatikkante phandāpanavasena thullaccayaṃ hoti, atikkante ṭhānā cāvitattā pārājikaṃ hotīti veditabbo. Imameva sandhāyāha ‘‘ṭhānā cāveti ce cuto’’ti. Eseva nayo phandanarahitāya nidhikumbhiyā ṭhānācāvanepi.
51 51. 这样先断了第一个系缚之后,接着在取瓮的部分显示了方法。现在为了先移开瓮、再在解缚的部分显示方法,所以说了“第一”等话。那个方法就是:“第一次取出时犯土喇咤亚,第二次取出时犯波罗夷。”这里正是指这个意思。巴利
51. Evaṃ paṭhamaṃ bandhanaṃ chinditvā pacchā kumbhiggahaṇe nayaṃ dassetvā idāni paṭhamaṃ kumbhiṃ apanetvā pacchā bandhanāpanayane nayaṃ dassetumāha ‘‘paṭhama’’ntiādi. So nayoti ‘‘paṭhamuddhāre thullaccayaṃ, dutiyuddhāre pārājika’’nti tamevatthamatidisati.
52 52.“环”是指穿进系在瓮上的链子底部的环。“在底部摩擦,来回移动”是句子的连接方式。“摩擦”的意思是使接触。“来回移动”的意思是从这边和那边摇动。“守护”在这里是省略了“戒比丘”这个说法,意思是说不犯波罗夷。“于彼处”就是在那底部。“或使它悬空”是指从各个方向都不碰到底部,使它悬在空中。“败”是因为已经离开了原来的位置,所以就成了败失。巴利
52.Valayanti kumbhiyā baddhasaṅkhalikāya mūle pavesitaṃ valayaṃ. Mūle ghaṃsanto ito cito ca sāretīti yojanā. Ghaṃsantoti phusāpento. Ito cito ca sāretīti orato ca pārato ca sañcāleti. Rakkhatīti ettha ‘‘sīlaṃ bhikkhu’’nti pāṭhaseso, pārājikaṃ nāpajjatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tatthāti tasmiṃ mūle. Khegataṃ karontovāti sabbapassato mūlaṃ aphusāpetvā ākāsagataṃ karontova. Parājitoti ṭhānācāvanassa katattā parājayamāpanno hoti.
53 53. “生在瓮顶上”是句子的连接。意思是:因为埋了很久,根已经缠住瓮,就那样立着。“砍掉近处长出来的树”也是句子的连接。这里,在前一首偈颂“那里生长的木头……”等句中,说的是砍伐立在宝藏上方地面上的树、藤等的人犯戒;而在这首偈颂里,说的是挖地之后根露出来时,根缠住宝藏而长在那里的湿树,或者树桩,把它取来的情况,应当知道这不构成重复的过失。用“非那里生长”这句话,说明没有共同的业。正是通过这一点表明:前一首偈颂所说的木头、藤等,如果和宝藏有关联,就是所说的恶作的事;如果在近处,那就只是波逸提的事。巴利
53. Kumbhimatthake jātanti yojanā. Cirakālaṃ nihitattā mūlehi kumbhiṃ vinandhitvā ṭhitanti attho. Samīpe jātaṃ rukkhaṃ chindatoti yojanā. Ettha ca ‘‘tatthajātakaṃ kaṭṭhaṃ vā’’tiādikāya gāthāya nidhimatthake bhūmiyaṃ ṭhitarukkhalatādiṃ chindantassa āpatti vuttā, imāya pana gāthāya bhūmiṃ nikhaṇitvā otiṇṇakāle nidhiṃ vinandhitvā ṭhitamūlaṃ allarukkhaṃ, khāṇukaṃ vā gahetvā āhāti punaruttidosābhāvo veditabbo. ‘‘Atatthaja’’nti iminā sahapayogābhāvamāha. Imināva purimagāthāya vuttaṃ kaṭṭhalatādīni nidhisambandhāni ce, yathāvuttadukkaṭassa vatthūni, samīpāni ce, pācittiyasseva vatthūnīti dīpeti.
54 54. 现在,为了说明这样一种判定:像前面那样寻找之后,不把已见到的藏宝容器从它所在的位置挪动,而只取走放在里面的物品本身,所以说了“在瓮内”等话。其中,“令动摇”是指,为了让放于瓮内的物品能装进自己的容器中,用堆聚等方式使它动摇。“或者拨开”是指,为了取下面放着的东西,把上面放着的东西移开,就是拨开;或者,“拨开”这个词,因为注书作了两种解释,所以《甘提巴达》中所说的意思应当理解为:为了装进自己的容器,从这里那里把东西堆聚起来。“就在那里”是指,就在瓮里面。巴利
54. Idāni evaṃ pariyesitvā diṭṭhanidhibhājanaṃ ṭhitaṭṭhānato acāletvā antoṭhitaṃ bhaṇḍamattaṃ gaṇhato vinicchayaṃ dassetumāha ‘‘antokumbhigata’’ntiādi. Tattha phandāpetīti antocāṭiyā pakkhitte attano bhājane pakkhipituṃ rāsikaraṇādivasena phandāpeti. Apabyūhati vāti heṭṭhā ṭhitaṃ gaṇhituṃ upari ṭhitāni apanento viyūhati vā. Atha vā apabyūhantoti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.94) aṭṭhakathāvacanassa dvidhā karontoti gaṇṭhipade attho vuttoti attano bhājane pakkhipituṃ ito cito ca rāsiṃ karontoti attho veditabbo. Tatthevāti antokumbhiyameva.
55 “拿走”就是正在偷取。“用拳头分开”是说:无法以放入自己容器的方式取走,于是把手伸进瓮里,用拳头把瓮里的东西划开,让它不粘在一起;也就是说,取瓮里的东西时,用拳头把它分开,使拳头里的东西不和瓮里的东西混在一起,这样分开之后,拿走价值一巴达或超过一巴达的东西,这就是所说的意思。或者也可以这样连接:把它弄成进入自己容器里的东西之后再分开。意思是:让它进入自己的容器后,再这样分开,使它与瓮里的东西不相混;如果进入自己容器后、与瓮里的东西不相混的物品价值五马萨咖或超过五马萨咖,那就是波罗夷,这是所说的意思。巴利
55.Harantoti avaharanto. Muṭṭhiṃ chindatīti attano bhājanaṃ pakkhipitvā gaṇhituṃ asakkuṇeyyo antokumbhimhi hatthaṃ otāretvā kumbhigatabhaṇḍena yathā abaddhaṃ hoti, tathā muṭṭhiyā paricchindati, kumbhigataṃ muṭṭhiyā gaṇhanto kumbhigatena muṭṭhigataṃ yathā asammissaṃ hoti, tathā paricchinditvā pādagghanakaṃ vā atirekapādagghanakaṃ vā gaṇhātīti vuttaṃ hoti. Attano bhājane gataṃ katvā vā chindatīti yojanā. Attano bhājanagataṃ katvā kumbhigatena yathā asammissaṃ hoti, tathā paricchindatīti attho, sace attano bhājanagataṃ hutvā kumbhigatena asammissaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ pañcamāsakaṃ vā atirekapañcamāsakaṃ vā agghati, pārājikoti vuttaṃ hoti.
56 “或项链”是指珍珠项链之类。“或臂环”是指金制或银制的臂环、花环。“串于线”是指串在线上,即“线与所串之物”合称“串于线”,这里应理解为以部分代整体的省略说法。根据注疏中说“此语也通指用线缠绕的,以及线制的物品”,所以除了第一种珍珠项链之外,还应包括把金、银、珊瑚等宝石穿在线上做成的各种串珠,以及线制的物品。“置于瓮中”是句中被省略的部分。“令动摇”是指以偷盗的心想拿取而摇动。“如其事”意思是:随所违犯的情况,犯土喇咤亚罪,这是其意趣。“使之离位”是指从所站之处移动,哪怕只有发尖的距离。“断失”是指从别解脱律仪戒退失,这是其含义。巴利
56.Hāraṃ vāti muttāhāraṃ vā. Pāmaṅgaṃ vāti suvaṇṇamayaṃ, rajatamayaṃ vā pāmaṅgaṃ dāmaṃ. Suttāruḷhanti sutte āruḷhaṃ suttāruḷhaṃ, suttañca suttāruḷhañca suttāruḷhanti ekadesasarūpekaseso daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Suttena āvutassāpi suttamayassāpi etaṃ adhivacana’’nti aṭṭhakathāvacanato (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.94) paṭhamamuttāhāraṃ vinā suvaṇṇarajatapavāḷādimaṇikaṃ vā suttesu āvuṇitvā katā nānāvaliyo ceva suttamayāni ca bhaṇḍāni gahetabbāni. Kumbhiyā ṭhitanti pāṭhaseso. Phandāpetīti theyyacittena gaṇhitukāmatāya cāleti. Yathāvatthunti vītikkamānurūpaṃ thullaccayaṃ hotīti adhippāyo. Ṭhānā cāvetīti ṭhitaṭṭhānato kesaggamattampi atikkāmeti . Cutoti pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlā parihīnoti attho.
对于没装满的瓮,有人把里面的物品从一处移到另一处,哪怕只挪动一根发尖那么小的距离,还是在瓮内挪动;或者把物品悬在瓮内的空中。这两种做法,和“或使它进入自己的容器,或用拳头截断”这些情况相似,当物品价值达到一巴陀时,就犯波罗夷。这是《大注疏》的结论。如果把一串项链等物的一端放在容器底部,然后一圈圈地盘上去,填满整个容器内部,另一端搭在瓮口边上。这样一来,整个容器内部都成了“非处所”。如果抓住搭在瓮口的那一端直接往上提,使末端从容器底部悬空,哪怕只离开一根发尖的距离;或者贴着瓮口边缘摩擦着往外拉,让物品越过整个容器内部,以搭在瓮口那一端所接触的位置为起点,另一端移动了一根发尖的距离;又或者在容器内部一半的地方用衣物等填满,再把串好的项链等物放在上面,它所在的那个空间就是“处所”,从这里移动一根发尖的距离,也构成波罗夷。以上就是所说的意思。巴利
Aparipuṇṇāya kumbhiyāekadesaṭṭhaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ tato tato kesaggamattampi ṭhānaṃ apanetvā tattheva antokumbhiyā aññaṃ ṭhānaṃ nentassa ca tattheva ākāsagataṃ karontassa ca ‘‘attano bhājanagataṃ vā karoti, muṭṭhiṃ vā chindatī’’ti (pārā. 94) etehi sadisattā vatthumhi pādaṃ agghante pārājikā hotīti mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.94) idaṃ sanniṭṭhānaṃ. Bhājanatale koṭiṃ ṭhapetvā kamena sakalabhājanakucchiṃ teneva pūretvā mukhavaṭṭiyā ekā koṭi nikkhittā ce, tathāṭhapitassa hārādino sakalabhājanaṃ aṭṭhānanti koṭiṃ gahetvā ujukaṃ ukkhipantassa osānakoṭi bhājanatalato kesaggamattampi ākāsagataṃ karoto ca mukhavaṭṭiyaṃ ghaṃsitvā ākaḍḍhantassa sakalabhājanodaraṃ khepetvā mukhavaṭṭiyā ṭhapitakoṭiyā phuṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ aparāya koṭiyā kesaggamattampi atikkāmayato ca bhājanakucchiyā upaḍḍhaṃ vatthādinā kenaci pūretvā tassopari ṭhapitahārādisuttāruḷhassa ṭhitokāsameva ṭhānanti tato kesaggamattaṃ apanentassapi pārājikaṃ hotīti vuttaṃ hoti.
57 “酥油等”是指装在容器里的酥油等任何流质物品中的任何一种。“满一巴陀”是说填满一巴陀的量,也就是一巴陀大小的意思。与“饮者败”相连。那么什么时候呢?连接方式是:以一次动作饮到满一巴陀的量时。“除口中所有”是经文省略的部分。其中,“以一次动作”是指不中途放下、不换气、一口气吸着饮下去的动作。“除口中所有”这句话是说:如果仅仅靠已经到喉咙里的东西就满一巴陀,那就是说进入喉咙内时就已经犯了。如果是靠嘴里的东西满一巴陀,那就是说把嘴里的东西和容器里的东西分开,闭住嘴唇含着,这是所说的意思。用竹管等吸着饮的人,是靠管里的东西满一巴陀,那就是说把管里的东西和容器里的东西分开,用手指堵住管口,这是所说的意思。这一点应当依照“或使它进入自己的容器,或用手拳截断”所说的方式,并按照《大筏疏》等注疏中随顺阐述的方式来理解,这是本意所在。巴利
57.Sappiādīsūti bhājanagatesu sappiādidravavatthūsu yaṃ kiñci. Pādapūraṇanti pādaṃ pūretīti pādapūraṇaṃ, pādagghanakanti attho. Pivato parājayoti sambandho. Kadāti ce? Ekeneva payogena pītamatte pādapūraṇeti yojanā. ‘‘Mukhagataṃ vinā’’ti pāṭhaseso. Tattha ekeneva payogenāti dhuranikkhepamakatvā ekābaddhaṃ katvā ākaḍḍhetvā pivanapayogena. ‘‘Mukhagataṃ vinā’’ti iminā sace galagateneva pādo pūrati, antogalaṃ paviṭṭheti vuttaṃ hoti. Mukhagatena pūrati, mukhagataṃ bhājanagatena viyojetvā oṭṭhesu pihitesūti vuttaṃ hoti. Veḷunaḷādīhi ākaḍḍhetvā pivantassa nāḷagatena pūrati, nāḷagataṃ bhājanagatena viyojetvā nāḷikoṭiyaṃ aṅguliyā pihitāyanti vuttaṃ hoti. Idaṃ ‘‘attano bhājanagataṃ vā karoti, muṭṭhiṃ vā chindatī’’ti (pārā. 94) vuttanayassa anulomavasena mahāpaccariyādīsu (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.94) aṭṭhakathāsu vuttanayena gahetabbanti adhippāyo.
即使只凭一次动作,喝到仅仅一巴陀的量就算失败。这里应当这样理解:在酥油等贵重物品中,仅仅以此就达到满一巴陀的量时,即使只是一次用口喝,或者用盛着酥油等的容器喝,在连成一体的情况下被截断时,或者将瓮倾斜、倒入自己的容器中而分开时,只要所喝达到满一巴陀的量,就犯波罗夷。巴利
‘‘Ekeneva payogena pītamatte parājayo’’ti iminā sappiādīsu mahagghesu tattakeneva pādapūraṇañce hoti, ekavārameva mukhena vā sappiādinā vā bhājanagatena ekābaddhabhāve chinnamattepi attano bhājane kumbhiṃ paṇāmetvā pakkhittena kumbhigate chinnamattepi pārājiko hotīti gahetabbaṃ.
58 “舍弃负担后再三饮用的人不会失败”,这句话是在说明:没有舍弃负担而再三饮用的人就会失败。应当这样理解:没有舍弃负担,再三用口取来喝,或者用器皿等取来喝,只要喝到足量,就会犯波罗夷。巴利
58. ‘‘Dhuranikkhepaṃ katvā punappunaṃ pivantassa na parājayo’’ti iminā dhuranikkhepamakatvā punappunaṃ pivato parājayoti sāmatthiyā vuttaṃ hoti. Dhuranikkhepaṃ akatvā punappunaṃ mukhena gahetvā vā puṭādīhi vā gahetvā pādapūraṇamattaṃ pivantassa parājayo hotīti gahetabbaṃ.
59-60 59-60. “如果以盗心投掷”,这是连接。所谓“任何物品”,指能吸油的物品,比如细棉布衣、皮革片之类。“在别人的油瓮中”,是说放在别人油瓮里的物品。“必定”,是决定的意思。“当即就毁坏”,这是连接。“当即”,就是在那一刹那。是哪一刹那?回答说“手刚一松开的时候”,意思是还不到喝油的时候,因为属于前方便,所以最初动作一完成就犯了。“毁坏”,就是戒被破坏。“倾出”,就是倒出去。“使流出”,就是让它滴漏。也有人读作“使流”,意思一样;“萨拉”是流动的词根。“如是”,是引出“以盗心就毁坏”的意思,也就是说,以盗心这样做的人,犯波罗夷。巴利
59-60. Sace khipati theyyacittoti sambandho. Yaṃ kiñci bhaṇḍakanti telapivanārahaṃ dukūlasāṭakacammakhaṇḍādikaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ. Telakumbhiyaṃ parassāti labbhati. Taṃ nikkhittabhaṇḍaṃ. Dhuvanti ekaṃsena. Tāvade vinassatīti sambandho. Tāvadeti tasmiṃ khaṇeyeva. Katarasmiṃ khaṇeti āha ‘‘hatthato muttamatte’’ti, telassa pītakālaṃ anāgamma pubbapayogattā paṭhamameva hotīti adhippāyo. Vinassatīti sīlavināsaṃ pāpuṇāti. Āviñjetvāti paṇāmetvā. Gāḷetīti paggharāpeti. ‘‘Sāḷetī’’tipi paṭhanti, soyeva attho. Sāḷa savaneti dhātu. Tathāti ‘‘theyyacitto vinassatī’’ti ākaḍḍhati, theyyacittena evaṃ karontassa pārājiko hotīti vuttaṃ hoti.
61 所谓“那”,是指已经知道油将会倾泻出来,最初就以盗心把足以饮用一巴陀价值油量的衣物等物品放进空容器里的那件东西。用“或取出时”这句带有限定意味的话,就驳斥了大注疏中“饮用时即犯波罗夷”的主张。“堕落”,意思是说从教法之树上掉下来,也就是已犯波罗夷。“以盗心”是为了引出下文,应和“如是”连起来理解。由此说明:如果是为了保护而用清净心把衣物等放进空容器里,别人没注意到,油浸了进去,后来再以清净心取出,那就没有罪。巴利
61.Tanti telassa okiraṇabhāvaṃ ñatvā paṭhamameva tucchabhājane theyyacittena nikkhittaṃ pādagghanakatelapivanakaṃ taṃ vatthādibhaṇḍaṃ. ‘‘Uddharantovā’’ti sāvadhāraṇavacanena ‘‘pītamatte parājayo’’ti dassitaṃ mahāaṭṭhakathāmataṃ paṭikkhittaṃ hoti. Dhaṃsitoti ‘‘sāsanakapparukkhā pātito, pārājikāpannoti adhippāyo. ‘‘Theyyacitto’’ti ākaḍḍhanatthaṃ ‘‘tathā’’ti ānetvā sambandhanīyaṃ. Iminā suddhacittena gopanatthāya tucchabhājane vatthādiṃ nikkhipitvā aññena taṃ anoloketvā tele āsitte pacchā suddhacitteneva uddharato na dosoti dīpitaṃ hoti.
62 就在那里是指就在原来站立的位置。破坏是指不让他离开原处,就像烧草堆的人那样,比丘并没有要把人从原处移走的意图,只是用石头等东西打坏他。也有人说,是靠咒术和药力的作用来破坏。倾倒时是说,即使本来并不想倒掉,但因为毛躁,在装满油的瓮等容器里撒进沙子或水,让油溢出来,就是这个意思。也有人说,是把水引到瓮口,让油溢出来。即使有想让他离开原处的意图,但因为没有盗心,所以不犯波罗夷,不过仍然要赔偿物品,这是结论。焚烧时是指放进木柴去烧。使不堪受用时是指倒入粪尿等物,使它不能再用。恶作是说,在破坏等这四种情况中,按照分别解释,都只提到恶作,所以这样说。巴利
62.Tatthevāti ṭhitaṭṭhāneyeva. Bhindatoti ṭhānā acāvetvā tiṇajjhāpakassa viya bhikkhuno ṭhānācāvanādhippāyaṃ vinā pāsāṇādinā kenaci paharitvā bhindato. ‘‘Mantosadhānubhāvena bhindato’’ti ca vadanti. Chaḍḍentassāti achaḍḍetukāmassāpi sato paripuṇṇatelaghaṭādīsu cāpallena vālukaṃ vā udakaṃ vā okiritvā uttarāpentassāti attho. ‘‘Udakamātikaṃ ghaṭābhimukhaṃ katvā opilāpentassā’’ti vadanti. Ṭhānācāvanādhippāye satipi theyyacittābhāvena pārājikā na vijjati, bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ pana hotīti sanniṭṭhānaṃ. Jhāpentassāti kaṭṭhāni pakkhipitvā jhāpentassa. Aparibhogaṃ karontassāti uccārapassāvādimokiritvā aparibhogaṃ karontassa. Dukkaṭanti etesu bhindanādīsu catūsupi ṭhānesu padabhājaniyaṃ dukkaṭameva āgatattā vuttaṃ.
63 现在为了说明在陆地上的判定,说了“已放置”等话。其中,“铺展”就是铺开的意思。这里的“及”字是用来把没有明说的内容也收拢进来,因此,陆地上堆积的谷物等的判定,可以按照前面油瓮所说的判定方式类推了知,所以用“及”字把没有明说的情形一并概括进来。“铺展物等”:指铺垫的东西等。“卷起取出时”:按照收拾席子的惯例,卷起来收拢再取出的时候。“离开原处”:依次收拢时,从原来所在的位置移动哪怕只有发尖那么一点。“败坏”:从教法中退失。巴利
63. Idāni thalaṭṭhe vinicchayaṃ dassetumāha ‘‘ṭhapita’’ntiādi. Tattha pattharitvāti attharitvā. Ettha ca-saddo avuttasampiṇḍanattho, tena thale rāsikatadhaññādīsu vinicchayo nimikumbhiyā vuttavinicchayānusārena viññātuṃ sakkāti taṃ sarūpato avuttaṃ samuccinoti. Attharaṇādikanti paccattharaṇādikaṃ. Veṭhetvā uddharantassāti kilañjasaṃharaṇaniyāmena vaṭṭetvā saṃharitvā uddharantassa. Mutte ṭhānāti kamena saṃharitvā ṭhitaṭṭhānato kesaggamattampi mutte sati. Parābhavoti sāsanato parihīno.
64 64. 这样铺开并放好衣物等之后,把它们收起来时如何判定的问题已经说明;接着为了说明横向拖拉时如何判定,所以说“从此端”等话。“或”这个字是把另一种情况也一并收摄进来。“或直着拉”是指:把铺开并放好的衣物等,朝四个方向中的某一个方向直着拉,也犯波罗夷。什么时候犯呢?这里也应这样贯通理解:当以彼端越过此端所触之处时,就犯波罗夷。“以此端所触之处”是指拿住并拖拉时,自己所在方向的边缘所碰到而原本所在的位置。“从彼端”就是从另一边的边缘;“to”这个后缀在这里表示具格的意义。巴利
64. Evaṃ attharitvā ṭhapitavatthādīnaṃ saṃharitvā gahaṇe vinicchayaṃ dassetvā tiriyato ākaḍḍhane vinicchayaṃ dassetumāha ‘‘orimantenā’’tiādi. Pi, vāti pakārantarameva samuccinoti. Ujukaṃ kaḍḍhatopi vāti attharitvā ṭhapitavatthādikaṃ catūsu disāsu ekaṃ disaṃ ujukamākaḍḍhato ca pārājikaṃ hoti. Kadāti ce? Etthāpi orimantena phuṭṭhamokāsaṃ pārimantato atikkante pārājikanti yojanā. Orimantena phuṭṭhamokāsanti gahetvā ākaḍḍhantassa attano ṭhitadisāgatapariyantena phusitvā ṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ. Pārimantatoti pārimantena, karaṇatthe to-paccayo.
所谓“地”,是指覆盖或未覆盖的地面、楼阁、山坡、平地等。放在那些地方上的谷物等物品,就叫作“地上物”。在这里,一切情况下的判定,都应当按前面所说的方式来了知。巴利
Thalaṃ nāma paṭicchannāpaṭicchannabhūmipāsādapabbatatalādīni, tatraṭṭhaṃ dhaññādibhaṇḍaṃ thalaṭṭhaṃ nāma hoti. Tattha sabbattha vinicchayo vuttanayena veditabbo.
65-6 “界限”指的是处所的界限。其余部分很容易理解。巴利
65-6.Paricchedāti ṭhānaparicchedā. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
67-8 “空行”是指行于虚空。“其”是指孔雀的。“彼”是指孔雀。巴利
67-8.Khegatanti ākāsagataṃ. Assāti morassa. Tanti moraṃ.
69 “处”是指限定范围内的六种处所。“它的”是指孔雀的,整句应连起来理解为“使(孔雀)惊动”。或者,“它的”是指比丘的,这里说的是土喇咤亚罪。巴利
69.Ṭhānāti yathāparicchinnā chabbidhā ṭhānā. Tassāti morassa phandāpaneti yojanā. Tassāti vā bhikkhussa thullaccayamudīritaṃ.
70 不用手去抓,而是用扔土块等方式把孔雀吓跑,让它离开原来站着的地方。“自己的地方”是指孔雀自己的六种处所。“自己的本处”是指比丘自己的本分,也就是所说的沙门身份。巴利
70. Aggahetvā hatthena leḍḍukhipanādipayogena moraṃ tāsetvā ṭhitaṭṭhānato apaneti. Attano ṭhānāti morassa attano chappakāraṭṭhānā. Sayaṃ ṭhānāti bhikkhu sakaṭṭhānā, samaṇabhāvatoti vuttaṃ hoti.
71-2 现在,为了说明“若使孔雀离处”所显示的离开处所,接着说了“所触空间”等。巴利
71-2. Idāni ‘‘ṭhānā cāveti ce mora’’nti dassitaṃ ṭhānācāvanaṃ vibhāvetumāha ‘‘phuṭṭhokāsa’’ntiādi.
73 当它被说成“在手中隐没”时,意思是它坐在伸开的手掌上。巴利
73.Kare nilīyatīti pasāritahatthatale nisīdati.
75 飞起后,是指升到空中之后。巴利
75.Uḍḍetvāti ākāsaṃ uppatitvā.
76 76.“肢体中隐没”:是指隐没在肩峰等身体部位里。“足”:是指自己最先抬起的那只脚。第二只脚也一样。巴利
76.Aṅgenilīnanti aṃsakūṭādisarīrāvayave nilīnaṃ. Pādeti attano paṭhamuddhārapāde. Dutiye pāde.
77 “足”是指两只脚。“尾羽”是指接触地面时的尾羽束。巴利
77.Pādānanti dvinnaṃ pādānaṃ. Kalāpassāti bhūmiyaṃ phusiyamānassa kalāpaggassa.
78 从“地”一词接着说明:这是指由三个身体部分接触的地面位置。不是指第一种情况,因为在那里只犯轻罪;不是指第二种情况,因为在那里犯重罪;而从第三种情况起,只要移动哪怕一根头发尖那么一点点,就犯波罗夷。这就是这段话的意思。巴利
78.Tato pathavitoti tīhi avayavehi patiṭṭhitapathavippadesato, na paṭhamato tattha dukkaṭattā, na dutiyato tattha thullaccayattā, tatiyā pana ṭhānā kesaggamattampi cāvayato pārājikanti vuttaṃ hoti.
把待在笼子里的孔雀连笼子一起拿走,犯波罗夷。如果那只孔雀不值什么钱,那就一切情况都按价值来判断。以盗心用脚把在界内走动的孔雀赶到界外,当它越过门限时,犯波罗夷。就像被绳子拴在栏里的牲畜,栏就是它所在的地方;同样,界内就是它所在的地方。但如果用手抓住它,即使是在界内让它腾空,也一样犯波罗夷。即使孔雀是在村里走动,只要让它越过村界,就犯波罗夷。不过,如果孔雀自己走了出去,在村边或界边走动时,盗者以盗心用棍棒或石块吓它,使它朝森林方向去,而孔雀飞起来后却躲在村里、界内或屋顶上,那就不犯。如果孔雀朝森林方向飞起或走去,而盗者并没有“把它赶进森林后再捉”的打算,那么当孔雀从地面飞起仅发尖那么高时,或者当它迈出第二步时,就犯波罗夷。为什么?因为对于正在离开村庄的人来说,他站立的地方就是他的处所。巴利
‘‘Pañjare ṭhitaṃ moraṃ saha pañjarena uddharati, pārājikaṃ. Yadi pana pādaṃ nagghati, sabbattha agghavasena kattabbaṃ. Antovatthumhi carantaṃ moraṃ theyyacitto padasā bahivatthuṃ nīharanto dvāraparicchedaṃ atikkāmeti, pārājikaṃ. Vaje ṭhitabalibaddassa hi vajo viya antovatthu tassa ṭhānaṃ. Hatthena pana gahetvā antovatthusmimpi ākāsagataṃ karontassa pārājikameva. Antogāme carantampi gāmaparicchedaṃ atikkāmentassa pārājikaṃ. Sayameva nikkhamitvā gāmūpacāre vā vatthūpacāre vā carantaṃ pana theyyacitto kaṭṭhena vā kathalāya vā utrāsetvā aṭavībhimukhaṃ karoti, moro uḍḍetvā antogāme vā antovatthumhi vā chadanapiṭṭhe vā nilīyati, rakkhati. Sace pana aṭavībhimukho uḍḍeti vā gacchati vā, ‘aṭaviṃ pavesetvā gahessāmī’ti parikappe asati pathavito kesaggamattampi uppatitamatte vā dutiyapadavāre vā pārājikaṃ. Kasmā? Yasmā gāmato nikkhamantassa ṭhitaṭṭhānameva ṭhānaṃ hotī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.96) –
这个判决属于义注,应当这样理解。对于他人所有的鸽子等鸟类,也应采用同样的判决标准。巴利
Aṭṭhakathāgato vinicchayo upalakkhitoti veditabbaṃ. Kapiñjarādiparasantakasakuṇesu ca eseva vinicchayo daṭṭhabbo.
79 钵在门口乞食的比丘手中。这时,他对那钵生起了盗心。巴利
79.Patteti dvāre bhikkhāya ṭhitaṃ bhikkhuno hatthagate patte. Tassa theyyacittassa.
80 没有用手把掉进钵里的金等物拿开,就叫做“未提起”;因为在第一步的阶段就已经犯土喇咤亚,所以这里不说“接近犯僧残”。巴利
80.Anuddharitvāvāti patte patitaṃ suvaṇṇādiṃ hatthena anukkhipitvāva paṭhamapadavāre thullaccayaṃ gammamānattā na vuttaṃ.
81 “手”是指手掌。“衣”是指袈裟。“头”是指头上。由于偈颂韵律的关系,“vā”这个词中的“ā”变成了短音。“安住”是指落下的东西。“那”是指正在被切断的那块金子等物。如果它是在空中飞行或落下时用手抓住的,那么抓住它的手所在的位置就是处所;只要从那里移开发尖那么一点点,就犯波罗夷。同样,抓住之后以盗心带走,在抬起第二只脚时就犯。即使落在衣服等上面,也是同样的规则。巴利
81.Hattheti hatthatale. Vattheti cīvare. Matthaketi sirasi. Gāthāchandavasena vā-sadde ākārassa rassattaṃ. Patiṭṭhitanti patitaṃ. Tanti chijjamānaṃ taṃ suvaṇṇakhaṇḍādi. Yadi ākāse gacchantaṃ, patantaṃ vā hatthena gaṇhāti. Gahitahatthe ṭhitaṭṭhānameva ṭhānaṃ, tato kesaggamattampi apanentassa pārājikaṃ. Tathā gahetvā theyyacittena gacchato dutiyapāduddhāre. Vatthādīsu patitepi eseva nayo.
82 “床座等”这里,“等”字涵盖像床座那样悬在空中的高台、天幕之类。“可触”是指可以用手或身体接触的衣物等。“不可触”是指同样不能那样触碰的金等物。“触者”是指用手等去触摸的人。由“恶作”这一说法,可以推知:摇动时犯土喇咤亚,从原处移开时犯波罗夷,具体按下文对地面处所所说的方式理解。至于处所的界限:如果是用床等整体抬起,就按四只脚来定;如果是只取床上所放之物,而涂灰硬布碰到床的四脚顶端、中间没有碰到而立着,就按四脚顶端来定;如果是碰到横木而立着,就按横木来定。应当这样理解。巴利
82.Mañcapīṭhādīsūti ettha ādi-saddena mañcapīṭhasadise vehāsabhūte aṭṭavitānādayo saṅgaṇhāti. Āmāsampīti hatthena vā kāyena vā āmasitabbaṃ vatthādiñca. Anāmāsampīti tathā aparāmasitabbaṃ suvaṇṇādiṃ. Āmasantassāti hatthādīhi parāmasantassa. ‘‘Dukkaṭa’’nti iminā phandāpane thullaccayañca ṭhānācāvane pārājikañca heṭṭhā thalaṭṭhe vuttanayena viññātuṃ sakkāti atidisati. Ṭhānaparicchedo pana mañcādīhi eva ukkhipantassa catunnaṃ pādānaṃ vasena, tatraṭṭhameva gaṇhantassa mañcassa catūsu pādasīsesu phusitvā majjhe aphusitvā ṭhitassa khalimakkhitathaddhasāṭakassa catunnaṃ pādasīsānaṃ vasena, aṭanīsu phusitvā ṭhitassa aṭanīnaṃ vasena vā veditabbo.
83 把衣挂在衣架上的时候,这里用“这些”来统指那些为了放衣而设置的树枝、木棍、竹片、绳子等东西。“这一侧”是指从自己站的方向看过去的那一边。“中间”是指把衣收拢、折向衣架中间所放的位置。“边缘”是指把衣折向一边,或者指两边的衣角。“放到另一边”是指放到衣架的另一侧。巴利
83.Vaṃseti cīvaravaṃse, iminā cīvaranikkhepanatthāya ṭhapitarukkhadaṇḍasalākārajjuādayo upalakkhitā. Oratoti attano ṭhitadisābhimukhato. Bhoganti saṃharitvā cīvaraṃ tassa nāmetvā ṭhapitamajjhaṭṭhānaṃ. Antanti nāmetvā ekato kataṃ, ubhayānaṃ vā antaṃ. Pārato katvāti vaṃsato parabhāge katvā.
84 84. 「被衣所触之处」,就是指衣料碰到的地方。「那件衣的」,是指那样放着的衣料。整条衣架并不因此就成为那个处所,这是这里要表达的意思。巴利
84.Cīvarena phuṭṭhokāsoti cīvarena phuṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ. Tassāti tathā ṭhapitassa cīvarassa. So sakalo cīvaravaṃso ṭhānaṃ na tu hotīti matoti sambandho.
85-6 “或者,被这一侧所碰到的那块地方”,这是句与句之间的连接关系。用盗心抓住衣服的中间部分往自己这边拉,以自己所站那一侧的衣架上被衣服碰到而停住的地方为界限,当另一侧越过这个界限时(即使只越过发尖那么一点点),就构成离本处,这是句子的连接。或者,以另一侧——也就是靠墙那一侧的衣架上衣服所碰到的地方——为界限,当这一侧越过那处被碰到的地方时(即使只越过发尖那么一点点),也构成离本处,这是句子的组合。其中“以另一侧”是指靠墙那一侧的衣架上衣服碰到而停住的那个衣服边缘。“被碰到的地方”是指衣架所在之处。“以这一侧”是指自己所站那一侧的衣架上衣服碰到而放置的那个衣服部分。“越过时”是指即使只越过发尖那么一点点。巴利
85-6. Orimantena phuṭṭhaṃ vā taṃ okāsanti sambandho. Cīvarabhogaṃ gahetvā theyyacittena attano abhimukhaṃ ākaḍḍhato attano ṭhitadisāya cīvaravaṃse cīvarena phusitvā ṭhitaṭṭhānapariyantaṃ itarena atikkāmayato cutīti sambandho. Itarena pārimantena bhittidisāya cīvarassa phuṭṭhokāsapariyantaṃ itarena phuṭṭhaṃ taṃ okāsaṃ orimantena atikkāmayato vā cutīti yojanā. Itarenāti pārimantena bhittipasse cīvaravaṃse phusitvā ṭhitacīvarapariyantena. Phuṭṭhaṃ cīvaravaṃsokāsaṃ. Orimantenāti attano ṭhitadisāya cīvaravaṃse phusitvā ṭhapitacīvarappadesena. Atikkāmayatoti kesaggamattampi atikkāmentassa.
像这样说明了纵向拉拽时出现的种种分别之后,现在为了说明横向越过的方式,所以说“以右侧”等。“又”就是“或者”的意思。“以右侧所触之处,以左侧越过时即离本处”,这是句子的连接。为了取衣而面向衣站着的人,在自己右侧被衣角所触的衣所停放之处,如果以左侧的衣边越过,就成波罗夷,这是此句的意思。“或以左侧所触之处,以另一侧越过时即离本处”,这是句子的连接。“以左侧所触之处”,指面向衣站着的人左侧被衣边所触的衣所停放之处;“以另一侧”就是以右侧的衣边越过时,离本处便成波罗夷,这是此句的意思。巴利
Evaṃ dīghantākaḍḍhane sambhavantaṃ vikappaṃ dassetvā idāni tiriyantena atikkamanavidhiṃ dassetumāha ‘‘dakkhiṇantenā’’tiādi. Punāti atha vā. Dakkhiṇantena phuṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ vāmantena atikkāmayato cutīti yojanā. Cīvaraṃ harituṃ cīvarābhimukhaṃ ṭhitassa attano dakkhiṇapasse cīvarakoṭiyā phuṭṭhaṃ cīvaraṭṭhitappadesaṃ vāmapasse cīvarantena atikkāmayato pārājikamevāti attho. Vāmantena phuṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ itarena atikkāmayato vā cutīti yojanā. Vāmantena phuṭṭhaṭṭhānanti cīvarābhimukhaṃ ṭhitassa vāmapasse cīvarantena phuṭṭhaṃ cīvaraṭṭhitappadesaṃ. Itarena dakkhiṇapasse cīvarantena atikkāmayato vā cuti pārājikā hotīti attho.
87 “从衣竿”是指衣碰到衣竿后停住的那个衣竿部位。有些书写本写作“发尖许”,这不能采用。因为“举起时”是依格单数词尾,与它同格,所以把它看成对格单数词尾是不合理的。某处见到“发尖许举起时”这样的读法,这个才是标准。巴利
87.Vaṃsatoti cīvarena phusitvā ṭhitacīvaravaṃsappadesato. ‘‘Kesaggamatta’’nti katthaci potthake likhanti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Ukkhitte’’ti bhummekavacanantena samānādhikaraṇattā paccattekavacanantatā na yujjatīti. ‘‘Kesaggamatte ukkhitte’’ti katthaci pāṭho dissati, so ca pamāṇaṃ.
88 88. “正在解开的人犯土喇咤亚”,这是句子的连接方式。如果想用盗心拿走系在衣竿上的衣服——不管那件衣服有没有碰到衣竿——只要去解开绑着它的绳子,就犯土喇咤亚,这就是这段话的意思。“已经解开”,是指刚刚解开的那一刻。因为衣服已经离开了原来的位置,所以犯波罗夷,这是这里的意旨。巴利
88. Vimocento thullaccayaṃ phuseti yojanā. Cīvaravaṃse phusāpetvā, aphusāpetvā vā rajjuyā bandhitvā ṭhapitacīvaraṃ gaṇhitukāmo theyyacittena bandhanaṃ mocento thullaccayaṃ āpajjatīti attho. Mutteti muttamatte. Pārājiko hoti ṭhānā cutabhāvatoti adhippāyo.
89 缠绕后在这里,从义理上可以得出“就在竹竿上”这个意思。比丘把衣缠绕在衣竿上,然后去解开放在那里的衣,也适用这条规则,这是前后关联。解开者,就是解缠的人。这条规则是指前面已经说过的规则:“正在解开时犯土喇咤亚,解开之后犯波罗夷。”或者“切断环的人,也适用这条规则”,这是关联。应当把“比丘的”“在竿上”“放置的”“衣”这些词带进来搭配理解。把衣环插入并放置在衣竿上,环一被切断即从原位脱落;这样,切断环的比丘在切断时犯土喇咤亚,切断后犯波罗夷,这是其含义。“解开者,也适用这条规则”:这里也应当把“环”和“比丘的”等词搭配起来。对于解开放置在衣竿上的衣环的人,土喇咤亚和波罗夷也跟前面所说的规则一样。巴利
89.Veṭhetvāti ettha ‘‘vaṃsamevā’’ti sāmatthiyato labbhati. Cīvaravaṃsaṃ paliveṭhetvā tattheva ṭhapitacīvaraṃ nibbeṭhentassa bhikkhunopi ayaṃ nayoti sambandho. Nibbeṭhentassāti viniveṭhentassa. Ayaṃ nayoti ‘‘nibbeṭhentassa thullaccayaṃ, nibbeṭhite pārājika’’nti yathāvuttanayamatidisati . Valayaṃ chindato vāpi ayaṃ nayoti sambandho. ‘‘Bhikkhuno, vaṃse, ṭhapitaṃ, cīvara’’nti ca ānetvā yojetabbaṃ. Cīvaravaṃse pavesetvā ṭhapitaṃ cīvaravalayaṃ yathā chinnamatte ṭhānā cavati, tathā chindantassa bhikkhuno chedane thullaccayaṃ, chinne pārājikanti attho. Mocentassāpyayaṃ nayoti etthāpi ‘‘valaya’’nti iminā saddhiṃ ‘‘bhikkhuno’’tiādipadāni yojetabbāni. Cīvaravaṃse ṭhapitaṃ cīvaraṃ valayaṃ mocentassāpi thullaccayapārājikāni pubbe vuttanayāneva.
在这里,第一个“也”字把前面所说的两种方式合在一起;第二个“也”字则因为除了合并未说的情况之外并没有别的意义差别,所以把未说的意义也合并进来。因此,它就涵盖了“使之成为空中的,或者取出”这两种方式。这样一来,就像把宝藏的链环放进树根处放好一样,对于把衣环在衣竿上到处都不触碰、使之成为空中的,或者从衣竿末端向外取出的情况,也应依照前面所说的方式理解土喇咤亚和波罗夷,这些都被涵盖在内。在“切断环的,或者解开的,或者使环成为空中的,或者取出的”这四种情形中,如果一样都不做,只是在衣竿上摩擦衣环,把它从这里移到那里,那么衣环所接触的整根衣竿都算是原处,应当理解为以“没有从原处移离”这一说法的反面来显示。巴利
Iha purimena api-saddena yathāvuttapakāradvaye sampiṇḍite itarena api-saddena avuttasampiṇḍanamantarena atthavisesābhāvato avuttamatthaṃ sampiṇḍeti, tena ‘‘ākāsagataṃ vā karoti, nīharati vā’’ti pakāradvayaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Tena rukkhamūle pavesetvā ṭhapitanidhisaṅkhalikavalayamiva cīvaravaṃse sabbaṭṭhānehipi aphusāpetvā cīvaravalayaṃ ākāsagataṃ karontassāpi cīvaravaṃsakoṭiyā bahi nīharantassāpi thullaccayapārājikāni vuttanayeneva ñātabbānīti eteyeva saṅgaṇhāti. ‘‘Valayaṃ chindato vāpi, mocentassa vāpi, valayaṃ ākāsagataṃ vā karoti, nīharati vā’’ti imesu catūsu vikappesu ekampi tathā akatvā cīvaravalayaṃ cīvaravaṃse ghaṃsetvā ito cito ca sañcārentassa cīvaravalayassa sabbopi cīvaravaṃso ṭhānanti ‘‘ṭhānācāvanaṃ natthī’’ti vuttabyatirekavasena dassitabbanti gahetabbaṃ.
90 对于“已放置的,确实”这一说法,这里要引入表示确认的“确实”一词,连接成“确实像衣服那样”;再引入表示区别意义的“然而”一词,连接成“然而对于已放置的”。或者,由于小品词有多种含义,可以把“确实”按其所处位置用于区别意义,把“然而”用于确认意义。应当这样连接来理解判别。这是连接的方式。对于展开后放在衣竿上的衣服的判别,就像对收叠后放在衣竿上的衣服的判别所说的那样,应依照“从此侧……中略……成为波罗夷”这三首偈颂所说的方法来理解,这就是其含义。巴利
90.Ṭhapitassa hīti ettha pasiddhisūcakaṃ hi-saddaṃ ānetvā ‘‘cīvare viya hī’’ti yojetvā visesatthajotakaṃ tu-saddaṃ ānetvā ‘‘ṭhapitassa tū’’ti yojetabbaṃ. Atha vā nipātānamanekatthattā yathāṭhāne ṭhitānameva visesatthe hi-saddo, pasiddhiyaṃ tu-saddo ca yojetabbo. Vinicchayo veditabboti yojanā. Dīghato vā tiriyato vā pasāretvā cīvaravaṃse nikkhittassa cīvarassa vinicchayo pana saṃharitvā cīvaravaṃse ṭhapitacīvaravinicchayo viya vutto, ‘‘orimantena…pe… pārājikaṃ bhave’’ti gāthāttaye vuttanayena veditabboti attho.
91 关于“网袋”:指悬挂物的支撑处。“任何物品”是关联词。“投入后”:就是放置后。“被附着”:就是被悬挂着。在“从网袋取走它,或掉落”这一选项中,应以接触网袋之处的处所为依据,了知为从原处移离。在第二选项中,如果有与网袋及绑缚处墙面相接触之处所,则应以彼为依据,了知为从原处移离。巴利
91.Sikkāyāti olambikādhāre. Yaṃ bhaṇḍakanti sambandho. Pakkhipitvāti nivesetvā. Laggitaṃ hotīti olambitaṃ hoti. ‘‘Sikkāto taṃ haranto vā cuto’’ti etasmiṃ vikappe sikkāya phuṭṭhaṭṭhānavasena ṭhānācāvanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Dutiyavikappe sikkāya, bandhanaṭṭhānassa ca bhittipasse phuṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ yadi siyā, tassa ca vasena ṭhānācāvanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
92-3 “矛等”中的“等”字,要包括叉戟等长柄物。所谓象牙桩,就是像板条或木桩那样,依次安在墙上的鹿角或尖桩。在顶端,是指在矛尖或板端。在根部,是指在矛齿的根部。正拉拽时,是指直着往外拉的时候。巴利
92-3.Kuntādīti ādi-saddena bhindivālādi dīghavatthu gahetabbaṃ. Taṭṭikākhāṇukā viya bhittiyaṃ paṭipāṭiyā nivesitāni migasiṅgāni vā sūlāni vā nāgadantā nāma. Agge vāti kuntaphalakoṭiyaṃ vā. Bunde vāti kuntadantamūle vā. Parikaḍḍhatoti ujukaṃ ākaḍḍhato.
“碰触之处”:当他在一根根象牙桩上移动时,只要越过了曾被碰触的位置,哪怕只差一根发尖那么一点,就算失败——这是前后关联。意思是说,抛开已经放好或还没放好的位置不谈,只要越过哪怕一根发尖那么一点,就是波罗夷。应当理解为:以一根发尖作为间隔、作为原因而构成失败;也就是说,哪怕只是移开一根发尖那么一点,也成为波罗夷。巴利
Phuṭṭhokāsanti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ nāgadante phuṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ atikkāmayato kesaggamattena parājayo siyāti sambandho, ṭhapitaṭṭhapitaṭṭhānaṃ vihāya kesaggamattampi atikkāmayato pārājikanti attho. Kesaggena antarena hetunā parājayoti gahetabbaṃ, kesaggamattampi apanayanahetu pārājikaṃ hotīti attho.
94-5 像这样,在纵向拖曳和举起的情况中说明了判定之后,为了说明横向拖曳以及向另一方牵引的判定,而说“面向围墙”等。“拖曳”:就是朝自己站立的方位拉过来。“此岸触及处”:就是被此岸触及的地方,意思是用矛杆触及自己这一方的地方。在这里,涉及超越的行为时,本来可能用属格,却用了业格。有些人说:“因为在及物动词的用法中,摩揭陀语习惯显示业格,所以业格只用于表示业义”,这和迦旃延的语法规则是一致的。“他方超越”:从他方所作的超越,这是省略中间词的复合词,意为应由彼岸方所作之超越已作。“以发尖越过”是文句的连接。义理如前所说。巴利
94-5. Evaṃ dīghato ākaḍḍhane, ukkhipane ca vinicchayaṃ dassetvā tiriyaṃ ākaḍḍhane, parato nayane ca vinicchayaṃ dassetumāha ‘‘pākārābhimukho’’tiādi. Ākaḍḍhatīti attano ṭhitaṭṭhānābhimukhaṃ āviñchati. Orimantaphuṭṭhokāsanti orimantena phuṭṭhokāsaṃ, attano disāya kuntadaṇḍena phuṭṭhokāsanti attho. Ettha accayanakiriyāsambandhe sāmivacanappasaṅge upayogavacanaṃ. ‘‘Sakammakadhātuppayoge upayogavacanassa māgadhikavohāre dassanato kammattheyeva upayogavacana’’nti eke vadanti, etaṃ kaccāyanalakkhaṇena samānaṃ. Itarantaccayeti itarantena kato accayoti itarantaccayo, majjhepadalopasamāso, pārimantena kattabbātikkame kateti attho. Kesaggena cutoti yojanā. Yathāvuttoyeva attho.
把“推到旁边挤压”:就是把他弄到另一边去挤压,也就是朝着墙壁的方向压挤。意思是:把他弄到另一边,朝着墙壁那边压挤。“同样”这里:也是用“从发尖脱落”来牵引说明。应当这样连接理解:即使矛等东西已经放在那里,这个判定规则也照样适用。意思是,应当用“从发尖”等这一判定规则来说明。巴利
Parato pellantassāti parato katvā pellantassa, bhittipassābhimukhaṃ katvā nippīḷentassāti attho. Tathevāti ‘‘kesaggena cuto’’ti ākaḍḍhati. Ṭhapitepi ca kuntādimhi ayaṃ nayoti yojanā. ‘‘Kesaggenā’’tiādinā ayameva vinicchayanayo vattabboti attho.
96 比丘摇动棕榈树的果实时,如果某个果实让所取之物凑满五摩沙迦的价值,那么当那个果实从系缚中脱落时,他就犯波罗夷。应当这样连接理解。巴利
96. Tālassa phalaṃ cālentassa assa bhikkhuno yena phalena vatthu pañcamāsakaṃ pūrati, tasmiṃ phale bandhanā mutte pārājikaṃ bhaveti yojanā.
97 砍断棕榈果串,就是砍断棕榈果的果柄。用哪个东西来算价值满五摩沙迦,那个东西刚被砍断时,就应对他犯波罗夷——前面说过的方式在这里也照样套用。如果棕榈果串悬在空中,果串的根部所在就是它的位置。如果它倚靠在叶柄或叶子上而站立,那就把果串根部和它所倚靠的位置一起拿来,弄清楚位置的差别之后,从它离开原来位置这一点来看,也可以判为波罗夷。同样的道理:用哪个东西来算价值满五摩沙迦,当那个东西从绑缚中解脱时,就应对他犯波罗夷——这就是前面所说的方式。在所有这些情形里,从违犯波罗夷的角度看,在它之前紧接着的加行阶段是土喇咤亚,同时进行的加行阶段在波逸提的位次上是恶作,在那之前的加行阶段在波逸提的位次上既是波逸提也是恶作;在行走、第二次寻找等其余的加行阶段里,因为属于不与取的前行,所以是恶作。不迷惑的人应当这样理解。巴利
97.Tālassapiṇḍiṃ chindatīti tālaphalakaṇṇikaṃ chindati. Yāya vatthu pūrati, tassā chinnamattāya ‘‘assa pārājikaṃ siyā’’ti heṭṭhā vuttanayo idhāpi yojetabbo. Tālapiṇḍi sace ākāsagatā hoti, piṇḍimūlameva ṭhānaṃ. Paṇṇadaṇḍe vā paṇṇe vā apassāya ṭhitā ce, ṭhitaṭṭhānehi saha piṇḍimūlaṃ gahetvā ṭhānabhedaṃ ñatvā ṭhānācāvanena pārājikampi daṭṭhabbaṃ. Eseva nayoti ‘‘yena vatthu pūrati, tasmiṃ bandhanā mutte assa pārājikaṃ siyā’’ti yathāvutto eva nayo. Etesu sabbesu ṭhānesu pārājikavītikkamato pubbabhāgānantarappayoge thullaccayañca sahapayoge pācittiyaṭṭhāne dukkaṭañca tatopi pubbapayoge pācittiyaṭṭhāne pācittiyañca dukkaṭañca gamanadutiyapariyesanādiavasesapayogesu adinnādānapubbakattā dukkaṭañca asammuyhantehi veditabbaṃ.
98 应当这样连接:前往水中藏宝的地方。在浅水中前往藏宝处,如果一步一步地走,每迈一步之前有所动作,就构成恶作,应当这样理解。但在深水中也是如此,这里指出前面所说的“一步一步走着去的人犯恶作”。“前往”就是渡水;对于不摆手渡水的人,按步数计算;对于用手努力划水的人,这里用“一步一步”作为标示,应当知道按手划次数计算、按步数计算都构成恶作。因此注疏中说:“在深水中,用手或脚有所动作的人,每一次手划或步划的动作都构成恶作。”巴利
98. Udake nidhiṭṭhānaṃ gacchatoti sambandho. Agambhīrodake nidhiṭṭhānaṃ padavārena gacchato pade pade pubbapayoge dukkaṭaṃ hotīti yojanā. Gambhīre pana tathāti ‘‘padavārena gacchato dukkaṭa’’nti yathāvuttamatidisati. Gacchatoti tarato, hatthaṃ acāletvā tarantassa padavāragaṇanāya, hatthena ca vāyamantassa ‘‘padavārenā’’ti idaṃ upalakkhaṇanti katvā hatthavāragaṇanāya padavāragaṇanāya dukkaṭāni veditabbāni. Tena vuttaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘gambhīre hatthehi vā pādehi vā payogaṃ karontassa hatthavārehi vā padavārehi vā payoge payoge dukkaṭa’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.98).
在“浮出等”这里,用“等”这个字把“沉入”也包括进去了。在这里也一样,因为顺着前面“如是”的说法,所以应当知道这个意思:每一次动作都是恶作。为了拿取沉放在水里的瓶子,在沉入和浮出的过程中,无论是用手划、用脚划,还是手和脚一起划,都只是恶作。因此注疏里说:“这个规则,也适用于为了拿瓶子而沉入、浮出的情况。”巴利
Ummujjanādisūti ettha ādi-saddena nimujjanaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Etthāpi ‘‘tathā’’ti anuvattamānattā payoge payoge dukkaṭanti ayamattho veditabbo. Nihitakumbhiyā gahaṇatthaṃ nimujjanummujjanesupi hatthavārena, padavārena, hatthapadavārehi ca dukkaṭamevāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tenāha aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘eseva nayo kumbhigahaṇatthaṃ nimujjanummujjanesū’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.98).
对于这首偈颂,由于有“前往藏宝处者犯恶作”这句话,反过来可以知道:像那样前往的人,如果因为看见水蛇、鳄鱼或恶鱼而害怕逃走,那么他这种行走并不具备那个目的,所以不犯戒。在这里应当知道:在第二次寻找等一切行为中,属于波逸提的场合,有波逸提以及与波逸提一起的恶作;在其余行为中,只有纯粹的恶作;在同时进行的动作中,触碰容器或就座,有不可触之恶作;摇动时,有土喇咤亚;从原处移动时,有波罗夷。这些可以按照“藏宝瓮”一节所说的方式来了知,所以这里没有再另外说明。其中,处所的差别有五种;而这里因为能够压进去,所以连同下方共有六种,这就是它们之间的差别。巴利
Imissā gāthāya ‘‘nidhiṭṭhānaṃ gacchato dukkaṭa’’nti vacanato tathā gacchantassa udakasappacaṇḍamacchadassanena bhāyitvā palāyantassa gamanassa atadatthattā anāpattīti byatirekena viññāyati. Ettha dutiyapariyesanādisabbapayogesu pācittiyaṭṭhāne pācittiyañca pācittiyena saha dukkaṭañca avasesapayogesu suddhadukkaṭañca sahapayoge bhājanāmasane anāmāsadukkaṭañca phandāpane thullaccayañca ṭhānācāvane pārājikañca nidhikumbhiyā vuttanayena viññātuṃ sakkāti na vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tattha ṭhānabhedo pañcadhā hoti, idha pīḷetvā osāretuṃ sakkuṇeyyattā adhodisāya saha chabbidhaṃ hotīti ayametesaṃ viseso.
99 在这里,“于生长之花”是指在水中生长的睡莲等花;“于”是表示区分的地格。“以何花”是指应当区分出来的那朵花。“切断”在这里不能按现在时来理解,而应按已发生的情形理解为“已切断者”。如果不这样理解,那么直到最后一种作法结束为止,都会与“土喇咤乃至波罗夷”的说法在事理上相冲突;而且,为了说明即使在这最后一朵花被切断时,只要花茎旁仅剩一层皮还没断,就不构成波罗夷——因为这与紧接着下文所说的“一茎……乃至……守护”的方式相冲突;同时,为了说明这一判定,也因为与注释中所写的“哪朵花条件满足,仅在切断它时即成波罗夷”这句话相冲突,所以不能取现在时,而只应取已发生的情形。就像“提婆达多什么时候来的?”这个问题,和“我正来,来时别射我”这个回答一样,是以现在时来指涉已发生之事,也就是从已发生的角度,用现在时来说。应当这样理解。巴利
99.Tattha jātakapupphesūti tasmiṃ jale ruḷhesu uppalādikusumesu, niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ. Yena pupphenāti niddhāritabbaṃ. Chindatoti ettha vattamānakālavasena atthaṃ aggahetvā ‘‘chinnavato’’ti bhūtavasena attho gahetabbo. Evaṃ aggahite antimassa payogassa yāva anuparamo, thullaccayārahattā pārājikavacanassa vatthuvirodhitāya ca imasseva pacchimakusumassa kantanakāle pupphanāḷapasse tacamattepi acchinne pārājikaṃ natthīti dassetuṃ ‘‘ekanāḷa…pe… parirakkhatī’’ti ettheva anantare vuccamānanayassa viruddhattā ca imaṃ vinicchayaṃ dassetuṃ likhitassa ‘‘yasmiṃ pupphe vatthu pūrati, tasmiṃ chinnamatte pārājika’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.98) aṭṭhakathāvacanassa viruddhattā ca vattamānakālamagahetvā bhūtakālasseva gahetabbattā ‘‘kadā devadatta āgatosī’’ti pañhassa ‘‘esohamāgacchāmi, āgacchantaṃ mā maṃ vijjhā’’ti uttare viya vattamānasamīpe vattamānevāti bhūte vattamānabyapadesato vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
100 “睡莲种”这个说法,因为是与“莲花种”相对比而说的,所以应当知道,它已经包含了义注中“莲花种的花茎被切断时,里面的丝线即使没断,也能起到保护作用”这一理趣。至于“一茎之侧”,本来应当说“茎的一侧”,这是为了诗句格律顺口才这样说的。“彼处”就是指从茎那里。巴利
100.‘‘Uppalajātiyā’’ti iminā ‘‘padumajātiyā’’ti byatirekato vuttattā ‘‘padumajātikānaṃ pana daṇḍe chinne abbhantare suttaṃ acchinnampi rakkhatī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.98) aṭṭhakathānayo saṅgahitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ekanāḷassa vā passeti ‘‘nāḷassa ekapasse’’ti vattabbe gāthābandhasukhatthaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Tatoti nāḷato.
101 101. 因为关于系在花上的判定接下来就要说到,所以“切断后放着”应当按未系之花来理解。“依前所说之理”是指按照在那里所生的花中已说过的判定。“不是用那朵花来填满,只在其被切断时”,而是说在取时即成波罗夷,这里就是其关联,也是此处不同之处。巴利
101. Bhārabaddhakusumesu vinicchayassa vakkhamānattā chinditvā ṭhapitesūti abaddhakusumavasena gahetabbaṃ. Pubbe vuttanayenāti tatrajātakakusumesu vuttavinicchayānusārena. ‘‘Yena pupphena pūrati, tasmiṃ chinnamatte’’ti avatvā gahitamatte pārājikanti yojanā cettha viseso.
102 把花做成花环并系起来,就叫“系于花环的”。所谓“花”,是指价值一巴陀的睡莲等花朵。所谓“在六方”,是因为能把花沉入水中,所以连同下方和四个方向以及上方,在这六个方向中取出,这是就处所而说的区分。所谓“以某种方式”,是为了说明应当怎样取出。仅仅因为从原处移动就已构成犯戒,所以用工具格来表达工具的意义。所谓“败坏”,是说价值一巴陀的睡莲等花,因为从原处移动而犯了波罗夷之后,已经毁坏了作为世间和出世间一切功德基础的巴帝摩卡防护戒,自己便因功德之死而死去,这就是它的意思。巴利
102. Bhāraṃ katvā baddhāni bhārabaddhānīti majjhapadalopīsamāso. Pupphānīti pādagghanakāni uppalādikusumāni. Chasvākāresūti udake osīdāpetuṃ sakkuṇeyyattā adhodisāya saha catasso disā, uddhanti imāsu chasu disāsu, niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ. Kenaci ākārenāti niddhāretabbadassanaṃ. Ṭhānācāvanassa sādhakatamattā karaṇeyeva karaṇavacanaṃ. Nassatīti pādagghanakapupphānaṃ ṭhānācāvanena pārājikamāpajjitvā lokiyalokuttarānaṃ anavasesaguṇānaṃ patiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlaṃ nāsetvā sayaṃ guṇamaraṇena mīyatīti attho.
103 “花束”是指价值一巴陀的睡莲等花朵扎成的一束。“搅动水”是指像让波浪涌起那样搅动。“花处”是指花所停留的地方。“移开”是指把花束移走,哪怕只移开发尖那么一点点。在某些经本中可以看到“使花从处移开”这种读法。但因为这里取的是花束本身,所以应该采用前面那种读法。巴利
103.Pupphānaṃ kalāpanti pādagghanakauppalādikusumakalāpaṃ. Udakaṃ cāletvāti yathā vīci uṭṭhāti, tathā cāletvā. Pupphaṭṭhānāti pupphānaṃ ṭhitaṭṭhānā. Cāvetīti kalāpaṃ kesaggamattampi apaneti. ‘‘Pupphaṃ ṭhānā cāvetī’’ti katthaci potthakesu pāṭho dissati. Pupphakalāpasseva gahitattā purimoyeva gahetabbo.
104 在这里,“去到此处者,我将取”,应当与后面的文句连起来理解。“思量”,就是划定“我将取去到此处者”的处所,然后加以推度。“守护”,即使花被移动离开了原位,这种思量仍然守护那位比丘,使他不会犯波罗夷罪。“去到之处”,是复合词,拆解为:以花束去到、到达,以及那个处所。“拔起者”,要用这个词把“花束”带进来连接。也有读本写作“作处”,连接起来就是:拔起已作花之处所者。搅动水,使波浪生起,以波浪的冲击,从水面到达所思量的处所的花束,从它停住的地方拔起,即使只有发尖那么一点,也从原位移开,就是这个意思。“从处所”这个词,应当与“堕落”连接。所谓“堕落者”,就是从自己受持守护的、名为巴帝摩卡防护戒的一切功德宝芽所生起之处掉落下来,这就叫做堕落者。巴利
104.‘‘Ettha gataṃ gahessāmī’’ti saha pāṭhasesena yojanā. Parikappetīti ‘‘ettha gataṃ gahessāmī’’ti ṭhānaṃ paricchinditvā takketi. Rakkhatīti ṭhānācāvanepi sati so parikappo pārājikāpattito taṃ bhikkhuṃ rakkhati. Gataṭṭhānāti pupphakalāpena gataṃ sampattañca taṃ ṭhānañcāti viggaho. ‘‘Uddharanto’’ti etena ‘‘pupphānaṃ kalāpa’’nti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. ‘‘Kataṭṭhānā’’tipi pāṭho, katā pupphānaṃ ṭhānā uddharantoti sambandho. Udakaṃ cāletvā vīciyo uṭṭhāpetvā vīcippahārena udakapiṭṭhena parikappitaṭṭhānaṃ sampattaṃ pupphakalāpaṃ ṭhitaṭṭhānā uddharanto kesaggamattampi ṭhānā cāventoti attho. ‘‘Ṭhānā’’ti idaṃ ‘‘bhaṭṭho’’ti iminā sambandhanīyaṃ. Bhaṭṭho nāma pavuccatīti attanā samādāya rakkhiyamānā pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlasaṅkhātasabbaguṇaratanaṅkurābhinibbattaṭṭhānā patito nāma hotīti pavuccati.
105 从水中高高长出的,这里按语义可以理解为“花的”。从水面高高长出的花,它所在的整片水域就是“处所”;也就是说,从泥面开始一直到水面边缘,被花茎占满而停住的所有水,这就叫作处所。拔起,就是拉住花的上端把它拔出来。从那里,就是从那个作为花所在处的整片水聚。令直,就是把它弄直。拔起者,就是正在拔起的人。巴利
105.Jalato accuggatassāti ettha ‘‘pupphassā’’ti sāmatthiyā labbhati. Jalapiṭṭhito accuggatassa pupphassa sakalajalaṃ ṭhānaṃ, kaddamapiṭṭhito paṭṭhāya udakapiṭṭhipariyantaṃ pupphadaṇḍena pharitvā ṭhitaṃ sabbamudakaṃ ṭhānanti vuttaṃ hoti. Uppāṭetvāti pupphaggaṃ ākaḍḍhitvā uppīḷetvā. Tatoti tasmā pupphaṭṭhānabhūtasakalajalarāsito. Ujunti ujuṃ katvā. Uddharatoti uppāṭentassa.
106 “茎端”是指被拔起的花茎根部的最底端。“从水”是指从水面。“使之离开发梢那么一点点远”,剩下的句子应当这样连接来理解。在第一句和第三句里“从水”这个词说了两次,虽然意思没有差别,但这是运用词语重复的修辞手法、以半重复的方式来说的,所以应当知道并不算重复啰嗦的过失。“刚脱离”要和“未脱离”连起来理解,或者应当知道这两处所说的意思是各有侧重的。“在彼茎端”是连接语。巴利
106.Nāḷanteti uppāṭitapupphanāḷassa mūlakoṭiyā. Jalatoti udakapiṭṭhito. Muttamatte kesaggamattaṃ dūraṃ katvāti pāṭhasesayojanā kātabbā. ‘‘Jalato’’ti paṭhamatatiyapādesu dvikkhattuṃ vacanaṃ atthāvisesepi padāvuttialaṅkāre aḍḍhayamakavasena vuttattā punaruttidoso na hotīti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Muttamatte, amutte’’ti ca sambandhitabbaṃ, atthānaṃ vā visesato ubhayattha vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Tasmiṃ nāḷanteti sambandho.
107 对于已经弯折后拔起的情况,连同茎一起拔起的,判断标准也是这样。不过在这里应当知道,一切花、叶、茎从根部开始,以从最初所站的位置移开的方式,就叫做从原处移动。应当知道,这样拔起花等东西的人,在犯破坏草木罪的同时,就伴有恶作。巴利
107.Tassa nāmetvā uppāṭitassa. Saha gacchena uppāṭitassāpi ayameva vinicchayo. Idha pana sabbapupphapaṇṇanāḷāni mūlato pabhuti paṭhamaṃ ṭhitaṭṭhānato apanāmanavasena ṭhānācāvanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Evaṃ pupphādīni uppāṭentassa bhūtagāmavikopanāpattiyā ṭhāne sahapayogadukkaṭaṃ hotīti veditabbaṃ.
108-9 因为提到了钓钩等捕鱼工具,而且下文将要讨论对水中死鱼的判定,所以这里的“鱼”指的是捕捉活鱼。或者,以“或”字作为标示,或者作为总摄未说之义的词,应当知道已经包含了投掷器等杀鱼的工具。“足”就是价值一巴陀的(盗取标的物)。在那一只鱼上。“拔起的”就是已被拔起、已被举起的鱼,就在那一只上。“从水”是说从水中哪怕只移开一个发尖的量而举起,就是这个意思。巴利
108-9. Baḷisādimacchaggahaṇopakaraṇānaṃ vacanato, jale ṭhitamatamacchānaṃ vinicchayassa ca vakkhamānattā maccheti jīvamānakamacchānaṃ gahaṇaṃ. Upalakkhaṇavasena vā avuttasamuccayattha vā-saddena vā khipakādīni macchavadhopakaraṇāni vuttānevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Vatthūti pādo. Tasmiṃ macche. Uddhaṭoyeva uddhaṭamatto, maccho, tasmiṃ. Jalāti udakato kesaggamattampi apanetvā ukkhittamatteti vuttaṃ hoti.
110 110. 为何不像对待花那样,仅取鱼的停留之处为处所,而是把整个水域当作处所来说呢?所以接着说道:“水生者的处所,确实”等等。“在水中生”,就是水生者;按照这里的文脉,指的就是鱼。通过义理、上下文、词句的邻近关系等,词语可以表达出不同的含义。“确实”表示这是众所周知的事实。“唯”表示限定,也就是说,只是水本身。这样一来,就把外面的水排除在外了。因为整个水域就是它的处所,所以使住水中者脱离水者犯波罗夷,应当知道这是按因果关系来理解句义。击败已犯者故为波罗夷,此罪属彼故彼为波罗夷人。巴利
110. Pupphānaṃ viya macchānampi ṭhitaṭṭhānameva ṭhānanti aggahetvā sakalajalaṃ ṭhānaṃ katvā kasmā vuttanti āha ‘‘ṭhānaṃ salilajānaṃ hī’’tiādi. Salile jātā salilajā, iti pakaraṇato macchāyeva vuccanti. Atthappakaraṇasaddantarasannidhānādīhi saddā visesatthaṃ vadantīti. Hīti pasiddhiyaṃ. Kevalanti avadhāraṇe, jalamevāti vuttaṃ hoti. Iminā bahiudakaṃ nivattitaṃ hoti. Sakalaṃ jalameva ṭhānaṃ yasmā, tasmā salilaṭṭhaṃ jalā vimocento pārājiko hotīti hetuhetumantabhāvena yojanā veditabbā. Āpannaṃ parājetīti pārājikā, āpatti, sā etassa atthīti pārājiko, puggalo.
111 水即是水。对于“生于水中者”这个词,依上下文只取鱼的意思。同样应当知道,这里也包含了跳到空中的鱼,以及为了觅食而爬上陆地的龟等。判定是否犯戒时,应按照空中、陆地注疏里所说的方法来理解。“以物价判定”,意思是根据所盗物品的价值,来说恶作、重罪、波罗夷等罪的成立。巴利
111.Nīraṃ udakaṃ. Vārimhi jale jāto vārijo, iti pakaraṇato macchova gayhati. Eteneva ākāse uppatitamaccho , gocaratthāya ca thalamuggatakummādayo upalakkhitāti veditabbaṃ. Tesaṃ gahaṇe vinicchayo ākāsaṭṭhathalaṭṭhakathāya vuttanayena veditabbo. Bhaṇḍagghena viniddiseti dukkaṭādivatthuno bhaṇḍassa agghavasena dukkaṭathullaccayapārājikāpattiyo vadeyyāti attho.
112 “塔拉凯帝”,就是在水池里;用这个说法,也把池塘、莲池、水井等有水的地方都包括进来了。“那帝亚帝”,就是向下流的水;用这个说法,也把山谷等地方都包括进来了。“尼内帝”,就是在坑里。“玛差维桑那玛帝”这里的“那玛”是名称的意思。应当知道,所谓“名为鱼毒”的东西,是指醉鱼果这一类。“咖帝帝”,是指投了毒、去杀鱼的人已经离开的时候。巴利
112.Taḷāketi sarasmiṃ, iminā ca vāpipokkharaṇisobbhādijalāsayā saṅgayhanti. Nadiyāti ninnagāya, iminā ca kandarādayo saṅgayhanti. Ninneti āvāṭe. Macchavisaṃ nāmāti ettha nāma-saddo saññāyaṃ. Macchavisanāmakaṃ madanaphalādikaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Gateti visapakkhipake macchaghātake gate.
114 鱼主们:指投了毒之后离开的鱼主。带来:指让人带来。应给的物品:拆开来看,就是“物品”和“应给”,意思是应该把自己拿的东西,或者价值相当的东西,作为物品交出去。巴利
114.Sāmikesūti visaṃ yojetvā gatesu macchasāmikesu. Āharantesūti āharāpentesu. Bhaṇḍadeyyanti bhaṇḍañca taṃ deyyañcāti viggaho, attanā gahitavatthuṃ vā tadagghanakaṃ vā bhaṇḍaṃ dātabbanti attho.
115 “玛车帝”就是死鱼。“谢萨帝”就是还没死的鱼。巴利
115.Maccheti matamacche. Seseti namatamacche.
116 116.「在未死的(鱼)被拿取时」这一说法,从上下文可以推知;这里的格是处格,表示对象。他们说「不犯戒」,意思是:对不与取这条罪说为不犯戒,但对杀生罪则确实构成波逸提。而这个判定应当理解为适用于无守护、无看守、无主的水池等地方。巴利
116.Amatesu gahitesūti pakaraṇato labbhati, nimittatthe cetaṃ bhummaṃ. Anāpattiṃ vadantīti adinnādānāpattiyā anāpattiṃ vadanti, māraṇappattiyā pācittiyaṃ hoteva. Ayañca vinicchayo arakkhitaagopitesu assāmikataḷākādīsu veditabbo.
117 这里“船”的意思,依据“所谓船,就是用来渡水的东西”这一说法,应当知道:凡是能用来渡水的,哪怕只是能载一个人的染衣桶、竹筏之类,也都包括在内。“船上物”,是指任何系属于根门的或不属于根门的货物。“以盗取”这句话,表达的是“以盗心”这个意思。“举足时”,是指为了第二次寻求等目的而行走的人,每走一步。“罪”,指恶作罪。“所说”,是指世尊在分别句中所说的:“以盗心想要取船上物,而作第二次寻求或前往,犯恶作罪。”应当知道,这里以标示的方式说明了前方便和俱方便的恶作、动摇时的土喇咤亚、离处时的波罗夷。巴利
117.Nāvanti ettha ‘‘nāvā nāma yāya taratī’’ti (pārā. 99) vacanato jalatāraṇārahaṃ antamaso ekampi vahantaṃ rajanadoṇiveṇukalāpādikaṃ veditabbaṃ. Nāvaṭṭhaṃ nāma bhaṇḍaṃ yaṃ kiñci indriyabaddhaṃ vā anindriyabaddhaṃ vā. ‘‘Thenetvā gaṇhissāmī’’ti iminā ‘‘theyyacittassā’’ti imamatthaṃ viññāpeti. Pāduddhāreti dutiyapariyesanādiatthaṃ gacchantassa pade pade. Dosāti dukkaṭāpattiyo. Vuttāti ‘‘nāvaṭṭhaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ avaharissāmī’ti theyyacitto dutiyaṃ vā pariyesati gacchati vā, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pārā. 99) padabhājaniyaṃ bhagavatā vuttā, iminā pubbapayogasahapayogadukkaṭāni, phandāpane thullaccayaṃ, ṭhānācāvane pārājikañca upalakkhaṇavasena dassitanti veditabbaṃ.
118 “激流”是指以迅猛之势流动的水流。用“激流”这个词,是在暗示:没有系缚时它自然是不住的。因此应当知道,这是为“只有系缚才是住处”这一对住处的限定说明理由。因为被系缚在激流中,所以说“只有系缚这一处才是住处”。“于彼”就是指在系缚上。“智者”是指持律者。巴利
118.Caṇḍasoteti vegena gacchante udakappavāhe, ‘‘caṇḍasote’’ti iminā bandhanaṃ vinā sabhāvena aṭṭhitabhāvassa sūcanato ‘‘bandhanameva ṭhāna’’nti vuttaṭṭhānaparicchedassa kāraṇaṃ dassitanti veditabbaṃ. Yasmā caṇḍasote baddhā, tasmā bandhanamekameva ṭhānaṃ matanti vuttaṃ hoti. Tasminti bandhane. Dhīrā vinayadharā.
119-120 119-120. “在静止的水中,船没有系缚而停住”,用这句话说明:六种住处限定能够成立的理由。接着是“拖拉船的人,对他而言是波罗夷”,这是前后关联。又问“又在做什么”,于是说“以一端触碰”等等。接着是“让那艘船越过”,这是关联。这里也应该依已然之义,把意思连接成“已拖拉者、已令越过者”。这里应当说的内容,和下文所说的方法一样。巴利
119-120.‘‘Niccale udake nāva-mabandhanamavaṭṭhita’’nti iminā chadhā ṭhānaparicchedassa labbhamānatte kāraṇaṃ dasseti. Nāvaṃ kaḍḍhato tassa pārājikanti sambandho. Punapi kiṃ karontoti āha ‘‘ekenantena samphuṭṭha’’ntiādi. Taṃ nāvaṃ atikkāmayatoti sambandho. Etthāpi ‘‘kaḍḍhitavato atikkamitavato’’ti bhūtavasena attho yojetabbo. Yamettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva.
121 121. 这样显示了四面拖拽的判定之后,现在为了显示向上提起和向下沉没的判定,而说“如是”等。“如是”是指“他的波罗夷”,即拖拽。“在什么时候”,因此说“向上乃至发端之量”等。“船底之下”:船底的下面就是船底之下,在那里向上乃至发端之量脱离水面,这是关联。“被那所触的乃至发端之量从口缘脱离”,这是连接。“以那”应当理解为:以被船底之下所触的水,使乃至发端之量从口缘脱离。巴利
121. Evaṃ catupassākaḍḍhane vinicchayaṃ dassetvā idāni uddhaṃ, adho ca ukkhipanaosīdāpanesu vinicchayaṃ dassetumāha ‘‘tathā’’tiādi. Tathāti ‘‘tassa pārājika’’nti ākaḍḍhati. Kasmiṃ kāleti āha ‘‘uddhaṃ kesaggamattampī’’tiādi. Adhonāvātalanti nāvātalassa adho adhonāvātalaṃ, tasmiṃ uddhaṃ kesaggamattampi udakamhā vimociteti iminā sambandho. Tena phuṭṭhaṃ kesaggamattampi mukhavaṭṭiyā vimociteti yojanā. Tenāti adhonāvātalena phuṭṭhe udake mukhavaṭṭiyā karaṇabhūtāya kesaggamattampi vimociteti gahetabbaṃ.
122 不过,如果是把船系在岸边、停放在不动的水流中,那么这艘船的“住处”就分成两种:系缚的地方和停靠的位置。巴利
122. Tīre bandhitvā pana niccale jale ṭhapitā yā nāvā, tassā nāvāya ṭhānaṃ bandhanañca ṭhitokāso cāti dvidhā matanti yojanā.
123 先于解开系缚时,犯土喇咤亚——这是句子的连接方式。“以某种方法”,意思是在“或从前面、或从后面”等如上所说的六种方法中,用任何一种方法。“令其离开住处”指的是船。巴利
123.Pubbaṃ paṭhamaṃ bandhanassa vimocane thullaccayaṃ hotīti yojanā. Kenacupāyenāti ‘‘purato pacchato vāpī’’tiādikkamena yathāvuttopāyachakkesu yena kenaci upāyenāti attho. Ṭhānā cāveti nāvaṃ.
124 先把船从原来停的地方移开,就是用前面说的“或从船头、或从船尾”等六种方式中的任何一种,把船从它停住的位置移走。“这也就是同样的道理”意思是:先把船从最初停住的地方移开,犯土喇咤亚;之后再解开系缚,犯波罗夷——应当这样理解。这里还引了义注中的判定:“船系在岸边、停在不动的水中时,系缚处和停船处这两个都算‘住处’。如果先解开系缚,犯土喇咤亚;之后再用六种方式中的任何一种把船从住处移开,犯波罗夷。如果先把船从住处移开,之后再解开系缚,也是同样的道理。”至于触摸和摇动船时所犯的恶作与土喇咤亚,按照前面陶瓶譬喻里已说过的道理就能明白,所以这里没有另外说明,应当知道。下面也是如此。巴利
124.Paṭhamaṃ ṭhānā cāvetvāti ‘‘purato pacchato vā’’tiādinā yathāvuttesu chasu ākāresu aññatarena ākārena nāvaṃ ṭhapitaṭṭhānato paṭhamaṃ cāvetvā. Eseva ca nayoti nāvāya paṭhamaṃ ṭhitaṭṭhānato cāvane thullaccayaṃ, pacchā bandhanamocane pārājikanti eseva nayo netabboti attho. Ettha ca ‘‘tīre bandhitvā niccale udake ṭhapitanāvāya bandhanañca ṭhitokāso cāti dve ṭhānāni, taṃ paṭhamaṃ bandhanā moceti, thullaccayaṃ. Pacchā channaṃ ākārānaṃ aññatarena ṭhānā cāveti, pārājikaṃ. Paṭhamaṃ ṭhānā cāvetvā pacchā bandhanamocanepi eseva nayo’’ti (pārā. 99) aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttavinicchayo saṅgahito. Āmasanaphandāpanesu dukkaṭathullaccayāni heṭṭhā kumbhiyaṃ vuttanayeneva ñātuṃ sakkuṇeyyattā na vuttānīti veditabbaṃ. Evamuparipi.
125 把船拖上来,是指把它从水里拉到陆地上。翻过来,是指让船口朝下。船被放在陆地上时,只有船口边缘碰到的那块地方,才是它所在的位置——这就是这句话的意思脉络。“hi”是个表示区别的词,用它来点明:船从在水里的位置换到在陆地上的位置,这中间所说的差别。巴利
125.Ussāretvāti udakato thalaṃ āropetvā. Nikujjitvāti adhomukhaṃ katvā. Thale ṭhapitāya nāvāya mukhavaṭṭiyā phuṭṭhokāso eva ṭhānanti yojanā. Hīti viseso, tena jalaṭṭhato thalaṭṭhāya nāvāya vuttaṃ visesaṃ joteti.
126 这里,因为找不到让它向下沉没的情况,所以为了说明除了下沉之外,其余五种方式使船离开原处的情形,才说了“应知”等话。“从任何方向”是指:横向的四个方向,以及向上的方向,朝向任何方向,哪怕只移动超过一个发尖那么一点。巴利
126. Ettha adho osīdāpanassa alabbhamānatāya taṃ vinā itaresaṃ pañcannaṃ ākārānaṃ vasena ṭhānācāvanaṃ dassetumāha ‘‘ñeyyo’’tiādi. Yato kutocīti tiriyaṃ catassannaṃ, uparidisāya ca vasena yaṃ kiñci disābhimukhaṃ kesaggamattampi atikkamento.
127 把船翻过来口朝上放着,也算“正立”。所谓“木块”,就是木片。“如是”这个词,是在提示前面“应知处所的限定”等所说的道理。不过,这个判定适用于把船翻正后放在地上的情况。如果是放在木块上面,那就适用关于象牙桩上放置瓮所讲的那个判定。巴利
127.Ukkujjitāyapīti uddhaṃmukhaṃ ṭhapitāyapi. Ghaṭikānanti dārukhaṇḍānaṃ. ‘‘Tathā’’ti iminā ‘‘ñeyyo ṭhānaparicchedo’’tiādinā vuttanayaṃ atidisati. So pana ukkujjitvā bhūmiyaṃ ṭhapitanāvāya yujjati. Ghaṭikānaṃ upari ṭhapitāya pana nāgadantesu ṭhapitakunte vuttavinicchayo yujjati.
128 盗是用来修饰令船行进者的词。渡口指渡口附近的水。以桨就是用某种桨具。以舵板就是用船板。令船行进者就是驱使船前进的人。也见到令彼行这样的读法,意思是说,谁使那条船行进,谁就犯波罗夷。巴利
128.‘‘Theyyā’’ti idaṃ ‘‘pājentassā’’ti visesanaṃ. Tittheti titthāsannajale. Arittenāti kenipātena. Phiyenāti pājanaphalakena. Pājentassāti pesentassa. ‘‘Taṃ pājetī’’tipi pāṭho dissati, taṃ nāvaṃ yo pājeti, tassa parājayoti attho.
129-30 “伞”是指遮太阳的东西。“转向”是指调整方向,好让风能吹到。“或把衣举起来”是指把衣向上举起。按照偈颂的韵律,“或”读短音。“像兰咖拉一样”是指像展开的布那样。“风”就是风。“他没有罪过”这一句,是说在根本没有风的时候这样做,后来风来了把船吹走,才这么说的。但如果当时正有风,还这样做,那就应当知道是有罪的。巴利
129-30.Chattanti ātapavāraṇaṃ. Paṇāmetvāti yathā vātaṃ gaṇhāti, tathā paṇāmetvā. Ussāpetvāva cīvaranti cīvaraṃ uddhaṃ uccāretvā vā. Gāthāchandavasena ‘va’iti rassattaṃ. Laṅkārasadisanti pasāritapaṭasarikkhakaṃ. Samīraṇanti mālutaṃ. Na doso tassa vijjatīti idaṃ vātassa avijjamānakkhaṇe evaṃ karoto pacchā āgatena vātena nītanāvāya vasena vuttaṃ. Vāyamāne pana vāte evaṃ karontassa āpattiyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
131-2 “自己主动前来”是连接语。村旁的渡口,叫村渡口。“那”指船。“从所在之处”:指靠着张开的伞或扬起的衣布兜住风前行,停在村渡口那个地方。“不摇动”:连晃动都不做,以此说明连突喇遮亚罪都没有。也有写成“不离”的版本,意思是从停下的地方连一根头发尖那么点都不移动,以此说明没有波罗夷罪。“买”:按价钱卖掉。“而且自己前往”:这里的“而且”是把要说的相关事情一并收进来。同样,指用转过来的伞或举起的衣布兜住风,自己往前走的船。“从所在之处使其离开”:让它朝着自己想去的方向,以驱赶的方式使它从行进的地方离开。巴利
131-2. Sayameva upāgatanti sambandho. Gāmasamīpe titthaṃ gāmatitthaṃ. Tanti nāvaṃ. Ṭhānāti chattena vā cīvarena vā gahitavātena gantvā gāmatitthe ṭhitaṭṭhānā. Acālentoti phandāpanampi akaronto, iminā thullaccayassāpi abhāvaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Acāvento’’tipi pāṭho, ṭhitaṭṭhānato kesaggamattampi anapanentoti attho, iminā pārājikābhāvaṃ dasseti. Kiṇitvāti mūlena vikkiṇitvā. Sayameva ca gacchantinti ettha ca-kāro vattabbantarasamuccaye. Tathā paṇāmitachattena vā ussāpitacīvarena vā gahitavātena attanā gacchantiṃ. Ṭhānā cāvetīti attanā icchitadisābhimukhaṃ katvā pājanavasena gamanaṭṭhānā cāveti.
133-4 以“由此而去”之义,所以叫“乘具”。“令欢喜”,所以叫“车”。“运载”“被运载”或“以此运载”,所以叫“载具”。按照注疏中所说“上方像楼阁一样,用木板覆盖,或者用所有栏杆围起来覆盖”,这样造出来的车,就叫“载具”。“桑达玛尼咖”是指按照注疏中所说“在两侧装上金银等做的椽子,仿照金翅鸟翅膀的样子而造”,这样造出来的特殊乘具。“从处所移动的运用”,就是指从处所移动的应用。巴利
133-4. Yanti etenāti yānaṃ. Ramayatīti ratho. Vahati, vuyhati, vahanti etenāti vā vayhaṃ. ‘‘Upari maṇḍapasadisaṃ padaracchannaṃ, sabbapāliguṇṭhimaṃ vā chādetvā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.100) aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttanayena kataṃ sakaṭaṃ vayhaṃ nāma. Sandamānikāti ‘‘ubhosu passesu suvaṇṇarajatādimayā gopānasiyo datvā garuḷapakkhakanayena katā sandamānikā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.100) aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttanayena katayānaviseso. Ṭhānā cāvanayogasminti ṭhānā cāvanappayoge.
135-6 135-6. 因为用“从十个立足点移开”来讲波罗夷的人,必须先知道立足点差别的分类,所以先说明这个,再为了说明罪过的分类,而说了“轭二牛之乘具”等话。“轭二牛者”,是指“轭二牛之牛轭者”,或者分析为“于所轭者”。“十处所”,是指两头牛的八只脚,加上两个车轮,依这十个立足点来说十处所,这就是它的意思。正是用这种方式,对于轭四牛等乘具,也就说明了十八处所差别的分类方式。“令乘具行”,是指令牛车等乘具前进。“杜勒者,轭之近处”,这是注疏《甘提巴达》中所说的。也就是说,与车辕、轭一起系缚之处所的近处。“杜勒”就是轭的名称。从注疏中“舍弃杜勒”“安置杜勒”这些话来看,由于与它相伴,系缚之处所也叫“杜勒”。不过在这里,就像“恒河”一词可以指恒河附近一样,在杜勒附近,即驱使者适合坐卧的地方,也可以有“杜勒”这个说法。巴利
135-6. Dasaṭṭhānācāvanavasena pārājikaṃ vadantehi paṭhamaṃ ṭhānabhedassa ñātabbattā taṃ dassetvā āpattibhedaṃ dassetumāha ‘‘yānassa dukayuttassā’’tiādi. Dukayuttassāti dukaṃ goyugaṃ yuttassa yassāti, yutte yasminti vā viggaho. Dasa ṭhānānīti dvinnaṃ goṇānaṃ aṭṭha pādā, dve ca cakkānīti etesaṃ dasannaṃ patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānānaṃ vasena dasa ṭhānāni vadeyyāti attho. Eteneva nayena catuyuttādiyāne aṭṭhārasāti ṭhānabhedassa nayo dassito hoti. Yānaṃ pājayatoti sakaṭādiyānaṃ pesayato. ‘‘Dhureti yugāsanne’’ti aṭṭhakathāya gaṇṭhipade vuttaṃ. Rathīsāya yugena saddhiṃ bandhanaṭṭhānāsanneti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Dhura’’nti ca yugasseva nāmaṃ. ‘‘Dhuraṃ chaḍḍetvā, dhuraṃ āropetvā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.100) aṭṭhakathāvacanato taṃsahacariyāya sambandhanaṭṭhānampi dhuraṃ nāma. Idha pana gaṅgā-saddo viya gaṅgāsamīpe dhurasamīpe pājakassa nisajjārahaṭṭhāne dhurassa vattamānatā labbhati.
牛每抬起一只脚时,就指出该(套轭的)土卢遮迦罪,这是句子的连接方式。这段话是就牛没有反常的时候说的。为了说明反常时出现的差别,这里用“然土卢遮迦”中的“然”字,应当知道已经包含了注疏里所说的这个差别:如果牛知道“这不是我们的主人”,就甩掉轭,拖着不走或者挣扎,那暂时还算守护。但如果再把牛调正,架上轭,牢牢套好,用刺棒刺着驱赶,那么按照前面说的方式,随着它们每抬起一只脚,就有土卢遮迦罪。又“然于轮”这里,用增补的“然”字,显示了注疏中所说的差别:即使走在泥泞的路上,一个轮子陷在泥里,牛转动第二个轮子让它走,但因为一个轮子还停着,暂时还不算运载。但如果再把牛调正驱赶,当停着的那个轮子越过了仅仅一发尖那么小的接触处时,就成波罗夷。巴利
Goṇānaṃ pāduddhāre tassa thullaccayaṃ viniddiseti yojanā. Idañca goṇānaṃ avilomakālaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Vilomakāle sambhavantaṃ visesaṃ jotetuṃ ‘‘thullaccayaṃ tu’’ iccatra tu-saddena aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘sace pana goṇā ‘nāyaṃ amhākaṃ sāmiko’ti ñatvā dhuraṃ chaḍḍetvā ākaḍḍhantā tiṭṭhanti vā phandanti vā, rakkhati tāva. Goṇe puna ujukaṃ paṭipādetvā dhuraṃ āropetvā daḷhaṃ yojetvā pācanena vijjhitvā pājentassa vuttanayeneva tesaṃ pāduddhārena thullaccaya’’nti vuttaviseso saṅgahitoti daṭṭhabbo. Cakkānaṃ hīti ettha adhikena hi-saddena ‘‘sacepi sakaddame magge ekaṃ cakkaṃ kaddame laggaṃ hoti, dutiyaṃ cakkaṃ goṇā parivattentā pavattenti, ekassa pana ṭhitattā na tāva avahāro hoti. Goṇe pana puna ujukaṃ paṭipādetvā pājentassa ṭhitacakke kesaggamattaṃ phuṭṭhokāsaṃ atikkante pārājika’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.100) aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaviseso dassito hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
137-9 到这里,已经说明了相应乘具的判定;现在为了说明不相应乘具的判定,所以说了“不相应的”等话。意思是:对于靠车轭支撑而站立的那辆不相应的车来说,依据支撑轮的情况,只有三个处所。其中,“不相应的”指没有用牛轭系上的。“靠车轭”指按照前面所说的方式,在系轭处附近,也就是牛车前端。“支撑物”指站在牛车前端支撑物上面的。“支撑车轭的”就是支撑物。为了支撑牛车后部而给的两根木棍,叫“后支撑物”;为了支撑前部而给的支撑物,叫“前支撑物”,这是支撑物之间的区别。这里指的是前支撑物。“依据支撑轮只有三个处所”这句话,是就下面不适当的支撑物来说的;如果依据适当的支撑物,就应该说“四个”。巴利
137-9. Ettāvatā yuttayānavinicchayaṃ dassetvā idāni ayuttayānavinicchayaṃ dassetumāha ‘‘ayuttakassā’’tiādi. Dhurena upatthambhaniyaṃ ṭhitassa tassa ayuttakassāpi ca yānakassa upatthambhanicakkakānaṃ vasena tīṇeva ṭhānāni bhavantīti yojanā. Tattha ayuttakassāti goṇehi ayuttakassa. Dhurenāti yathāvuttanayena dhurayuttaṭṭhānasamīpadesena, sakaṭasīsenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Upatthambhaniyanti sakaṭasīsopatthambhaniyā upari ṭhitassa. Upatthambhayati dhuranti upatthambhanī. Sakaṭassa pacchimabhāgopatthambhanatthaṃ dīyamānaṃ daṇḍadvayaṃ pacchimopatthambhanī nāma, purimabhāgassa dīyamānassa upatthambhanī purimopatthambhanī nāmāti ayamupatthambhanīnaṃ viseso. Idha purimopatthambhanī adhippetā. ‘‘Upatthambhanicakkakānaṃ vasena tīṇeva ṭhānānī’’ti idaṃ heṭṭhā akappakatāya upatthambhaniyā vasena vuttaṃ, kappakatāya pana vasena ‘‘cattārī’’ti vattabbaṃ.
“如是”这个词,是用它来引出“处所只有三个”。意思是:按照两个木轮来说,有三个处所。“诸木”这个词用复数来说,应当理解为:既可以指堆聚在一起的木材,也可以指单独一根木头,甚至一块木板。“即使在地上,也只是以车轭安置,同样也是为已安置者”这句话,是用来说明同样只有三个处所。这里按照车轭和轮子所安立的位置来说,有三个处所。而且,“在上方安置者”这里的“者”字,也可以和“在地上安置者”结合起来,用来表示总括。这样,通过这个多加出来的“者”字,注疏里就收摄了这样的判定:“如果把不系轭的车,在车轭处以一个支撑物、在后面以两个支撑物支撑起来安置,那么按照三个支撑物和轮子来说,就有五个处所。如果车轭处的支撑物下部已经妥善处理,就有六个处所。”巴利
‘‘Tathā’’ti iminā ‘‘ṭhānāni tīṇevā’’ti ākaḍḍhati, dārucakkadvayavasena tīṇi ṭhānānīti attho. ‘‘Dārūna’’nti iminā bahuvacananiddesena rāsikatadārūnaṃ dārukassa ekassāpi phalakassāpi gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Bhūmiyampi dhureneva, tatheva ṭhapitassa cā’’ti iminā tīṇiyeva ṭhānānīti atidisati. Ettha dhuracakkānaṃ patiṭṭhitokāsavasena tīṇi ṭhānāni. Ettha ca upariṭṭhapitassa cāti ca-kāraṃ ‘‘bhūmiyaṃ ṭhapitassā’’ti etthāpi yojetvā samuccayaṃ kātuṃ sakkāti. Tattha adhikavacanena ca-kārena aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘yaṃ pana ayuttakaṃ dhure ekāya, pacchato ca dvīhi upatthambhanīhi upatthambhetvā ṭhapitaṃ, tassa tiṇṇaṃ upatthambhanīnaṃ, cakkānañca vasena pañca ṭhānāni. Sace dhure upatthambhanī heṭṭhābhāge kappakatā hoti, cha ṭhānānī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.100) vuttavinicchayaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
在前或后这一句里,省略了“拖拽之后”这个说法。用“也”这个字,是把没有明说的“举起之后也”也包括进来。连接起来就是:有人向前拖拽之后,使对方离开原位;或者有人向后拖拽之后,使对方离开原位;或者有人举起之后,使对方离开原位。“三”就是指这三者;“他们”是根据文义推出来的,说的就是这三个人。什么时候发生什么,所以说“土喇咤亚……乃至……波罗夷”。“使离开原位”这一句,也应该和“土喇咤亚”连在一起理解。因为“然”这个字是用来显示差别的,所以当还有余、未完全离开原位而使之动摇时,是土喇咤亚;如果完全没有余、完全离开原位,那就应当知道,所说的使离开原位就是波罗夷。巴利
Purato pacchato vāpīti ettha ‘‘kaḍḍhitvā’’ti pāṭhaseso. Api-saddena ‘‘ukkhipitvāpī’’ti avuttaṃ samuccinoti. Yo pana purato kaḍḍhitvā ṭhānā cāveti, yo vā pana pacchato kaḍḍhitvā ṭhānā cāveti, yo vā pana ukkhipitvā ṭhānā cāvetīti yojanā. Tiṇṇanti ime tayo gahitā, ‘‘tesa’’nti sāmatthiyā labbhati, tesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ puggalānanti vuttaṃ hoti. Kadā kiṃ hotīti āha ‘‘thullaccayaṃ tu…pe… parājayo’’ti. ‘‘Ṭhānā cāve’’ti idaṃ ‘‘thullaccaya’’nti imināpi sambandhanīyaṃ. Tu-saddassa visesajotanatthaṃ upāttattā sāvasesaṭṭhānācāvane phandāpanathullaccayaṃ, niravasesaṭṭhānācāvane pana kate ṭhānācāvanapārājikā vuttā hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
140 “以车轴的两端”,就是指车轴的两头。因为说到“在一个意义上可以用复数,也可以用别的格”,所以对单一的对象使用复数是可以的。“立着的”这个修饰语,从语义关系上看,应该知道是用来修饰“车”的。由于说了“有两个地方”,就像车辕不接触地面那样,把两个车轴头架在较高的两根秤杆之类的木头上放好,这时被取用的就是那辆车本身。巴利
140.Akkhānaṃ sīsakehīti akkhassa ubhayakoṭīhi. ‘‘Jātyākhyāyamekasmiṃ bahuvacanamaññatarāya’’miti vacanato ekasmiṃ atthe bahuvacanaṃ yujjati. ‘‘Ṭhitassā’’ti etassa visesanassa ‘‘yānassā’’ti visesitabbaṃ sāmatthiyā labbhati. ‘‘Ṭhānāni dve’’ti vuttattā yathā sakaṭadhuraṃ bhūmiṃ na phusati, evaṃ uccataresu dvīsu tulādidārūsu dve akkhasīse āropetvā ṭhapitaṃ yānameva gayhati.
141 141.“拖拉者”,是指在作为车轴两头支撑物的木头上摩擦,并从这里到那里地拖拽。“举起者”,是指从直立停放的位置向上抬起。“超过接触处”,是指从接触处超过一根发尖那么大的距离。“其他的”,是指不同于前面所说的那种情形,也就是对任何战车之类的车辆而言。巴利
141.Kaḍḍhantoti dvinnaṃ akkhasīsānaṃ ādhārabhūtesu dārūsu ghaṃsitvā ito cito ca kaḍḍhanto. Ukkhipantoti ujuṃ ṭhitaṭṭhānato uccārento. Phuṭṭhokāsaccayeti phuṭṭhokāsato kesaggamattātikkame. Aññassāti yathāvuttappakārato itarassa. Yassa kassaci rathādikassa yānassa.
142 车轴钉,是指四根固定车轴的楔钉。在车轴两端套车轮处,为了在两根车辕上固定车轴,像两根手指那样钉进去的四根楔钉,就叫车轴钉。于辕端,是指靠近绑辕处那个车头前端,也就是那辆车。或这个字,表示有人从侧面抓住拖拉,或者从中间抓住举起,这样来区分不同的动作。抓住这里,是省略了拖拉这个说法。令从处移,是指抓住车轴钉拖拉时,自己这一边的钉端所碰到的地方,被另一边的钉端越过去,哪怕只超过一根头发尖那么一点。巴利
142.Akkhuddhīnanti catunnaṃ akkharuddhanakaāṇīnaṃ. Akkhassa ubhayakoṭīsu cakkāvuṇanaṭṭhānato anto dvīsu sakaṭabāhāsu akkharuddhanatthāya dve aṅguliyo viya ākoṭitā catasso āṇiyo akkhuddhi nāma. Dhurassāti dhurabandhanaṭṭhānāsannassa rathasīsaggassa. Taṃ yānaṃ. Vā-saddena passe vā gahetvā kaḍḍhanto, majjhe vā gahetvā ukkhipentoti kiriyantaraṃ vikappeti. Gahetvāti ettha ‘‘kaḍḍhanto’’ti pāṭhaseso. Ṭhānā cāvetīti uddhīsu gahetvā kaḍḍhanto attano disāya uddhiantena phuṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ itarena uddhipariyantena kesaggamattampi atikkāmeti.
“或者有车轴钉”这句话用的是存疑的语气,同时也暗示了没有车轴钉的车也可能存在。注释书里说:“如果没有车轴钉桩,就把车辕弄平,从中间穿个孔,把车轴头插进去;这车的底板四周全都贴着地面。在这种情况下,在四个方向以及上方,按照所触之处被超越的方式,应当知道构成波罗夷。”这里所说的判定,也是以简别的方式一并收摄进去的。巴利
‘‘Uddhīsu vā’’ti sāsaṅkavacanena anuddhikayānassāpi vijjamānattaṃ sūcitaṃ hoti. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘atha uddhikhāṇukā na honti, samameva bāhaṃ katvā majjhe vijjhitvā akkhasīsāni pavesitāni honti, taṃ heṭṭhimatalassa samantā sabbaṃ pathaviṃ phusitvā tiṭṭhati, tattha catūsu disāsu, uddhañca phuṭṭhaṭṭhānātikkamavasena pārājikaṃ veditabba’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.100) vuttavinicchayañca byatirekavasena saṅgaṇhāti.
143 “以轮毂”是指朝向轮毂的方向。“唯有一处”的意思是:只有一个被轮毂接触到的位置成为处。“彼有一处”在某些写本中可以看到,相比之下前面的读法更好。“区分亦”这里的“亦”字是用来显示特殊含义的,意思是“区分则”。五种,是指轮毂四边的边界加上向上,共五种,意思是从处移动的方式。巴利
143.Nābhiyāti nābhimukhena. Ekameva siyā ṭhānanti ekaṃ nābhiyā phuṭṭhaṭṭhānameva ṭhānaṃ bhavatīti attho. ‘‘Ekamassa siyā ṭhāna’’nti potthakesu dissati, tato purimapāṭhova sundarataro. Paricchedopīti ettha pi-saddo visesatthajotako, paricchedo panāti attho. Pañcadhāti nābhiyā catupassapariyantaṃ, uddhañca pañcadhā, ṭhānācāvanākāro hotīti attho.
144 144.“二处”:按照接触轮辋和轮毂的位置来说,有两个处。“其”:指车轮的。对于这两个处,注释书里说,即使是不靠墙壁等物而放置的车轮,也作了同样的判定;这一点也由这段文字显示出来了。巴利
144.Ṭhānānidveti nemiyā, nābhiyā ca phuṭṭhaṭṭhānavasena dve ṭhānāni. Assāti cakkassa. Tesaṃ dvinnaṃ ṭhānānaṃ. Bhittiādiṃ apassāya ṭhapitacakkassāpi hi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vutto ayampi vinicchayo vutto, yopi iminā ca pāṭhena dassito hoti.
145 没有守护:主人没有安排守护。驱赶下来:把牛赶走之后。这是可以的,不构成波罗夷罪,这是要表达的意思。但如果主人让人取回,那就成了应该赔偿的财物。巴利
145.Anārakkhanti sāmikena asaṃvihitārakkhaṃ. Adhodetvāti goṇe apesetvā. Vaṭṭati, pārājikaṃ na hotīti adhippāyo. Sāmike āharāpente pana bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ hoti.
146 在《负重注》中,按照被称为头、肩、腰、垂等身体部位来分,负重的种类有四种。其中,为了不把头负重等弄混,应当先了解头等部位的界限——先说头的下界:前颈处是喉窝,后颈处有些人发际有旋,颈子两侧有些人有发旋向下延伸而生,这些被称为“耳鬓”,这些以下就是下界;从这以上是头。在这个范围内所承载的负重,就叫头负重。巴利
146. Bhāraṭṭhakathāya sīsakkhandhakaṭolambavasāti evaṃnāmakānaṃ sarīrāvayavānaṃ vasena bhāro catubbidho hoti. Tattha sīsabhārādīsu asammohatthaṃ sīsādīnaṃ paricchedo veditabbo – sīsassa tāva purimagale galavāṭako piṭṭhigale kesañci kesante āvaṭṭo hoti, galasseva ubhosu passesu kesañci kesāvaṭṭā oruyha jāyanti, ye ‘‘kaṇṇacūḷikā’’ti vuccanti, tesaṃ adhobhāgo cāti ayaṃ heṭṭhimaparicchedo, tato upari sīsaṃ, etthantare ṭhitabhāro sīsabhāro nāma.
从两边耳尖往下,从手肘往上,从后颈发旋和喉窝往下,从背中发旋和胸口正中的心窝往上,在这个范围里所承担的重量,就叫肩负荷。巴利
Ubhosu passesu kaṇṇacūḷikāhi paṭṭhāya heṭṭhā, kapparehi paṭṭhāya upari, piṭṭhigalāvaṭṭato ca galavāṭakato ca paṭṭhāya heṭṭhā, piṭṭhivemajjhāvaṭṭato ca uraparicchedamajjhe hadayaāvāṭato ca paṭṭhāya upari khandho, etthantare ṭhitabhāro khandhabhāro nāma.
从背脊正中间的凹陷处和心窝口开始,向下一直到脚趾甲尖,这是腰部的范围。在这个范围内遍布全身的负荷,就叫作腰负荷。巴利
Piṭṭhivemajjhāvaṭṭato , pana hadayaāvāṭato ca paṭṭhāya heṭṭhā yāva pādanakhasikhā, ayaṃ kaṭiparicchedo, etthantare samantato sarīre ṭhitabhāro kaṭibhāro nāma.
从肘部开始往下,一直到手指甲尖,这一段是悬挂的界限。在这个范围内停留的负荷,就叫悬挂负荷。巴利
Kapparato paṭṭhāya pana heṭṭhā yāva hatthanakhasikhā, ayaṃ olambakaparicchedo, etthantare ṭhitabhāro olambako nāma.
所谓“荷”,就是负担;用它来承担,或者在这里承担,所以叫负担,这样就把头等部分说成是负担。“立于负担中”,就是立于负担之处。因此,放在头等部位的物品就被称为物品。根据注释书里“负担本身就是负担处”这句话,“被承担”所以是负担,通过业格成立的“负担”一词,指的就是物品本身。巴利
Bharatīti bhāro, bharati etena, etasminti vā bhāro, iti yathāvuttasīsādayo avayavā vuccanti. Bhāre tiṭṭhatīti bhāraṭṭhaṃ. Iti sīsādīsu ṭhitaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ vuccati. ‘‘Bhāroyeva bhāraṭṭha’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.101) aṭṭhakathāvacanato bharīyatīti bhāro, kammani siddhena bhāra-saddena bhaṇḍameva vuccati.
147 就在头上:指在限定的头顶上。移动:不抛掷,而是从这里移到那里。应成土喇咤亚罪:应是由摇动所成的土喇咤亚罪。巴利
147.Sirasmiṃyevāti yathāparicchinne sirasi eva. Sāretīti anukkhipanto ito cito ca sāreti. Thullaccayaṃ siyāti phandāpanathullaccayaṃ bhaveyya.
148 “肩”是指所限定的那个肩。“放下”就是让它降下。“从头”这里省略了“上”字,意思是从所限定的头的上方。“乃至发端之量”是把发端之量那么远的距离移开。“乃至”这个词表示比那还要更进一步。“即使移开”是指移开时连发端都没碰到。这里用“乃至”一词,是说不仅把担从肩上放下的人犯波罗夷,移开的人也同样犯波罗夷——这是参照上文所说的。不过,袋等二重担因为同时立在头和背两个位置上,所以从两个位置移开才构成波罗夷;而“从头移开”这句话只摄取了其中一部分,应当这样理解。巴利
148.Khandhanti yathāparicchinnameva khandhaṃ. Oropiteti ohārite. Sīsatoti ettha ‘‘uddha’’nti pāṭhaseso, yathāparicchinnasīsato uparīti attho. Kesaggamattampīti kesaggamattaṃ dūraṃ katvā. Pi-saddo pageva tato adhikanti dīpeti. Mocentopīti kesaggena aphusantaṃ apanento. Etthāpi pi-saddena na kevalaṃ khandhaṃ oropentasseva pārājikaṃ, apica kho mocentopi parājitoti heṭṭhā vuttamapekkhati. Pasibbakādiyamakabhāraṃ pana sīse ca piṭṭhiyañcāti dvīsu ṭhānesu ṭhitattā dvīhi ṭhānehi apanayanena pārājikaṃ hoti, tañca ‘‘sīsato mocento’’ti imināva ekadesavasena saṅgahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
149-50 像这样说明了头担的判决之后,接着在解说次第中,虽然肩担等也应说明判决,但经文在末尾先说了悬挂担的判决,然后依据已说的初担和终担的方式,类推说明其余诸担的判决,所以说“担”等。“纯净心”是指因早餐等事而没有盗心。如果有人以盗心把已拿到手中的担物放在地上或舍弃等,当那物品刚离开手的那一刹那,就构成波罗夷——应当知道这就是以此为例所标示的。巴利
149-50. Evaṃ sīsabhāre vinicchayaṃ dassetvā tadanantaraṃ uddesakkamesu khandhabhārādīsu vinicchaye dassetabbepi avasāne vuttaolambakabhāre vinicchayaṃ dassetvā ādyantabhārānaṃ vuttanayānusārena sesesupi vinicchayaṃ atidisitumāha ‘‘bhāra’’ntiādi. Suddhamānasoti pātarāsādikāraṇena atheyyacitto, hatthagatabhāraṃ theyyacittena bhūmiyaṃ ṭhapananissajjanādiṃ karontassa hatthato muttamatte pārājikanti idametena upalakkhitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
这里所说的“按前面讲过的方式”,就是按照在头顶担和悬挂担里所讲的那样。在其余各种担里也一样,指的是肩担等。以慧的要义,就是用抓住要义的智慧。应当知道这个判定:对于放在划定范围内、价值一帕达的任何东西,如果以盗心生起“我要拿”的念头去碰它,犯恶作;没有把它移离原位,只是让它晃动,犯土喇咤亚;把它移出划定范围,或者向上举离原位,就犯波罗夷。应当知道,这就是判定。巴利
Ettha vuttanayenevāti sīsabhāraolambakabhāresu vuttānusārena. Sesesupi bhāresūti khandhabhārādikesupi. Matisārena sāramatinā. Veditabbo vinicchayoti yathāparicchinnesu ṭhānesu ṭhitaṃ pādagghanakaṃ yaṃ kiñci vatthuṃ theyyacittena ‘‘gaṇhissāmī’’ti āmasantassa dukkaṭaṃ, ṭhānā acāvetvā phandāpentassa thullaccayaṃ, yathāparicchinnaṭṭhānātikkamanavasena vā uddhaṃukkhipanavasena vā ṭhānā cāventassa pārājikaṃ hotīti ayaṃ vinicchayo veditabboti attho.
151-3 现在为了说明关于园地的判定,说“恶作”等。“园”指瞻波花等花苑和芒果等果园这两种园中的任何一种园。“园”这个词的意思是,在这里欲求花朵等,词义分析为“园”,与前缀“abhi”结合时,用宾格。“诉诸诉讼”:知道物品属于他人支配,把它当作“这是我的”而争执取用,以盗心等状态,通过寻求第二人等方式去诉诸诉讼的人,牟尼说这是恶作。应当这样联系:这是不与取的前行,按共谋来算,所以世尊说是恶作。“行法”就是发起争执。如果胜过对方物主,则连接理解为自己在教法上败北。巴利
151-3. Idāni ārāmaṭṭhavinicchayaṃ dassetumāha ‘‘dukkaṭa’’ntiādi. Ārāmanti campakādipupphārāmañca ambādiphalārāmañcāti dvīsu ārāmesu yaṃ kañci ārāmaṃ. Āramanti ettha pupphādikāminoti viggaho, taṃ ārāmaṃ, abhi-saddayoge upayogavacanaṃ. Abhiyuñjatoti parāyattabhāvaṃ jānanto ‘‘mama santaka’’nti aṭṭaṃ katvā gaṇhituṃ theyyacittena sahāyādibhāvatthaṃ dutiyakapariyesanādivasena abhiyuñjantassa dukkaṭaṃ muninā vuttanti iminā sambandhanīyaṃ, adinnādānassa pubbapayogattā sahapayogagaṇanāya dukkaṭanti bhagavatā vuttanti attho. Dhammaṃ carantoti aṭṭaṃ karonto. Paraṃ sāmikaṃ parājeti ce, sayaṃ sāsanato parājitoti yojanā.
“它的”是指物主。让盗贼生起疑惑,就是让盗贼产生这样的犹豫:“跟这个人争讼之后,我到底能不能拿回属于我的东西?”即使有人依法行事,却自己败下阵来,他也犯土喇咤亚罪。应当这样连接理解。巴利
Tassāti bhaṇḍasāmino. Vimatiṃ janayantassāti ‘‘iminā saha aṭṭaṃ katvā mama santakaṃ labhissāmi vā, na vā’’ti saṃsayaṃ uppādentassa corassa. Yopi dhammaṃ caranto sayaṃ parajjati, tassa ca thullaccayanti yojanā.
主人放弃责任,是指主人心想:“这个人顽固粗暴,甚至可能危害我的生命和梵行,我现在不需要这座园林了”,于是放弃责任;以及自己想“我不给”而放弃责任——应当这样连接理解。当双方都放弃责任时,就犯波罗夷罪。“彼之”指提出控告的那个人。“以及一切伪证者”中的“及”字,应当知道是省略了所指的对象。即使伪证者知道盗贼并非物主,只要他们为了把物品归于盗贼而说了任何话,他们一切比丘都犯波罗夷罪。这就是此处的含义。巴利
Sāmino dhuranikkhepeti ‘‘ayaṃ thaddho kakkhaḷo jīvitabrahmacariyantarāyampi me kareyya, alaṃ dāni mayhaṃ iminā ārāmenā’’ti sāmino dhuranikkhepe sati, attano ‘‘na dassāmī’’ti dhuranikkhepe cāti yojanā. Evaṃ ubhinnaṃ dhuranikkhepe pārājikaṃ. Tassāti abhiyuñjantassa. Sabbesaṃ kūṭasakkhīnañcāti ca-kāro luttaniddiṭṭhoti veditabbo. Corassa assāmikabhāvaṃ ñatvāpi tadāyattakaraṇatthaṃ yaṃ kiñci vadantā kūṭasakkhino, tesaṃ sabbesampi bhikkhūnaṃ pārājikaṃ hotīti attho.
154 154. 在《精舍注》中,由于“精舍”一词是指代之故,所以应当取“僧房或住处”这个意思。“僧团的”是指,因为是为了四方僧团而施给比丘们的,所以属于僧团所有。“任何”是指小的或大的,这是意思。“切断后取”,对于强行夺取的人来说,不构成波罗夷罪,这也是文句省略后的连接方式。显示理由说“因为一切都没有放弃负担”,意思是,整个四方僧团不可能放弃负担。不只说“精舍”这一点,而是用“僧团的”这个限定语来说明:对于施给长部诵者等特定团体或个人的精舍等,若切断后夺取,因为可能有放弃负担的情况,所以构成波罗夷罪。这里的判定应当像园林中那样理解。在这些地方和物品的判定中,没有说到的地方,应当依照地上物、陆地物、空中物、虚空物中所说的方式来理解,因此没有另外说。巴利
154. Vihāraṭṭhakathāyaṃ vihāranti upalakkhaṇattā ‘‘pariveṇaṃ vā, āvāsaṃ vā’’ti ca gahetabbaṃ. Saṅghikanti cātuddisaṃ saṅghaṃ uddissa bhikkhūnaṃ dinnattā saṅghasantakaṃ. Kañcīti khuddakaṃ, mahantaṃ vāti attho. Acchinditvāna gaṇhituṃ abhiyuñjantassa pārājikā na sijjhatītipi pāṭhasesayojanā. Hetuṃ dasseti ‘‘sabbesaṃ dhuranikkhepābhāvato’’ti, sabbasseva cātuddisikasaṅghassa dhuranikkhepassa asambhavatoti attho. ‘‘Vihāra’’nti ettakameva avatvā ‘‘saṅghika’’nti visesanena dīghabhāṇakādibhedassa gaṇassa, ekapuggalassa vā dinnavihārādiṃ acchinditvā gaṇhante dhuranikkhepasambhavā pārājikanti vuttaṃ hoti. Ettha vinicchayo ārāme viya veditabbo. Imesu tatraṭṭhabhaṇḍe vinicchayo bhūmaṭṭhathalaṭṭhaākāsaṭṭhavehāsaṭṭhesu vuttanayena ñātuṃ sakkāti na vuttoti veditabbo.
155-6 155-6. 就田地方面来说,“穗”指的是藤蔓。“压伏之后”是指做到让谷粒落到手里那样。“用镰刀”是指用镰刀。“割取之后”是指割下之后。在一切行为表述中,都应联系为“稻等谷物的穗”。具体应这样理解:把稻等谷物的穗压伏之后拿取,当拿取某粒种子时,若已达到构成犯戒事由的程度(即达到一巴陀值),而从那捆缚中解开时(即从捆束之处解脱),就对他构成波罗夷。用镰刀割取后拿取,当拿取某个穗时……中间省略……就构成。用手切断后拿取,当拿取某一握时……中间省略……就构成。“种子”是指稻等果实。“达到犯戒事由的程度”是指达到一巴陀值。“握”是指穗握或种子握。“从那捆缚中解开”是指从捆缚之处解开。巴利
155-6. Khettaṭṭhe sīsānīti valliyo. Nidampitvānāti yathā dhaññamattaṃ hatthagataṃ hoti, tathā katvā. Asitenāti dāttena. Lāyitvāti dāyitvā. Sabbakiriyāpadesu ‘‘sāliādīnaṃ sīsānī’’ti sambandhanīyaṃ. Sāliādīnaṃ sīsāni nidampitvā gaṇhato yasmiṃ bīje gahite vatthu pūrati, tasmiṃ bandhanā mocite tassa pārājikaṃ bhaveti yojanā. Asitena lāyitvā gaṇhato yasmiṃ sīse gahite…pe… bhave, karena chinditvā gaṇhato yassaṃ muṭṭhiyaṃ gahitāyaṃ…pe… bhaveti yojanā. Bījeti vīhādiphale. Vatthu pūratīti pādagghanakaṃ hotīti. Muṭṭhiyanti sīsamuṭṭhiyaṃ, bījamuṭṭhiyaṃ vā. Bandhanā mociteti bandhanaṭṭhānato mocite.
157 157. “或杆”是指填满物体的稻杆。“未切断则受保护”,这是两者的关联。“或皮”是指那根杆某一面的外皮未切断则受保护,这也是关联。通过“或”这个字,把这里没有明说、但注释书中提到的“外壳”也包括进来。“外壳”是指杆或皮的外层。在这里,“或皮未切断则受保护”,也应这样连接理解。“或稻秆也一样”:是指以已取走的谷粒和稻穗为基准而算作稻、稗等植物的秆,这被称为皮内之物。“长”是指如果它是长的。“未出”这个词与“杆”相连。“从彼”是文句省略的说法。意思是:从那根长稻秆上,带着种子的稻穗杆被完全切断,在切断的那一端,连发尖那么小的部分也没有露到外面。“保护”是指保护那位比丘,使他不会犯下与恶作、偷兰遮、波罗夷事相应的罪。如果已经脱离,就不再保护,这是它的意思。巴利
157.Daṇḍo vāti vatthupūrakavīhidaṇḍo vā. Acchinno rakkhatīti sambandho. Taco vāti tassa daṇḍassa ekapasse challi vā acchinno rakkhaticceva sambandho. Vā-ggahaṇena idhāvuttaṃ aṭṭhakathāgataṃ (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.104) ‘‘vāko’’ti idaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Vāko nāma daṇḍe vā tace vā bāhiraṃ. Idhāpi taco vā acchinno rakkhatīti yojanā. Vīhināḷampi vāti gahitadhaññasālisīsena patiṭṭhitaṃ vīhikudrūsādigacchānaṃ nāḷaṃ, tacagabbhoti vuttaṃ hoti. Dīghanti dīghaṃ ce hoti. ‘‘Anikkhantovā’’ti iminā ‘‘daṇḍo’’ti sambandho. ‘‘Tato’’ti pāṭhaseso. Tato dīghavīhināḷato sabījavīhisīsadaṇḍo sabbaso chinno chinnakoṭiyā kesaggamattampi bahi anikkhantoti attho. Rakkhatīti taṃ bhikkhuṃ dukkaṭathullaccayapārājikavatthūnaṃ anurūpāpattito pāleti. Mutto ce, na rakkhatīti attho.
注释书里也这样说:稻秆就算很长,只要稻穗的那根小杆还没有从秆里脱出来,它就仍然算受保护。一旦那根小杆哪怕只有发尖那么一点点从秆的下端露出来,就要按物品的价值来判罪。同样,按照这个判断标准,注释书里说的“应割取的、价值足够的稻穗把,如果在根部被切断时,因为没断的稻穗顶端互相缠在一起还立着,就仍受保护;如果缠结解开、彼此分离,就犯下前面说的波罗夷等罪”这一类判断,也应当理解为已经暗示了同样的原则。巴利
Vuttañcetaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘vīhināḷaṃ dīghampi hoti, yāva antonāḷato vīhisīsadaṇḍako na nikkhamati, tāva rakkhati. Kesaggamattampi nāḷato daṇḍakassa heṭṭhimatale nikkhantamatte bhaṇḍagghavasena kāretabbo’’ti (pārā. 1.104). Tathā imināva vinicchayena aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘lāyitabbavatthupūrakavīhisīsamuṭṭhiyā mūle chinnepi sīsesu acchinnavīhisīsaggehi saddhiṃ jaṭetvā ṭhitesu rakkhati, jaṭaṃ vijaṭetvā viyojitesu yathāvuttapārājikādiāpattiyo hontī’’ti evamādiko vinicchayo ca sūcitoti gahetabbo.
158 压碎后,是指把稻穗压碎。簸扬后,是指把谷糠之类的杂物扬掉。从此我要取精华,是指这样盘算。连接起来就是:从这稻穗中,我要取精华,意思是取那精华的部分。如果是这样盘算,就是句子的连接方式。保护的意思是:当物品达到足够价值时,不论是用镰刀割下、用手折断,还是把它从原处移开,只要那个盘算还没有完成,就仍然算在保护范围内,不犯重罪——这就是这段话的意思。巴利
158.Madditvāti vīhisīsāni madditvā. Papphoṭetvāti bhusādīni ophunitvā. Ito sāraṃ gaṇhissāmīti parikappetīti yojanā. Itoti vīhisīsato. Sāraṃ gaṇhissāmīti sārabhāgaṃ ādiyissāmi. Sace parikappetīti yojanā. Rakkhatīti vatthupahonakappamāṇaṃ dāttena lāyitvā vā hatthena chinditvā vā ṭhānā cāvetvā gahitampi yāva parikappo na niṭṭhāti, tāva āpattito rakkhatīti attho.
159 在捣碎时,是指在捣碎稻穗的时候。在取出时,是指在清除稻草的时候。在簸扬时,是指在扬去糠秕等碎屑的时候。没有罪,是指从价值来看,不构成波罗夷等罪,但共同造作的恶作罪仍然存在。自己……中略……波罗夷,意思是:自己完全按照最初设想的方式做完一切,仅仅在把精华部分放进自己容器的时候,就构成前面所说的波罗夷等罪。巴利
159.Maddanepīti vīhisīsamaddanepi. Uddharaṇepīti palālāpanayanepi. Papphoṭanepīti bhusādikacavarāpanayanepi . Doso natthīti agghavasena pārājikādiāpattiyo na bhavanti, sahapayogadukkaṭaṃ pana hoteva. Attano…pe… parājayoti attano paṭhamaṃ parikappitākārena sabbaṃ katvā sārabhāgaṃ gaṇhituṃ attano bhājane pakkhittamatte yathāvuttapārājikādayo hontīti attho.
160 160. 到这里为止,已经说明了“所谓田地物,就是物品以四种方式放在田地里——地上物、陆上物、空中物、虚空物”,这些田地物和前面所说的四种情况是一样的。现在放下这些,先对经文中出现的“生于彼处者”等说法作出判定,接着为了说明“所谓田地,就是生长前季作物或后季作物的地方”这种田地的情况,所以说了“知”等话。“知”:就是了知那是属于别人所有的。“界桩”:指没有刻字的,或者其他石头之类的界标。“移动”:以盗心挖掘,使属于他人的土地,无论地主如何看待,或通过其他方式,为欲占为己有之所求,乃至移动毫端许之处所,使之如同自己所有——这便是它的含义。巴利
160. Ettāvatā ‘‘khettaṭṭhaṃ nāma bhaṇḍaṃ khette catūhi ṭhānehi nikkhittaṃ hoti bhūmaṭṭhaṃ thalaṭṭhaṃ ākāsaṭṭhaṃ vehāsaṭṭha’’nti (pārā. 104) vuttāni khettaṭṭhāni cattāri yathāvuttasadisānīti tāni pahāya ‘‘tatthajātaka’’ntiādi pāḷiyaṃ āgate tatrajāte vinicchayaṃ dassetvā idāni ‘‘khettaṃ nāma yattha pubbaṇṇaṃ vā aparaṇṇaṃ vā jāyatī’’ti (pārā. 104) evamāgate khettepi vinicchayaṃ dassetumāha ‘‘jāna’’ntiādi. Jānanti parasantakabhāvaṃ jānanto. Khīlanti appitakkharaṃ vā itaraṃ vā pāsāṇādikhīlaṃ. Saṅkāmetīti parāyattabhūmiṃ sāmikā yathā passanti, tathā vā aññathā vā attano santakaṃ kātukāmatāya kesaggamattampi ṭhānaṃ yathā sasantakaṃ hoti, tathā theyyacittena nikhaṇatīti attho.
161 161. 那么,这个波罗夷对那个人来说在什么时候成立呢?回答说:“在地主放弃责任的时候。”“成立”是补上去的词。因为“而”这个字已经包含了“或者自己”这一区别,所以意思是:当地主表现出无所贪求、也就是放弃责任时,以及自己说“我不给地主”而放弃自己的责任时,他的波罗夷就成立。所谓“如是所说”,就是指像“乃至毛端许”这样限定地说的。巴利
161. Taṃ pārājikattaṃ tassa kadā hotīti āha ‘‘sāmikānaṃ tu dhuranikkhepane satī’’ti. ‘‘Hotī’’ti pāṭhaseso. Tu-saddena ‘‘attano vā’’ti visesassa saṅgahitattā sāmino nirālayabhāvasaṅkhātadhuranikkhepe ca ‘‘sāmikassa na dassāmī’’ti attano dhuranikkhepe ca tassa pārājikattaṃ hotīti attho. Evamudīritanti ‘‘kesaggamattampī’’ti evaṃ niyamitaṃ kathitaṃ.
162 “然而,那块地”是指哪块地呢?在这两个界桩中。“初为土喇咤亚”的意思是:在移动第一个界桩时,那位比丘犯土喇咤亚罪。“第二”承接上下文,意思是:在移动第二个界桩时,就构成波罗夷。在需要用多个界桩来标定的地方,对两端界桩的判定,也由这里说到了。不过,这里的区别在于:除了两端的界桩之外,在挖掉其余界桩时,以及在其他为了这个目的所做的一切行为中,都构成恶作罪。巴利
162.Yā panāti yā bhūmi pana. Tesu dvīsu khīlesu. Ādo thullaccayanti paṭhame khīle saṅkāmite so bhikkhu thullaccayaṃ āpajjati. Dutiyeti dutiye khīle saṅkāmite parājayo hotīti yojanā. Bahūhi khīlehi gahetabbaṭṭhāne pariyantakhīlesu dvīsu vinicchayo ca eteneva vutto hoti. Ettha pana ante khīladvayaṃ vinā avasesakhīlanikhaṇane ca itaresu tadatthesu sabbapayogesu ca dukkaṭaṃ hotīti viseso.
163-4 “想要让人知道‘这是我的所有物’”,这就是这里的语义关联。意思是:已经知道那块地属于别人,于是生起偷盗的心,想哪怕只占取像头发尖那么一点点的地方,就用绳子或棍子量出“这么一块地方是我的”,并想借此让对方知道。“以这两种行为”是指最后那两种行为,也就是伸绳和放棍当中的任何一种。“在这些当中”是处格,表示从中区分。巴利
163-4. ‘‘Mamedaṃ santaka’’nti ñāpetukāmoti sambandho. Parasantakāya bhūmiyā parāyattabhāvaṃ ñatvāva theyyacittena kesaggamattampi ṭhānaṃ gaṇhitukāmatāya ‘‘ettakaṃ ṭhānaṃ mama santaka’’nti rajjuyā vā yaṭṭhiyā vā minitvā parassa ñāpetukāmoti attho. Yehi dvīhi payogehīti sabbapacchimakehi rajjupasāraṇayaṭṭhipātanānamaññatarehi dvīhi payogehi. Tesūti niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ.
这里,“绳或”这个说法,本来应该用表示选择的“或”字来接上“杖或”,但为了涵盖没有说出来的情况,又额外用了“或”字,因此就表明了这里所说的有界限者的判定。应当知道,这个判定也被包含在内:就像前面关于绳和杖的判定一样,对于属于他人所有的土地,以盗心想要取得哪怕只有头发尖那么一点点的地方,比如挖掉篱笆桩,或者只用树枝围成篱笆,或者系上界限,或者砌围墙,或者堆起土堆,——在前加行阶段,如果属于波逸提的情况,就同时构成波逸提和恶作;在俱加行阶段,只有恶作;在后两种加行中,第一种加行构成恶作,最后究竟加行构成波罗夷。应当知道这些判定也被包含在其中。巴利
Idha rajjuṃ vāpīti vikappatthavā-saddena ‘‘yaṭṭhiṃ vā’’ti yojetabbepi avuttasamuccayatthaṃ adhikavacanabhāvena vuttapi-saddena idhāvuttamariyādavatīnaṃ vinicchayassa ñāpitattā yathāvuttarajjuyaṭṭhivinicchayesu viya parasantakāya bhūmiyā kesaggamattampi ṭhānaṃ theyyacittena gaṇhitukāmatāya vatipāde nikhaṇitvā vā sākhāmattena vā vatiṃ karontassa mariyādaṃ vā bandhantassa pākāraṃ vā cinantassa paṃsumattikā vā vaḍḍhentassa pubbapayoge pācittiyaṭṭhāne pācittiyañca dukkaṭañca sahapayoge kevaladukkaṭañca pacchimapayogesu dvīsu paṭhamapayoge thullaccayañca avasānapayoge pārājikañca hotīti vinicchayopi saṅgahitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
165 165. 在“处地等”中,“处地之”这句话:因为《词句分别》里说“所谓‘处’,就是园地、精舍地”,所以花等园林中为了建造而整备好、铺平的地,以及先前建成的园林毁坏后留下的空地,还有为了建精舍而预备好的地,以及已经毁坏的僧园之地——对于具有这样区分的处,住在其中的住所或精舍,就被称为“处”。这样一来,处有两种;而“所谓‘处地’,就是物品以四种方式放置在处中:在地上、在陆地上、在空中、在虚空中”这句话说明物品有四种。这两者——处和处地——本来应该说“处和处地”,但按照一部分同形、一部分省略的方式合成,并把u音变成a音,就显示为“处地之”,应当这样理解。意思是:如上所说的两种处,以及处地之物品。“田地”也是如此,这里的合成方式相同,应当理解为“在田地中以及田地之物品”。在“船地等”的说法中也是同样的规则。“在村地中”也是如此:所说的“所谓‘村地’,就是物品以四种方式放置在村中:在地上……乃至……在虚空中”,意思就是在四种村地物品中也是如此。巴利
165. Vatthaṭṭhādīsu vatthaṭṭhassāti ettha ‘‘vatthu nāma ārāmavatthu vihāravatthū’’ti (pārā. 105) padabhājane vuttattā pupphādiārāme kātuṃ saṅkharitvā ṭhapitabhūmi ca pubbakatārāmānaṃ vināse tucchabhūmi ca vihāraṃ kātuṃ abhisaṅkhatā bhūmi ca naṭṭhavihārabhūmi cāti evaṃ vibhāgavati vasati ettha uparopo vā vihāro vāti ‘‘vatthū’’ti vuccati iccevaṃ duvidhaṃ vatthuñca ‘‘vatthuṭṭhaṃ nāma bhaṇḍaṃ vatthusmiṃ catūhi ṭhānehi nikkhittaṃ hoti bhūmaṭṭhaṃ thalaṭṭhaṃ ākāsaṭṭhaṃ vehāsaṭṭha’’nti (pārā. 105) vacanato evaṃ catubbidhaṃ bhaṇḍañcāti idaṃ dvayaṃ vatthu ca vatthuṭṭhañca vatthuvatthuṭṭhanti vattabbe ekadesasarūpekasesavasena samāsetvā, u-kārassa ca akāraṃ katvā ‘‘vatthaṭṭhassā’’ti dassitanti gahetabbaṃ. Yathāvuttaduvidhavatthuno, vatthaṭṭhassa ca bhaṇḍassāti attho. Khettaṭṭheti etthāpi ayameva samāsoti khette ca khettaṭṭhe cāti gahetabbaṃ. Nāvaṭṭhādivohārepi eseva nayo. Gāmaṭṭhepi cāti ‘‘gāmaṭṭhaṃ nāma bhaṇḍaṃ gāme catūhi ṭhānehi nikkhittaṃ hoti bhūmaṭṭhaṃ…pe… vehāsaṭṭha’’nti (pārā. 106) vutte catubbidhe gāmaṭṭhabhaṇḍepīti attho.
166 在《林地注》中,“草或”等词句和“彼处所生”这个词相连。“彼处所生”的意思是:依据“所谓林地,就是属于人的、被人所拥有的地方”这句话,凡是属于人的东西,都不该违背主人的意愿去拿,所以指的是生长在有守护的林地里的东西。“草或”是指别人割下来放在那里的草,或者自己该割的草,或者适合盖屋顶的草。“叶或”是指同样适合盖屋顶的棕榈叶之类的叶子。“藤或”是指同样性质的藤条之类的蔓藤。不过,如果藤很长,穿过了大树和灌木,或者缠绕着它们,那么即使从根部砍断,也不构成偷盗;从顶端砍断,也不构成。但当根部和顶端都砍断时,就构成偷盗。如果它是缠绕着生长的,那么只要把它从树上解开,就构成偷盗——这是这里的区别。主人还没有放弃的东西,以及树皮、木片等剩余物品,应当知道用这个(“彼处所生”)就标示并涵盖了。“仅木材或”是指木料。“应以物品价作”在这里应当理解为:按内在原因的意义来让他做。所以注中说“应以物品价使作”。在所拿的草等物品中,按价值算,如果是一马萨咖或不到一马萨咖,犯恶作;超过一马萨咖但不到五马萨咖,犯土喇咤亚;五马萨咖或超过五马萨咖,犯波罗夷。如果没有犯波罗夷,就应让他作触摸的恶作和令动摇的土喇咤亚,这是意思。“取者”就是偷盗的人。巴利
166. Araññaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘tiṇaṃ vā’’tiādipadānaṃ ‘‘tatthajātaka’’nti padena sambandho. Tatthajātakanti ‘‘araññaṃ nāma yaṃ manussānaṃ pariggahitaṃ hotī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.107) vacanato tatthajātaṃ yaṃ kiñci manussasantakaṃ sāmikānaṃ akāmā agahetabbato sārakkhe araññe uppannanti attho. Tiṇaṃ vāti parehi lāyitvā ṭhapitaṃ vā attanā lāyitabbaṃ vā gehacchādanārahaṃ tiṇaṃ vā. Paṇṇaṃ vāti evarūpameva gehacchādanārahaṃ tālapaṇṇādipaṇṇaṃ vā. Lataṃ vāti tathārūpameva vettalatādikaṃ valliṃ vā. Yā pana dīghā hoti , mahārukkhe ca gacche ca vinivijjhitvā vā veṭhetvā vā gatā, sā mūle chinnāpi avahāraṃ na janeti, agge chinnāpi. Yadā pana aggepi mūlepi chinnā hoti, tadā avahāraṃ janeti. Sace pana veṭhetvā ṭhitā hoti, veṭhetvā ṭhitā pana rukkhato mocitamattā avahāraṃ janetīti ayamettha viseso. Sāmikena avissajjitālayaṃ challivākādiavasesabhaṇḍañca imināva upalakkhitvā saṅgahitanti veditabbaṃ. Kaṭṭhameva vāti dāruṃ vā. Bhaṇḍaggheneva kātabboti ettha antobhūtahetutthavasena kāretabboti attho gahetabbo. Tenāha aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘bhaṇḍagghena kāretabbo’’ti. Avahaṭatiṇādibhaṇḍesu agghavasena māsakaṃ vā ūnamāsakaṃ vā hoti, dukkaṭaṃ. Atirekamāsakaṃ vā ūnapañcamāsakaṃ vā hoti, thullaccayaṃ. Pañcamāsakaṃ vā atirekapañcamāsakaṃ vā hoti, pārājikaṃ. Pārājikaṃ ce anāpanno, āmasanadukkaṭaṃ, phandāpanathullaccayañca kāretabboti attho. Gaṇhantoti avaharanto.
167-74 现在,为了说明前面“只是木材”等语中所说的关于树木和木料的判定,接着说了“贵重”等话。所谓“贵重”,就是价值达到五个摩沙迦或者超过五个摩沙迦,所以叫贵重。所谓“失坏”,就是怀着偷盗的心,仅仅把它砍断,就已经犯了波罗夷。“也”这个字表示强调确定。用“任何也”这句话来说明:哪怕是已经半倒的、湿的、旧的,砍下来放在那里的,也都不应该取用,这就是这里的含义。巴利
167-74. Idāni ‘‘kaṭṭhameva vā’’ti vuttarukkhadārūsu vinicchayaṃ dassetumāha ‘‘mahagghe’’tiādi. Mahaggheti pañcamāsakaṃ vā atirekapañcamāsakaṃ vā agghakaṃ hutvā mahagghe. Nassatīti theyyacittasamaṅgī hutvā chinnamattepi pārājikaṃ āpajjati. Pi-saddo avadhāraṇe. ‘‘Kocipī’’ti iminā addhagatopi allaṃ vā hotu purāṇaṃ vā, tacchetvā ṭhapitaṃ na gahetabbamevāti attho.
“根”只是一个指代标记。根据注释书里说的“顶端和根部都被切断”,这里应当理解为把根部和顶端都切断。“半倒”是指树皮老旧、剥落、掉下来的状态,也就是说已经站立了很久。巴利
Mūleti upalakkhaṇamattaṃ. ‘‘Agge ca mūle ca chinno hotī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.107) aṭṭhakathāvacanato mūlañca aggañca chinditvāti gahetabbo. Addhagatanti jiṇṇagaḷitapatitatacaṃ, cirakālaṃ ṭhitanti vuttaṃ hoti.
“标记”是指为了表明归自己所有,在树干上割去树皮做记号。“周围覆盖”是指被四周新长出的树皮完全包住,看不见了。“及已住入”这里要补上“房屋”一词,连起来理解为“已建成的房屋及已住入的房屋”。为了建房屋,把钱付给林地主人,买下树木,用砍下的木料建成那房屋并且已经受用,这是它的意思。“及正坏”这里也要补上“剩下的木料”。建好那房屋后剩下的木料,被雨季日晒等各种因素逐渐侵蚀而正在毁坏,就说为已坏的木料。“取者无任何过”是连接关系。“主人已无所执著”是说取用的人没有罪,这是它的意思。问是什么原因呢?因为林地主人已经收了钱而让给了别人,而他们已毫无留恋地丢弃了这些木料,这就是这里的原因。巴利
Lakkhaṇeti attano santakaṃ ñāpetuṃ rukkhakkhandhe tacaṃ chinditvā katasallakkhaṇe. Challiyonaddheti samantato abhinavuppannāhi challīhi pariyonandhitvā adassanaṃ gamite. Ajjhāvutthañcāti ettha ‘‘geha’’nti pāṭhaseso. Gehaṃ katañca ajjhāvutthañcāti yojanā. Gehaṃ kātuṃ araññasāmikānaṃ mūlaṃ datvā rukkhe kiṇitvā chinnadārūhi taṃ gehaṃ katañca paribhuttañcāti attho. Vinassantañcāti etthāpi ‘‘avasiṭṭhaṃ dāru’’nti pāṭhaseso. Taṃ gehaṃ katvā avasiṭṭhaṃ vassātapādīhi vividhā jīritvā vinassamānaṃ, vipannadārunti vuttaṃ hoti. Gaṇhato na doso kocīti sambandho. ‘‘Sāmikā nirālayā’’ti gaṇhato kācipi āpatti natthīti attho. Kiṃkāraṇanti ce? Araññasāmikehi mūlaṃ gahetvā aññesaṃ dinnattā, tesañca nirālayaṃ chaḍḍitattāti idamettha kāraṇaṃ.
注释里这样说:为了房屋等目的而砍树,当那些房屋已经建好、有人住进去之后,木料在森林里被雨水和日晒毁坏,看到这类东西,当作“已经丢弃”来取用,是合适的。为什么?因为森林主人对这些木料已经没有支配权了。那些先向森林主人给了应施之物才砍伐的人,他们才是主人,而且他们已经把那些木料丢弃了,对那里不再有执著。即使是这样,如果后来主人们要求取回,比丘应当知道那就成了需要赔偿的物品。巴利
Vuttañhetaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘gehādīnaṃ atthāya rukkhe chinditvā yadā tāni katāni, ajjhāvutthāni ca honti, dārūnipi araññe vassena ca ātapena ca vinassanti, īdisānipi disvā ‘chaḍḍitānī’ti gahetuṃ vaṭṭati. Kasmā? Yasmā araññasāmikā etesaṃ anissarā. Yehi araññasāmikānaṃ deyyadhammaṃ datvā chinnāni, te eva issarā, tehi ca tāni chaḍḍitāni, nirālayā tattha jātā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.107). Evampi sati pacchā sāmikesu āharāpentesu bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
如果有比丘进入森林时,没有把应给森林主人的东西交出去,心里想着“出去的时候再给”,就让人把树砍了带走;或者有比丘走到守护的地方,也就是森林守护者坐着看守森林的地方;这里的“思考”一词,因为要搭配另一个动作,所以从语法功能上可以理解为“应该越过”。因此,在“在心中作修行所缘等”这句话里,“等”字以类别含义包含了属于善方面的寻思。应当这样连接来解释:或者思考别的事情,走到守护的地方后就过去。其中,“或者思考别的事情”,就是被别的事情占据,这已经包含了前面所说的那些寻思。“他的”:这里“应施”一词处于与格关系中,因为是属格,所以意思是“以这个”。巴利
Yo cāti araññasāmikānaṃ deyyadhammaṃ pavisanto adatvā ‘‘nikkhamanto dassāmī’’ti rukkhe gāhāpetvā nikkhamanto yo ca bhikkhu. Ārakkhaṭṭhānaṃ patvāti araññapālakā yattha nisinnā araññaṃ rakkhanti, taṃ ṭhānaṃ patvā. ‘‘Cintento’’ti kiriyantarasāpekkhattā ‘‘atikkameyyā’’ti sāmatthiyato labbhati. Tasmā citte kammaṭṭhānādīni katvāti ettha ādi-saddena pakāratthena kusalapakkhiyā vitakkā saṅgayhanti. Aññaṃ cintento vā ārakkhanaṭṭhānaṃ patvāyeva atikkāmeyyāti yojetvā attho vattabbo. Tattha aññaṃ cintento vāti aññaṃ vihito vā, iminā yathāvuttavitakkānaṃ saṅgaho. Assāti ettha ‘‘deyya’’nti kitayoge kattari sāmivacanattā anenāti attho.
在这里,“若”这个字带有“未说出的集合”的含义,因此应当知道:它把下面这些与前面所说情况类似的情形也都包括进来了——进入森林时,没有按前面所说的方式付钱就进了森林,拿了木材要走的时候,心里想“如果森林守护者来要,我就给”,结果因为他们没开口要,就没给便走了;同样,回来以后,遇到守护者在玩耍、睡觉或者外出时,站在那里找守护者,没找到便走了;同样,回来以后,把应当由自己亲手交给当地主管者的东西交出去,或者让人对自己表示尊敬,或者告知守护者,或者向守护者请求许可,得到他们允许后才走——应当知道,这些情况因为和前面所说的相似,所以都被包括在内了。巴利
‘‘Yocā’’ti ettha avuttasamuccayatthena ca-saddena araññapavisanakāle yathāvuttanayena mūlaṃ adatvā araññaṃ pavisitvā dārūni gahetvā gamanakāle ‘‘araññapālakā sace yācanti, dassāmī’’ti parikappetvā gantvā tehi ayācitattā adatvā gacchantopi tatheva āgantvā ārakkhakesu kīḷāpasutesu vā niddāyantesu vā bahi nikkhantesu vā tattha ṭhatvā ārakkhake pariyesitvā adisvā gacchantopi tatheva āgantvā tattha niyuttaissarajanehi attano hatthato dātabbaṃ datvā vā attānaṃ sammānaṃ katvā vā pālake saññāpetvā vā pālake okāsaṃ yācitvā tehi dinnokāso vā gacchantopīti ettakā vuttena sadisattā saṅgahitāti daṭṭhabbā.
野猪就是猪。虎就是老虎。熊就是熊。鬣狗就是黑狮。用“等”字,把豹、象、狮等凶猛的野兽也包括进来。这些野猪等,因为聚在一起,走到死亡等不可意的事物附近,在不可意的事物附近奔跑、活动,所以称为“灾难”。意思是说,到达守护处时所遇到的野猪等灾难。因欲脱离,就是想要解脱。“同样”这句话,是用来说明前一首偈颂里按语法关系已经可以得出的意思:进入时没有给出应施之物,心想“出去的时候再给”,进去后拿了木材,到了守护处。那处,就是那个守护处。越过,应当这样理解:只是没有注意到“这就是那个地方”,因为害怕灾难而逃跑、越过,但还是要赔偿物品。巴利
Varāhāti sūkarā. Vagghāti byagghā. Acchāti issā. Taracchāti kāḷasīhā. Ādi-saddena dīpimattahatthisīhādayo vāḷamigā saṅgayhanti. Eteyeva varāhādayo samāgamavasena maraṇādianiṭṭhasamīpacāritāya upa aniṭṭhasamīpe davanti pavattantīti ‘‘upaddavā’’ti vuccanti. Ārakkhaṭṭhānaṃ āgatakāle diṭṭhavarāhādiupaddavatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Muccitukāmatāyāti mokkhādhippāyena. ‘‘Tathevā’’ti iminā pavisanakāle deyyadhammaṃ adatvā ‘‘nikkhamanakāle dassāmī’’ti pavisitvā dāruṃ gahetvā ārakkhaṭṭhānaṃ pattoti purimagāthāya sāmatthiyato labbhamānoyevattho dassito. Taṃ ṭhānanti taṃ ārakkhaṭṭhānaṃ. Atikkāmetīti ‘‘idaṃ taṃ ṭhāna’’ntipi asallakkhaṇamattabhayupaddavo hutvā palāyanto atikkamati, bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ pana hotīti yojanā.
关于“关税处”这句,这里也应该知道省略了“也”字,意思是“从关税征收处也是如此”。“关税破坏”的意思是:盗取本应缴纳给国王的关税份额而拿走;或者理解为“关税在这里被破坏”,这是词义拆解。“关税破坏”的具体情形后面会显现。所以,“由于关税破坏”是因为它本身的重罪性质。“那”指的是那个关税破坏的场所。“不进入而去”是指没有进入就离开。已教示恶作罪:“回避关税者,犯恶作。”巴利
Suṅkaghātatoti etthāpi pi-saddo luttaniddiṭṭhoti veditabbo, suṅkagahaṇaṭṭhānatopīti attho. Suṅkassa rañño dātabbabhāgassa ghāto musitvā gahaṇamatto, suṅko haññati etthāti vā suṅkaghātoti viggaho. Suṅkaghātasarūpaṃ parato āvi bhavissati. Tasmāti suṅkaghātato tassa garukattā eva. Tanti taṃ suṅkaghātaṭṭhānaṃ. Anokkamma gacchatoti apavisitvā gacchantassa. Dukkaṭaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ ‘‘suṅkaṃ pariharati, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pārā. 113).
这里说的“此”,是指前面所说的守护处。“以盗心回避”是指起了盗心之后回避,然后从远处离开。“即使从空中走,也犯波罗夷”,这是和导师所教导的内容相关联的。巴利
Etanti yathāvuttaārakkhaṭṭhānaṃ. Theyyacittena pariharantassāti theyyacittena pariharitvā dūrato gacchantassa. Ākāsenapi gacchato pārājikamanuddiṭṭhaṃ satthunāti sambandho.
难道注疏里不是这样说过吗:“然而,以盗心回避的人,即使从空中行走,也仍然犯波罗夷。”可是圣典里并没有这句话。在“森林处”这个纲目词的分析中,只是笼统地说:“对那里生长的木头、藤蔓、草,价值五摩沙迦或超过五摩沙迦的东西,以盗心触摸,犯恶作;使它动摇,犯土喇咤亚;把它从原处移开,犯波罗夷。”从这种笼统的说法来看,就像在破坏关税处说“回避关税,犯恶作”一样,这里对回避守护处的人,并没有单独明确说犯波罗夷。既然如此,为什么不说“注疏中”而说“导师”呢?回答说:因为注疏阿阇梨就是这样说的,所以这样说。可是,注疏阿阇梨明明知道“不应教授未教授者,不应废除已教授者”这句圣典文句,为什么还指示圣典中未说的波罗夷呢?对此应当这样理解:因为世尊针对比丘们所问而作出决断的方式,已经传到大注疏中,这位阿阇梨知道那方式本身在《一切欢喜》中已有指示,所以这里也说“导师”。巴利
Nanu ca ‘‘idaṃ pana theyyacittena pariharantassa ākāsena gacchatopi pārājikamevā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.107) aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttavacanaṃ vinā pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘araññaṭṭha’’nti mātikāpadassa vibhaṅge ‘‘tatthajātakaṃ kaṭṭhaṃ vā lataṃ vā tiṇaṃ vā pañcamāsakaṃ vā atirekapañcamāsakaṃ vā agghanakaṃ theyyacitto āmasati, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Phandāpeti, āpatti thullaccayassa. Ṭhānā cāveti, āpatti pārājikassā’’ti (pārā. 106) sāmaññavacanato suṅkaghāte ‘‘suṅkaṃ pariharati, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti vacanaṃ viya ettha ārakkhaṭṭhānaṃ pariharantassa visuṃ vuttapārājikāpattivacane asatipi ‘‘aṭṭhakathāya’’nti avatvā ‘‘satthunā’’ti kasmā āhāti? Vuccate – aṭṭhakathācariyena tatheva vuttattā āha. Kasmā pana aṭṭhakathācariyena ‘‘apaññattaṃ na paññapessāma, paññattaṃ na samucchindissāmā’’ti (pārā. 565) pāḷipāṭhaṃ jānantenapi pāḷiyaṃ avuttapārājikaṃ niddiṭṭhanti? Ettha vinicchayaṃ bhikkhūhi puṭṭhena bhagavatā vuttanayassa mahāaṭṭhakathāya āgatattā tasseva nayassa samantapāsādikāyaṃ niddiṭṭhabhāvaṃ jānantena imināpi ācariyena idha ‘‘satthunā’’ti vuttanti gahetabbaṃ.
或者,在说了“逃避关税,犯恶作”之后,对于守护处所的判定没有提及,可能是因为所说的对象没有被看到,也可能是因为这件事本身没有过失,还可能是因为按照所说的内容容易理解——共有这三种可能。其中,第一种可能因为否定了一切知者而只是错误的猜测。第二种可能,说这种被世间所谴责的行为没有过失,显然不合理,所以不能采用。通过排除法,第三种可能是成立的。巴利
Atha vā ‘‘suṅkaṃ pariharati, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti vatvā ārakkhaṭṭhānavinicchaye avacanaṃ yathāvuttavisayassa adiṭṭhabhāvena vā siyā, imassa tathā anavajjatā vā siyā, vuttānusārena suviññeyyatā vā siyāti tayo vikappā. Tesu paṭhamavikappo sabbaññubhāvabādhanato dubbikappamattaṃ hoti. Dutiyavikappo lokavajjassa imassa anavajjabhāvo nāma anupapannoti anādātabbo. Pārisesato tatiyavikappo yujjati.
在这里,“依照所说的”这句话,到底说的是什么?如果问:依照它,这个也容易理解吗?在最初讲到的森林处所说明里,只是笼统地说“离开处所,犯波罗夷”,并没有说以盗心避开守护处所。也没有另外说:“行走时,如果预先决定‘给了本钱再走’,却不给就走,那就只是决意偷取”,以及“如果以任何方式放弃原先决意的地方而走,就叫离开处所,凭这件事就犯波罗夷”,以及“‘离开处所,犯波罗夷’这句话,就已经把意思说清楚了”。不过,避开税关这件事,因为本质上和避开处所同类,虽然本质上就是这样,却不像这里所说的那样成为决意的地方;为了说明:它虽然和后面要说的国王认可处所以外的决意处所相同,但仅仅因为生起盗心就避开那里而前行的人,就像以盗心拿自己的钵一样,不构成波罗夷,而只是构成恶作这件事,所以说“避开税关,犯恶作”。因为了知世尊意趣的注疏师说“就是波罗夷”,为了显示注疏中所说的意趣,这位论师也说“导师已指示了波罗夷”,所以在这里应当得出结论。巴利
Tattha ‘‘vuttānusārenā’’ti kimettha vuttaṃ nāma, tadanusārena imassāpi suviññeyyatā kathanti ce? Paṭhamaniddiṭṭhe araññaṭṭhaniddese sāmaññena ‘‘ṭhānā cāveti, āpatti pārājikassā’’ti (pārā. 106) idaṃ vuttaṃ, na pana theyyacittena ārakkhaṭṭhānapariharaṇañca. ‘‘Gamanakāle ‘mūlaṃ datvā gamissāmī’ti pubbaparikappitaniyāmena adatvā gacchato parikappāvahārova hotī’’ti ca ‘‘taṃ pana yena kenaci ākārena parikappitaṭṭhānaṃ pahāya gamanaṃ ṭhānācāvanaṃ nāma hotevāti tena vatthunā pārājikameva hotī’’ti ca ‘‘ṭhānā cāveti, āpatti pārājikassā’ti iminā ca viññātatthameva hotī’’ti ca visuṃ na vuttaṃ. Suṅkaṭṭhānapariharaṇaṃ pana ṭhānapariharaṇasabhāvattā sabhāvato īdisaṃva santampi idaṃ viya parikappitaṭṭhānaṃ na hotīti vakkhamānarājasammataṭṭhānato aññaṃ parikappitaṭṭhānaṃ samānampi theyyacittuppattimattena taṃ pariharitvā gacchantassa theyyacittena attano pattaṃ gaṇhantassa viya pārājikāya avatthutañca dukkaṭasseva vatthubhāvañca viññāpetuṃ ‘‘suṅkaṃ pariharati, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti vuttanti bhagavato adhippāyaññunā aṭṭhakathācariyena ‘‘pārājikamevā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.107) vuttattā tena aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttanīhārameva dassetuṃ ayamācariyopi ‘‘satthunā pārājikamanuddiṭṭha’’nti āhāti niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṃ.
“因此”:因为像这样避开之后,即使是以盗心远远躲开而走的人,也由于可能构成波罗夷而变得极其严重,所以说“因此”。“于此”:在这个森林守护的地方。“特别地”:这应当和“应当不放逸”连接起来,作为它的理由。“具念之心”和“爱戒”,都是对“比丘”的修饰语。因为不想修学的比丘不是这番教诫的堪受者,为了排除他,所以说“爱戒”。即使是爱戒的人,如果失去正念,处在放逸的状态,就可能失去依靠,因此也不是这番教诫的堪受者,为了排除这种情况,所以说“具念之心”。巴利
Tasmāti yasmā evaṃ pariharitvā theyyacittena dūrato vajjetvā gacchantassāpi pārājikappahonakatāya accantabhāriyaṃ hoti, tasmā. Etthāti imasmiṃ araññārakkhaṭṭhāne. ‘‘Visesenā’’ti idaṃ ‘‘appamattena hotabba’’nti iminā hetubhāvena sambandhanīyaṃ. Satisampannacetasāti ca piyasīlenāti ca ‘‘bhikkhunā’’ti etassa visesanaṃ. Asikkhākāmassa bhikkhuno imassa ovādassa abhājanatāya taṃ parivajjetumāha ‘‘piyasīlenā’’ti. Piyasīlassāpi sativirahitassa pamattaṭṭhāne saraṇāsambhavā imassa abhājanatāya taṃ vajjetumāha ‘‘satisampannacetasā’’ti.
175-6 在水很难得到的时候:如果某个时候水很难得到,那就是水难得的时候;水难得,那个时间也是水难得之时,所以叫水难得之时,就在那个时候。或者“倾斜”,是指把装水的容器斜过来。或者“放入”,是指把自己的容器放进那里面。或者“穿孔”,是指在装水的容器上弄出个洞,比如擦破等类的孔。这应当和后面要说的“按物品价值来判定”联系起来理解,用来判定偷取者的罪。巴利
175-6.Toyadullabhakālasminti toyaṃ dullabhaṃ yasmiṃ so toyadullabho, toyadullabho ca so kālo cāti toyadullabhakālo, tasmiṃ. Āvajjetvā vāti udakabhājanaṃ nāmetvā vā. Pavesetvā vāti attano bhājanaṃ tasmiṃ pakkhipitvā vā. Chiddaṃ katvāpi vāti udakabhājane omaṭṭhādibhedaṃ chiddaṃ katvā vā gaṇhantassa bhaṇḍagghena viniddiseti vakkhamānena sambandhanīyaṃ.
“如是”:就像在水难得的时候,有人拿走被守护、藏在容器里的水,这被说成是波罗夷,以同样的方式(来判断)。在池塘,指属于别人、有人守护的池塘。在湖,指同类的天然湖泊。对于有守护的莲池等,应当知道,通过上面这些以及没有说到的、用“或”字概括的情况,都包括在内。放入自己的容器而取,这是标示性的说法,应当知道:对容器里的水,以及像这里说的油罐那样,用嘴或者用竹管等吸出来,以偷盗的心喝下去,就要根据具体情况来判定犯什么罪。巴利
Tathāti yathā toyadullabhakālasmiṃ bhājane rakkhitagopitaṃ udakaṃ avaharantassa pārājikaṃ vuttaṃ, teneva nīhārena. Vāpiyaṃ vāti parasantakāya sārakkhāya vāpiyaṃ vā. Taḷāke vāti tādise jātassare vā. Evaṃ sārakkhānaṃ pokkharaṇiādīnaṃ etehi vā avuttasamuccayena vā-saddena vā gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Attano bhājanaṃ pavesetvā gaṇhantassāti upalakkhaṇapadanti bhājanagatajale ca idha ca telabhājane viya mukhena vā vaṃsādīhi vā ākaḍḍhitvā theyyacittena pivantassa yathāvatthukamāpattividhānaṃ veditabbaṃ.
177 “界标”是指池塘等处的围墙堤坝。“切断”是指用锄头等工具把土等掘起来、分成两半。不过,因为“都”这个字有显示特殊含义的作用,所以应该这样理解:为了切断界标而先把它弄松软,然后自己下水,或者让牛、水牛、其他人、玩耍的小孩下水,或者把那些自己本来就下水的人吓唬一番;或者砍断立在水中的树,或者让人砍断,或者推倒,或者让人推倒,借此搅动水流,由搅动而涌起的波浪即使没有直接切断界标,也由于这个行为而算作界标被切断了。同样,牛、水牛等登上界标,或者让别人把它们赶上去,它们的蹄子踩坏了界标;或者堵住、让人堵住水的排水口等;或者在池塘界标的低处筑堤、让人筑堤;或者从多余水量的出口处挡住本该排出的水;或者从外面引水灌满池塘,即使洪水冲断了界标,也由于这个行为而算作界标被切断了——以上这些,就是注疏中所收录的特殊情形。“不与取之前”是指因为这是不与取的前行。“与有情村一起”意思是连同有情村一起。“阿毗”这个字把掘地也合并进来了。切断界标的人,如果切断了生在那里的草等,就和有情村波逸提一起犯恶作。如果切断了生地,就和掘地波逸提一起犯恶作,这是这段话的意趣所在。巴利
177.Mariyādanti vāpiādīnaṃ pāḷivaṭṭabandhaṃ. Chindatoti kudālādīhi paṃsuādīni uddharitvā dvidhā karontassa. Visesatthāvajotakena tu-saddena ‘‘mariyādaṃ chinditvā dubbalaṃ katvā tassa chindanatthāya vīciyo uṭṭhāpetuṃ udakaṃ sayaṃ otaritvā vā gomahiṃse vā aññe manusse vā kīḷante dārake vā otāretvā vā attano dhammatāya otiṇṇe tāsetvā vā udake ṭhitaṃ rukkhaṃ chinditvā vā chedāpetvā vā pātetvā vā pātāpetvā vā jalaṃ khobheti, tato uṭṭhitāhi vīcīhi mariyāde chinnepi teneva chinno hoti. Evameva gomahiṃsādayo mariyādaṃ ārohantenāpi aññehi ārohāpentenāpi tesaṃ khurehi mariyāde chinnepi, udakaniddhamanādiṃ pidahitvā vā pidahāpetvā vā vāpimariyādāya nīcaṭṭhānaṃ bandhitvā vā bandhāpetvā vā atirekajalāpagamanamaggato nīharitabbodakaṃ vāretvā vā bāhirato udakaṃ pavesetvā vā pūreti, oghena mariyāde chinnepi teneva chinnaṃ hotī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.108 atthato samānaṃ) evamādikaṃ aṭṭhakathāgatavisesaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Adinnādānapubbatoti adinnādānassa pubbapayogattā. Bhūtagāmena saddhimpīti bhūtagāmenapi saddhiṃ. Api-saddena pathavikhaṇanaṃ sampiṇḍeti. Mariyādaṃ chindanto tatthajātaṃ tiṇādiṃ chindati, bhūtagāmapācittiyena saddhiṃ dukkaṭaṃ. Jātapathaviṃ chindati, pathavikhaṇanapācittiyena saddhiṃ dukkaṭaṃ āpajjatīti adhippāyo.
178 “应令作”在这里是省略了“依物价之罪”这句话的补充说明。应当按内含之因这一含义来理解“应令作罪”。站在里面切断的,按外面的量;站在外面切断的,按里面的量;站在两处切断的,按中间的物价之罪令作——这是句子的连接方式。这里的意思是:站在池内,切断界标,当水流出到外面时,应按流出之水的价钱,依所犯的恶作、偷兰遮、波罗夷等罪令作。站在外面,切断界标,当水流入池内时,在水离开原来所立之处的那一刹那,应按流出之水的价钱令作罪。有时站在里面、有时站在外面,把界标放在中间而切断的,切断中间所立之处,在水被取走的那一刹那,应按被取走之水的价钱令作罪。巴利
178.Kātabboti ettha ‘‘bhaṇḍagghena āpattiyā’’ti pāṭhaseso. Antobhūtahetvatthavasena kāretabboti gahetabbo. Anto ṭhatvā chindanto bahiantena, bahi ṭhatvā chindanto antoantena, ubhayatthāpi ṭhatvā chindanto majjhato bhaṇḍagghena āpattiyā kāretabboti yojanā. Ayaṃ panettha attho – antovāpiyaṃ ṭhatvā mariyādaṃ chinditvā udake bahi nikkhamite nikkhantaudakagghena dukkaṭathullaccayapārājikāsu yathāpannāya āpattiyā kāretabbo. Bahi ṭhatvā mariyādaṃ chinditvā antovāpiyaṃ pavisantodakassa ṭhitaṭṭhānato cāvitakkhaṇe nikkhantaudakagghena āpattiyā kāretabbo. Kadāci anto kadāci bahi ṭhatvā mariyādaṃ majjhe ṭhapetvā chindanto majjhe ṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ chinditvā udakassa nīhaṭakkhaṇe nīhaṭaudakassa agghena āpattiyā kāretabboti.
179-80 “一次次”的意思是:沙弥们一次次从森林里把齿木取来,是为了给僧团用;如果他们也为各自的老师取来,那么只要他们还没有把齿木按尺寸截断并交给僧团和老师们,因为这些齿木是从森林里取来的,所以所有为僧团和各自老师取来的齿木,都仍然属于那些取齿木的沙弥自己所有——这就是这里义理上的关联。巴利
179-80.Vārenāti vārena vārena sāmaṇerā araññato yaṃ dantakaṭṭhaṃ saṅghassatthāya ānetvā sace ācariyānampi āharanti, yāva te dantakaṭṭhaṃ pamāṇena chinditvā saṅghassa ca ācariyānañca na niyyādenti, tāva araññato ābhatattā taṃ sabbaṃ saṅghassa ca sakasakaācariyānañca ābhataṃ dantakaṭṭhaṃ tesameva ca dantakaṭṭhahārakānaṃ sāmaṇerānaṃ santakaṃ hotīti atthayojanā.
181 “因此”是说:因为那些齿木本来就属于那些沙弥自己,所以叫“因此”。这里要这样连接起来理解:那从森林里取来的齿木,既是僧团的重物,也是齿木。也就是说,生长在僧团土地上、由僧团守护保护的齿木,就成了僧团的重物。至于“及取者”,这里用“及”字,是把注疏中讲到的各种情况都收摄进来:属于团体、属于个人、属于在家众围绕的园林,那里生长出来的、已砍或未砍、受守护保护的齿木,若以盗心去取,就应按所取齿木的价值来判罪。这个意思就在这里说明了。巴利
181.Tasmāti yasmā tesameva sāmaṇerānaṃ santakaṃ hoti, tasmā. Taṃ araññato ābhataṃ dantakaṭṭhañca saṅghassa garubhaṇḍañca dantakaṭṭhanti sambandho. Saṅghikāya bhūmiyaṃ uppannaṃ saṅghena rakkhitagopitattā garubhaṇḍabhūtaṃ dantakaṭṭhañcāti vuttaṃ hoti. Gaṇhantassa cāti adhikaca-kārena ihāvuttassa aṭṭhakathāgatassa gaṇapuggalagihiparibaddha ārāmuyyānasañjātachinnāchinnarakkhitagopitadantakaṭṭhassa samuccitattā tañca theyyacittena gaṇhantassa avahaṭadantakaṭṭhassa agghavasena āpattiyo vattabbāti ayamattho dīpito hoti.
182 那些取齿木的沙弥把它交给了大僧团。巴利
182.Tehi dantakaṭṭhahārakehi sāmaṇerehi. Niyyāditanti mahāsaṅghassa paṭipāditaṃ.
183 183. 从属于僧团的时候开始,即使是以偷盗的心拿取,也因为没有构成“取走”的行为,为了说明其中的理由,而说了“因为没有守护”等话。其中,“因为没有守护”的意思是:虽然是以属于僧团的方式获得的,但就像那些被守护、被保护的齿木一样,因为僧团没有对它加以守护。“不应按长幼次第分配”的意思是:虽然也是属于僧团的,但因为没有像应当按长幼顺序、不越过次第来分配的果实、花等那样可以分配的性质。“以及因为是一切共有的”的意思是:因为属于僧团所摄的一切事物全都共同享有。巴利
183. Saṅghikakālato paṭṭhāya theyyacittena gaṇhatopi avahārābhāve kāraṇaṃ dassetumāha ‘‘arakkhattā’’tiādi. Tattha arakkhattāti saṅghikabhāvena laddhepi rakkhitagopitadantakaṭṭhe viya saṅghena katārakkhāyābhāvā. Yathāvuḍḍhamabhājetabbatoti saṅghikattassāpi sato yathāvuḍḍhaṃ paṭipāṭimanatikkamma bhājetabbaphalapupphādīnaṃ viya bhājetabbatābhāvato. Sabbasādhāraṇattā cāti saṅghapariyāpannānaṃ sabbesameva sādhāraṇattā.
“此”是指僧团已经分配好的齿木。“像别的”是指像属于群体或个人等、被守护看管着的齿木。这样一来,以盗心拿取时,即使没有构成把东西拿走,但因为律中已经说到,以盗心拿自己的资具也属于恶作,所以应当知道,这样拿的人逃不掉恶作。至于行持规范则应当了解:拿僧团齿木的人,如果进入禅堂等处后很久才出来,就要计算在外度过的那一天,按那个数量来拿;赶路的人,要把一两根齿木装进袋子再走;住在那里的人,应当拿当天要嚼的齿木。巴利
Idanti saṅghassa niyyāditadantakaṭṭhaṃ. Aññaṃ viyāti aññaṃ gaṇapuggalādisantakaṃ rakkhitagopitadantakaṭṭhaṃ viya. Evaṃ corikāya gaṇhato avahārābhāve kāraṇena sādhitepi theyyacittena sakaparikkhārampi gaṇhato dukkaṭassa vuttattā tathā gaṇhanto dukkaṭā na muccatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Vattaṃ pana jānitabbaṃ – saṅghikadantakaṭṭhaṃ gaṇhantena padhānagharādīsu pavisitvā cirena osarantena bahi vītināmetabbadivase gaṇetvā taṃpamāṇena gahetabbaṃ, maggaṃ gacchantena ekaṃ dve dantakaṭṭhāni thavikāya pakkhipitvā gantabbaṃ, tattheva vasantena divase khāditabbadantakaṭṭhaṃ gahetabbanti.
184 或给火等句里说的树,要从上下文来判断,因为下文会说树被毁坏;而且按照律典和注疏里说的,树是指枣椰树、波罗蜜树这类人们受用的、属于人的、被守护看管的树。或给火是指以偷盗心对树放火。用刀在树四周砍是指用斧头、锯子等刀具砍树皮,在四周留下砍痕。或用叫蛙刺的毒去刺树是指想以偷盗心毁掉树的人,把叫蛙刺的毒注入树里。巴利
184.‘‘Aggiṃvā detī’’tiādīsu ‘‘rukkhe’’ti pakaraṇato labbhati ‘‘rukkho vinassatī’’ti vakkhamānattā, rukkho ca ‘‘vanappati nāma yo manussānaṃ pariggahito hoti rukkho paribhogo’’ti (pārā. 110) pāḷiyaṃ āgatattā ca aṭṭhakathāya (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.110) ca vuttanayena ambalabujapanasādiko manussānaṃ paribhogāraho manussāyatto rakkhitagopitoyeva gahetabbo. Aggiṃ vā detīti corikāya aggiṃ ālimpeti vā. Satthena rukkhe samantato ākoṭetīti vāsipharasuādisatthena rukkhatacaṃ chindanto samantato āvāṭaṃ dasseti. Maṇḍūkakaṇṭakanāmakaṃ visaṃ vā rukkhe ākoṭetīti corikāya rukkhaṃ nāsetukāmo rukkhe maṇḍūkakaṇṭakanāmakaṃ visaṃ paveseti.
185 “以任何方式”是指用上面说过的或没说过的某种手段。“树被毁坏”是指像给谷堆放火后烧掉、像油瓶那样,不离开原位就照原样消失。“燃烧”这句话是针对“放火”说的。应当知道,“毁坏”是针对青蛙刺、砍击等其余手段说的,因为按照“以盗心砍,每砍一击犯恶作,还没砍到下一击时犯土喇咤亚,那一击砍下时犯波罗夷”的律文,一旦离开原位就构成波罗夷。“已显示”在这里应当是“在注疏中”的意思。不过,律典中出现的波罗夷,也从其余部分暗示出来,因为那位说法者或结集者的话在这里并不存在,所以那里的判定虽然值得称赞,这里也已经说到了。巴利
185.Yena vā tena vāti yathāvuttena vā avuttena vā yena kenaci upāyena. Rukkho vinassatīti aggiṃ datvā jhāpito dhaññakalāpo viya, telakumbhī viya ca vināva ṭhānācāvanena yathāṭṭhitamevanassati. ‘‘Ḍayhatī’’ti idaṃ ‘‘aggiṃ detī’’ti idaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Vinassatīti maṇḍūkakaṇṭakākoṭanādiavasesapayogaṃ sandhāya vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ ‘‘theyyacitto chindati, pahāre pahāre āpatti dukkaṭassa, ekaṃ pahāraṃ anāgate āpatti thullaccayassa, tasmiṃ pahāre āgate āpatti pārājikassā’’ti (pārā. 110) ṭhānācāvanena pārājikassa āgatattā. Pakāsitanti ettha ‘‘aṭṭhakathāya’’nti labbhati. Pāṭhāgataṃ pārājikaṃ pana pārisesato ca sūcīyatīti tabbācakassa vā saṅgāhakassa vā vacanassa ihāvijjamānattā tattha vinicchayo pāsaṃsikopi ihāvutto.
186-7 在解释“取者”的律文“从原位移开,犯波罗夷”时,为了说明注疏中对“原位”的判定——即依据所执取的头部等不同位置来区分——所以说“切断后解开而取”。因为诸行为各自有其所作用的对象,“装饰品”是律文省略的部分。“切断”指颈饰等物,“解开”指耳环等物。巴利
186-7. ‘‘Haraṇakaṃ nāma aññassa haraṇakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ. Theyyacitto āmasati, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Phandāpeti, āpatti thullaccayassa. Ṭhānā cāveti, āpatti pārājikassā’’ti (pārā. 111) vuttaharaṇakaniddese ‘‘ṭhānā cāveti, āpatti pārājikassā’’ti (pārā. 111) pāṭhe ‘‘ṭhāna’’nti gahitasīsādiṭṭhānappabhedavasena aṭṭhakathāya (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.110) āgatavinicchayaṃ dassetumāha ‘‘chinditvā mocetvā gaṇhato’’ti. Kiriyānaṃ sakammakattā ‘‘alaṅkāra’’nti pāṭhaseso. Chinditvāti gīveyyakādiṃ. Mocetvāti kaṇṇapiḷandhanādiṃ.
在“于头等处解开之量”这一句里,为了显示这里也应加以区分,应当同样以依格单数来理解“于装饰品”一词。关于“拉来与拉去”:朝自己方向拉,叫“拉来”,也就是向自己近旁牵引;反方向的拉,叫“拉去”,也就是与那相反的拉拽。巴利
Sīsādīhimocitamattasminti etthāpi visesitabbadassanatthaṃ ‘‘alaṅkārasmi’’nti tameva bhummekavacanantavasena gahetabbaṃ. Ākaḍḍhanavikaḍḍhananti ettha abhimukhaṃ kaḍḍhanaṃ ākaḍḍhananti katvā attano samīpamāviñchanaṃ ākaḍḍhanaṃ, viparītaṃ kaḍḍhanaṃ vikaḍḍhananti katvā tabbiparītaṃ vikaḍḍhanaṃ.
188-9 手镯,是指没有弯曲、表面光滑、适合戴在手上的饰物。或者臂环,是指把多个环连接起来做成的,或者做成显示气泡等样式、或者不显示气泡等样式、适合戴在手上的饰物。从上臂,是指从肘部开始到手掌的部分。使来回移动,是指从这里到那里来回移动。或者读作使行,意思相同。那手镯或臂环(「此」指手镯与臂环)。使成空中,是指从各个方向都不碰到手,这样使它悬在空中。在埋藏手镯的树根处,如果从各个方向都不接触而使其悬空,就构成波罗夷。这里为什么说「守护」呢?回答说:因为有情识……等。此,是指手镯与臂环。巴利
188-9.Valayanti avaṅkaṃ maṭṭhahatthūpagaṃ. Kaṭakampi vāti anekavaṅke yojetvā bubbuḷādīni dassetvā vā adassetvā vā kataṃ hatthūpagaṃ. Aggabāhunti kapparato paṭṭhāya aggahatthaṃ. Aparāparaṃ cāretīti ito cito ca sañcāreti. ‘‘Sāretī’’ti vā pāṭho, soyeva attho. Taṃ valayaṃ vā kaṭakaṃ vā. Ākāsagataṃ karotīti sabbadisāhi yathā hatthaṃ na phusati, tathā ākāsagataṃ karoti. Nidhivalayassa pavesitarukkhamūle sabbadisāhi aphusantaṃ ākāsagatakaraṇe pārājikaṃ hoti, idha ‘‘rakkhatī’’ti kasmā vuttanti āha ‘‘saviññāṇakato’’tiādi. Idanti valayaṃ kaṭakañca.
190 “所穿之衣”这句话也把衣包括在内。他人的,就是他人衣服主人的。他人也指他人衣服的主人。那件衣,是指自己被盗贼割断时身上穿着的那件衣。因为羞耻而不立刻放开,意思是由于羞耻而不马上舍弃。巴利
190.‘‘Nivatthaṃ vattha’’nti iminā cīvarampi gayhati. Parassa vatthasāmikassa. Paropīti vatthasāmikopi. Tanti corena acchijjamānaṃ attanā nivatthavatthaṃ. Lajjāya sahasā na muñcatīti lajjāya sīghataraṃ na pariccajati.
191 盗贼也拖拽,另一个人也拖拽,这是句义的连接。另一个人,是指盗贼以外的其他人,也就是衣物的主人。他人的,是指衣物主人的。巴利
191. Coropi ākaḍḍhati, so paropi ākaḍḍhatīti yojanā. So paro corato añño, vatthasāmikoti attho. Parassāti vatthasāmikassa.
192 “应从处所移动”这一读法中,通过“处所”这个词,包含了从头部等部位被移离的意思,因此称为搬运物。在说明了以移动装饰品等物品而构成波罗夷之后,现在要显示:对于那同一个搬运物,连同搬运者一起搬运时,将搬运者从他站立的位置移开,这也同样构成“从处所移动”,而这个意思已经被“应从处所移动”这句话涵盖。为了说明其中的判定,所以接着说“连同物品搬运者”等。“搬运物品者”,就是搬运物品的人,比如男子等;“连同彼”,就是连同物品搬运者,也就是那些带着装饰品、衣服等行走的女人、男子等有情。“物品”,因为被他们搬运,所以称为搬运物,即衣服、装饰品等物。“牵引其”:“牵引其”是词的分割。“牵引”,指从站立之处移开,引向自己想要的方向。“其于第一足跨越时犯土喇咤亚”,这是与后文连接的读法。“其”,指这个物品搬运者。“于第一足跨越时”,指从自己原先应去的方向,朝着盗贼想要的方向迈出第一步时,犯土喇咤亚;“于第二足跨越时堕”,这是连属句。巴利
192. ‘‘Ṭhānā cāveyyā’’ti pāṭhe ṭhāna-saddena saṅgahitasīsādiṭṭhānato harīyateti haraṇakanti vuttālaṅkārādibhaṇḍassa cāvanena pārājikaṃ dassetvā idāni tadeva haraṇakaṃ hārakena saha harantassa hārakassa ṭhitaṭṭhānato apanayanena ṭhānācāvanañca ‘‘ṭhānā cāveyyā’’ti imināva saṅgayhatīti tatthāpi vinicchayaṃ dassetumāha ‘‘sabhaṇḍahāraka’’ntiādi. Bhaṇḍaṃ harati netīti bhaṇḍahārako, purisādiko, tena sahāti sabhaṇḍahārakaṃ, alaṅkāravatthādīni ādāya gacchantehi itthipurisādipāṇehi saheva. Bhaṇḍanti tehi hariyamānattā haraṇakasaṅkhātavatthābharaṇādibhaṇḍaṃ . Nentassāti ‘‘nento assā’’ti padacchedo. Nentoti ṭhitaṭṭhānato cāvetvā attanā icchitadisābhimukhaṃ pāpento. Assa paṭhame pāde atikkante thullaccayaṃ āpajjitvāti pāṭhasesayojanā. Assāti imassa bhaṇḍahārakassa. Paṭhamapāde atikkante attanā paṭhamaṃ gantabbadisato corassābhimatadisaṃ gate thullaccayaṃ āpajjitvā dutiye atikkante cuto siyāti yojanā.
193 193. 如果怀着盗心,用恐吓的方式让物品从别人手中掉落,那么当物品从别人手中脱落的那一刹那,恐吓令物品掉落的人就犯了波罗夷。这是句义的关联。所谓“物品脱落之际”,是指物品从手中脱落,哪怕只离开发尖那么一点点的那一刹那。巴利
193. Theyyacetano sace tajjetvā parassa hatthato bhaṇḍaṃ pātāpeti, parassa hatthato bhaṇḍe muttamatte tajjetvā pātāpakassa parājayoti yojanā. Bhaṇḍe muttamatteti bhaṇḍe hatthato kesaggamattampi muttakkhaṇe.
194 另外,“或者”就是“或者”。在“思量之后令其掉落”这一句里,意思是:心里想“凡是我喜欢的,我就要拿”,或者想“如果是这样的东西,我就要拿”,这样特别加以分别、思量之后,再恐吓对方,使物品掉落,这犯恶作。这样令物品掉落后,那个盗贼触摸物品时,也犯恶作——这就是这段连接起来的意思。巴利
194.Athāpīti atha vā. Parikappetvā pātāpeti vāti ettha ‘‘yaṃ mayhaṃ ruccati, taṃ gaṇhissāmī’’ti vā ‘‘evarūpaṃ ce hoti, gaṇhissāmī’’ti visesetvā vā parikappetvā tajjetvā pāteti, dukkaṭaṃ. Evaṃ pātitaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ tassa corassa āmasane dukkaṭaṃ vuttanti yojanā.
195 如物是指与物品的价值相应,意思是犯土喇咤亚。即使已经丢弃:是指知道那人是盗贼后,自己因恐惧战栗而携带物品时,即使物品已被丢弃。正因为如此,使物品从原来的位置移动,不应取为波罗夷,所以说无罪。然而,当说站住!站住!时,他因害怕而丢弃,那是在没有他命令的情况下发生的,所以在他那里没有犯戒,这是意思所在。不过,对这样说的人,因为有不与取的前行,所以只是恶作。巴利
195.Yathāvatthunti bhaṇḍassa agghānurūpaṃ, thullaccayaṃ hotīti adhippāyo. Chaḍḍitepīti tassa corabhāvaṃ jānitvā bhītatasitena attanā nīyamāne bhaṇḍe chaḍḍitepi sati. Teneva ṭhānācāvanaṃ kārāpitanti pārājikanti na gahetabbanti āha ‘‘na doso’’ti. ‘‘Tiṭṭha tiṭṭhā’’ti vutte pana uttasitvā chaḍḍanaṃ tassa āṇattiyā vinā hotīti tattha tassa anāpattīti adhippāyo. Tathā vadato pana adinnādānapubbapayogattā dukkaṭameva.
196 “彼”是指那件已经被丢弃的物品。“取回彼”是指把已经丢弃的那件物品取回来,这就犯波罗夷。什么时候会犯波罗夷呢?回答说:“当主人还对该物品有执著而离开时。”不过,如果是毫无执著地丢弃的物品,取它的人没有盗心,就没有罪过。这是通过反面的情况来显示。巴利
196.Tanti taṃ chaḍḍitaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ. Taduddhāreti tassa chaḍḍitassa bhaṇḍassa uddhāre pārājikaṃ. Pārājikaṃ kadā siyāti āha ‘‘sāmike sālaye gate’’ti. Nirālayaṃ chaḍḍitaṃ pana gaṇhato asati theyyacitte na dosoti byatirekato dasseti.
197 197. 为了说明即使物主在贪著物品时把它拿走,也仍然不构成波罗夷的情况,所以说“拿取时”。前一偈中的“那”在这里继续沿用。“以己物想而拿取”,指的是从“站住!站住!”的喊声而害怕,物主怀着贪著丢下了物品,比丘以己物想拿取那件东西。“取时”是指以己物想而取的原因;以己物想所取的物品,因为比丘自身取走的缘故,使他免于犯盗罪,所以说是守护。意思就是这样。因此说“然而在取时则守护”。应当接续理解为“然而物品是应给予的”。“如是”这个词,是用来指明“在取时守护”这个意思。巴利
197. Sāmikassa sālayakāle gaṇhantassāpi pārājikābhāvappakāraṃ dassetumāha ‘‘gaṇhato’’ti. Pubbagāthāya ‘‘ta’’nti idhānuvattate. Sakasaññāyagaṇhatoti ‘‘tiṭṭha tiṭṭhā’’ti vacanato uttasitvā sālayaṃ chaḍḍitaṃ taṃ vatthuṃ sakasaññāya gaṇhantassa. Gahaṇeti sakasaññāya gahaṇahetu, sakasaññāya gahitabhaṇḍaṃ attano gahaṇakāraṇā bhikkhuṃ avahārāpattito rakkhatīti adhippāyo . Tenāha ‘‘gahaṇe pana rakkhatī’’ti. Bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ pana hotīti yojanā. ‘‘Tathā’’ti iminā gahaṇe rakkhatīti atidisati.
198-9 把重担丢掉,意思是心里毫无留恋地想:“我要这些东西干什么?保住命才更要紧。”因此说“因为害怕盗贼而逃跑”。这里“盗贼”一词是表示原因的夺格。“取”这个字这里省略了“那”,意思是“像那样丢弃的那件东西”。在救起时犯恶作,意思是:即使东西本身没有过失,但因为怀着盗心,就犯恶作;如果没有盗心,就连恶作也没有。“令取来”这里用的是表示状态的位格,意思是:当那件东西的主人让人来取时。巴利
198-9.Dhuranikkhepaṃ katvāti ‘‘mayhaṃ kimetena bhaṇḍena, jīvitarakkhanameva varatara’’nti nirālayo hutvā. Tenāha ‘‘bhīto corā palāyatī’’ti. Corāti ettha ca hetumhi nissakkaṃ. Gaṇhatoti ettha ‘‘ta’’nti pāṭhaseso, tathā chaḍḍitaṃ taṃ bhaṇḍanti attho. Uddhāre dukkaṭanti vatthumhi anavajjepi theyyacittavasena dukkaṭaṃ hoti, asati theyyacitte dukkaṭampi na hotīti vuttaṃ hoti. Āharāpenteti ettha bhāvalakkhaṇe bhummaṃ, tasmiṃ bhaṇḍasāmini āharāpente satīti attho.
200 200. 对于无所执著者所丢弃的东西,在拿取时,为什么构成给还物品,且对不偿还者构成败北呢?为此说“那东西的”等语。“在其他诸说中”,是指在《大筏疏》等其他注释书中。巴利
200. Nirālayena chaḍḍitavatthuno gahaṇe bhaṇḍadeyyañca adentassa parājayo ca kasmāti āha ‘‘tassā’’tiādi. Aññāsūti mahāpaccariyādīsu itarāsu aṭṭhakathāsu.
201 在“寄托物”的讨论中,应这样连接:他说“我不拿”,就是故意妄语。意思是:有人私下把东西交给他,说“请替我保管这件东西,以后再还我”;后来物主说“还我那件东西”时,他为了彻底占有,就故意妄语说“我不拿”。“我拿”就是“我已拿”。这里是用现在时的说法表达过去的意思。既然“故意妄语”是波逸提这条学处的范围,为什么这里说成恶作呢?所以回答说“因为以不与取为前行”等。其中,“因为以不与取为前行”,是指它与不与取同时发生而成为其先行,并不是指预备行为。因为在不与取的预备行为阶段,波逸提的场合里并没有恶作。因此注疏中说:“因为是不与取的加行。”巴利
201. Upanidhikathāya ‘‘na gaṇhāmī’’ti sampajānamusāvādaṃ bhāsatoti yojanā. Yena kenaci rahasi ‘‘idaṃ mayhaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ paṭisāmetvā dehī’’ti niyyāditaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ pacchā sāmikena ‘‘dehi me taṃ bhaṇḍa’’nti vutte accantamupagantuṃ ‘‘nāhaṃ gaṇhāmī’’ti sampajānamusāvādaṃ bhāsatoti attho. Gaṇhāmīti aggahesiṃ. Accantā heso atīte vattamānappayogoyaṃ. ‘‘Sampajānamusāvāde pācittiya’’nti (pāci. 2) imassa sikkhāpadassa visaye kasmā dukkaṭaṃ vuttanti āha ‘‘adinnādānapubbakattā’’tiādi. Tattha adinnādānapubbakattāti adinnādānassa sahapayogavasena pubbaṅgamattā, na pubbapayogattā. Na hi adinnādānassa pubbapayoge pācittiyaṭṭhāne dukkaṭamatthīti. Tenevāha aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘adinnādānassa payogattā’’ti.
202 “此之”是指在这附近。“将给什么”就是给什么。“令生疑惑”中“令生”一词的处格形式,表示原因。“彼之”是指那个比丘附近所寄存之物,属于那个人。巴利
202.Etassāti etassa samīpe. Kiṃ nu dassatīti dassati kiṃ nu. Vimatuppādeti hetumhi bhummaṃ. Tassāti yassa bhikkhuno santike upanikkhittaṃ, tassa.
203 于彼处,即物品寄放在哪位比丘那里,就是指那位比丘。在布施方面没有努力,意思是:当物品的主人对于寄放在自己处的物品,在布施这件事上没有付出努力时,(比丘心想)「我现在不还给他了」,这样就叫舍弃负担。所以经文说「两者都舍弃负担」。「他人」指物品的主人。「负担」指「我要用任何办法拿回来」的那份努力。「舍弃」就是应当舍弃。巴利
203.Tasminti yasmiṃ upanikkhittaṃ, tasmiṃ bhikkhumhi. Dāne nirussāheti attani nikkhittassa bhaṇḍassa sāmikassa dānavisaye ussāharahite sati, ‘‘na dāni taṃ dassāmī’’ti dhuranikkhepe kateti adhippāyo. Tenevāha ‘‘ubhinnaṃ dhuranikkhepe’’ti. Paroti bhaṇḍasāmiko. Dhuranti ‘‘yena kenaci ākārena gaṇhissāmī’’ti ussāhaṃ. Nikkhipeti nikkhipeyya.
204 “不想给”这里,要补上“若那(盗贼)”这个说法。“若”是“也”的意思。如果盗贼只是心里不想给,嘴上却说“我会给”,这样连接起来理解。或者,“不想给”这里要补上“成为”。前面说的“若”就是这个意思。“如是”和“波罗夷”搭配。心里不想给,嘴上却说“我会给”,当物主放弃负担时,就犯波罗夷,这样连接起来理解。巴利
204.Cittenādātukāmovāti ettha ‘‘yo tassā’’ti pāṭhaseso. Ceti api-saddatthe. Yo coro cittena adātukāmova, tassa corassa ‘‘dassāmī’’ti mukhena vadatopīti yojanā. Atha vā adātukāmoti ettha ‘‘hutvā’’ti pāṭhaseso. Ceti vuttattho. Evāti ‘‘parājayo’’ti iminā yujjati. Cittena adātukāmo hutvā mukhena ‘‘dassāmī’’ti vadatopi sāmino dhuranikkhepe sati parājayo hotevāti yojanā.
205 205.“关税处”是指:经文里说“所谓关税处,就是国王在山崖、河岸或村口设立的地方”,而注疏中解释其词义说“从那里征收关税……乃至……使其丧失”,也就是国王等各地领主对那些山崖等处所规定的:“从今以后,凡运送货物经过,应按此数量收取这些王税。”所谓“外”,是指为了征收关税而划定的界限之外。所谓“使落”,这里从“以盗心”这一上下文可以推知。应补上“国王应得的货物”这一句。对于任何货物,其中价值五摩沙迦或超过五摩沙迦、应归属国王等当地领主的那一部分,以盗心使其落到界限之外,这样投掷出去,就是这里的意思。所谓“必定落”,这里也应补上“那”字,从“货物”这一上下文可以推知。意思是:怎样投掷,那货物就完全落到外面。就在那货物从手中脱落的那一刻。巴利
205.Suṅkaghātassāti ‘‘suṅkaghātaṃ nāma raññā ṭhapitaṃ hoti pabbatakhaṇḍe vā nadītitthe vā gāmadvāre vā’’ti (pārā. 113) pāḷiyaṃ āgatassa ‘‘suṅkaṃ tato hananti…pe… vināsentī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.113) aṭṭhakathāyaṃ niruttassa ‘‘ito paṭṭhāya nīyamāne bhaṇḍe ettakato ettakaṃ rājabhāgaṃ gahetabba’’nti rājādīhi taṃtaṃpadesasāmikehi niyamitassa pabbatakhaṇḍādiṭṭhānassa. Bahīti suṅkagahaṇatthāya parikappitasīmato bahi. Pātetīti ettha ‘‘theyyacitto’’ti pakaraṇato labbhati. ‘‘Rājārahaṃ bhaṇḍa’’nti pāṭhaseso. Yato kutoci bhaṇḍato pañcamāsakaṃ vā atirekapañcamāsakaṃ vā agghanako bhāgo rājādidesasāmikassa dātabbo hoti, tādisaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ theyyacitto yathā bahi patati, evaṃ khipatīti attho. Dhuvaṃ patatīti etthāpi ‘‘ta’’nti pāṭhaseso, ‘‘bhaṇḍa’’nti pakaraṇato labbhati. Yathā khittaṃ taṃ bhaṇḍaṃ ekantena bahi patatīti. Hatthato muttamatte tasmiṃ bhaṇḍe.
206 206. “必定落下”这里,为了显示差别,所以说“那在树上”等等。“那”是指以盗心向外投掷的货物被挡住,这是句子的关联。也应采用“也被风吹”的读法。“被风吹”则应看作语法上的性别颠倒。巴利
206. ‘‘Dhuvaṃ patatī’’ti ettha byatirekaṃ dassetumāha ‘‘taṃ rukkhe’’tiādi. Tanti theyyāya bahi pātetuṃ khittaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ paṭihataṃ hutvāti yojanā. Vātakkhittampi vāti pāṭho gahetabbo. ‘‘Vātakkhitto’’ti liṅgavipallāso vā daṭṭhabbo.
207 “之后”是指在掉落的地方稍微停留一下。这里要说明的是:仅仅这样稍微延迟一点点,通过努力应当完成的事就已经完成了,波罗夷的成因也就已经具足了。因此说“可能构成波罗夷”。巴利
207.Pacchāti patitaṭṭhāne thokaṃ cirāyitvā, iminā thokampi cirāyitamatte payogasādhiyaṃ kāriyaṃ siddhamevāti pārājikassa kāraṇaṃ sampannamevāti dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘pārājikaṃ siyā’’ti.
208 用“站立”等说法,是在说明:即使有人在掉落的地方没有停留多久就离开了,但如果他从那个向外掉落的地方,又在别处停留了一段时间,那么通过向外抛掷的努力所要完成的事就已经完成了,这就显示波罗夷的原因已经成立。因此说“败北”。用“不站立”等说法,是在说明:不论在什么地方,只要没有停留,努力就没有意义。因此说“守护”。巴利
208.‘‘Ṭhatvā’’tiādinā patitaṭṭhāne acirāyitvā gatepi tasmiṃ bahi patitaṭṭhānato itaratrāpi cirāyitena bahi pātanappayogena sādhiyaṃ kāriyaṃ siddhamevāti pārājikakāraṇassa siddhataṃ dasseti. Tenevāha ‘‘parājayo’’ti. ‘‘Atiṭṭhamāna’’ntiādinā yattha katthaci acirāyanena payogassa niratthakataṃ dasseti. Tenevāha ‘‘rakkhatī’’ti.
209 所谓“那”,指的是注疏里的说法。巴利
209.Tanti aṭṭhakathāvacanaṃ.
210 自己转动:站在界内,自己用手、用脚或用棍子,把东西转向界外的低处。不站立:只是在转动的那一瞬间,不站在界内任何地方。正转动:正在转动。去:去到界外,哪怕只是越过一个发尖那么小的距离,也已经算是越过界内了。巴利
210.Sayaṃ vā vaṭṭetīti anto ṭhito sayaṃ vā hatthena vā pādena vā yaṭṭhiyā vā bahisīmāya ninnaṭṭhānaṃ parivaṭṭeti. Aṭṭhatvāti pavaṭṭitamatte anto katthacipi aṭṭhatvā. Vaṭṭamānanti pavaṭṭantaṃ. Gatanti bahisīmaṃ kesaggamattaṭṭhānampi antosīmamatikkamamattaṃ.
211 211. “那件物品如果在界内停住又停住,然后到了界外”,这是句子的连接方式。意思是:如果在界内停住又停住之后,到了界外。所谓“守护”:因为在界内时,随着最初那一动的退回,这位比丘的加行之力就已经退回了;从此之后,由于不再有应当退回的理由,而且物品已经自己离去,所以那件到达界外的物品,就守护了以它为根本而发起加行的比丘,使他不成罪——这是这里的意趣。所谓“以清净心放置”:没有“这样放好之后它会滚出去”的盗心,只是以“我就是要放下”的心,把物品朝界外方向的低处放下去。“自己转动”:物品自己转向低处,如果它正转动着到了界外。“适当”:因为不构成罪,所以适当。巴利
211. Taṃ bhaṇḍaṃ sace anto ṭhatvā ṭhatvā bahi gacchatīti yojanā. Yadi antosīmāya ṭhatvā ṭhatvā bahisīmaṃ gacchatīti attho. Rakkhatīti antosīmāya paṭhamagatinivattaneneva etassa bhikkhuno payogavegassa nivattattā, tato upari nivattanārahakāraṇassa aladdhabhāvena attanā ca gatattā tathā bahisīmappattaṃ taṃ bhaṇḍaṃ taṃmūlakapayojakaṃ bhikkhuṃ āpattiyā rakkhatīti adhippāyo. Suddhacittena ṭhapiteti ‘‘evaṃ ṭhapite vaṭṭitvā gamissatī’’ti theyyacittena vinā ‘‘kevalaṃ ṭhapessāmī’’ti cittena bahisīmābhimukhaṃ ninnaṭṭhānaṃ otāretvā ṭhapite. Sayaṃ vaṭṭatīti bhaṇḍaṃ sayameva ninnaṭṭhānaṃ ninnaṃ hutvā bahisīmaṃ ce pavaṭṭantaṃ gacchati. Vaṭṭatīti āpattiyā akaraṇato vaṭṭati.
212 “正在走”是指没有盗贼的加行,自己走去的。“那”是指属于国王应征收的、达到五摩沙迦或超过五摩沙迦量的应纳税物品。“即使被拿走,也没有夺取”:这是句子的连接。因为仅仅有盗心并不构成犯戒的条件,因为没有驱车等加行者的身语加行,因为放置物品的车等自己到达了界外,而且正因为如此物品也已经离去,所以比丘不构成夺取。这是这段话的意思。巴利
212.Gacchanteti corassa payogaṃ vinā attanāva gacchante. Tanti rājadeyyapañcamāsakaatirekapañcamāsakamattaṃ suṅkavantaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ. Nīhaṭepi nāvahāroti yojanā. Kevalaṃ theyyacittassa āpattiyā anaṅgabhāvato, yānādipayojakakāyavacīpayogassa abhāvato, bhaṇḍaṭṭhapitayānādino attanāva bahisīmappattattā, teneva bhaṇḍassāpi gatattā ca bhikkhuno avahāro natthīti attho.
213 依靠加行而毁灭,即没有盗贼自身的加行。在这里,“无夺取”不存在,其道理和前面所说的一样。巴利
213.Payogena vināti corassa sakapayogamantarena. Avahāro na vijjatīti ettha yutti vuttanayāva.
214 “宝珠”是指适合佩戴在脚上、应当纳税的宝珠珍宝;这里正是用它作为标示词,所以任何物品都已被涵盖在内。“应成波罗夷”:意思是说,因为车子是由他自己驾驶的。“超越界”:是指越过了为收税所规定的处所。巴利
214.Maṇinti pādārahaṃ suṅkadātabbamaṇiratanaṃ, eteneva upalakkhaṇapadattā yaṃkiñci bhaṇḍaṃ saṅgahitameva. Pārājikaṃ siyāti yānassa attanā pājitattāti adhippāyo. Sīmātikkamaneti suṅkaggahaṇassa niyamitaṭṭhānātikkamane.
215 所谓“量”,就是国王们认可的“从这么多货物里该取这么多”。其余的判例部分,则是像“到了税关,税吏在睡觉、在玩,或者出去了,找也找不到就走了,这没有过错,但货物还是该交税”这一类裁决的整套说法。“与《林野义疏》相同”,是说和“凡是到了守护处”等文句所说的《林野义疏》内容相似。巴利
215.Matanti ‘‘ettakabhaṇḍato ettakaṃ gahetabba’’nti rājūhi anumataṃ. Seso kathāmaggoti ‘‘suṅkaṭṭhānaṃ patvā suṅkikesu niddāyamānesu, kīḷantesu, bahigatesu vā pariyesitvā adisvā gacchato na doso, bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ hotī’’ti evamādiko vinicchayakathāmaggo. Araññaṭṭhakathāsamoti ‘‘yo cārakkhaṭṭhānaṃ patvā’’tiādinā (vi. vi. 170) yathāvuttaaraññaṭṭhakathāya sadiso,
把业处放在心中之后,
一边想着,心却跑到别处去了;
到了税关之后,就继续走。
货物税确实是要交的。巴利
‘‘Kammaṭṭhānaṃ citte katvā; Cintento aññavihito; Suṅkaṭṭhānaṃ patvā gacche; Bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ hotevassā’’ti. –
就像按前面那种方式所说的那样。正因为这个道理已经讲清楚了,所以现在不再讨论,这就是这里的用意。巴利
Ādinā nayena vuccamānasadisoyeva. Teneva gatatthatāya idāni na vicārīyatīti adhippāyo.
216 “生命”是指人的生命,这是经里的说法;注疏里也说“即使把那个自由人带走,也不构成不与取”,所以这里说的“生命”只指属于他人的奴隶。为了说明这一点,才说“家生”等等。在自家女奴肚子里由奴隶所生的,叫“家生”,或者就是指这种人。用钱财买来的,叫“财买”,或者就是指这种人。或者由某人赠送——比如舅父、祖父等亲戚中,有人把他当奴隶送出去,或者就是指这种人。“奴隶”这个词要分别跟各种情况搭配。或者是“战俘带来的奴隶”,意思是掠夺别国、把人带回来、当作奴隶占有的,就叫战俘带来的奴隶。关于“带走者犯波罗夷”:这里的意思是,如果起了“我要用盗心带走”的念头,触摸时犯恶作,令其动弹时犯土喇咤亚,当使他从所站的地方移动哪怕一根头发那么一点,就构成波罗夷。巴利
216. ‘‘Pāṇo nāma manussapāṇo vuccatī’’ti (pārā. 114) pāḷito ca ‘‘tampi bhujissaṃ harantassa avahāro natthī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.114) aṭṭhakathāvacanato ca paradāsamanussoyeva adhippetoti tameva dassetumāha ‘‘antojāta’’ntiādi. Gehadāsiyā kucchimhi dāsassa jāto antojāto nāma, taṃ vā. Dhanena kīto dhanakkīto, taṃ vā. Dinnaṃ vā pana kenacīti mātulaayyakādīsu yena kenaci dāsaṃ katvā dinnaṃ vā. Dāsanti paccekaṃ sambandhanīyaṃ. Karamarānītaṃ vā dāsanti paravisayaṃ vilumpitvā ānetvā dāsabhāvāya gahitasaṅkhātaṃ karamarānītadāsaṃ vā. Harantassa parājayoti ettha ‘‘corikāya harissāmī’’ti āmasane dukkaṭaṃ, phandāpane thullaccayaṃ āpajjitvā ṭhitaṭṭhānato kesaggamattampi atikkāmayato pārājikaṃ hotīti adhippāyo.
217 “自由人”是指对任何人来说都不属于奴隶身份的人。“人”是指人类种性的众生。“已放置”是指已寄存之物。巴利
217.Bhujissaṃ vāti yassa kassaci manussassa adāsabhūtaṃ. Mānusanti manussajātikaṃ sattaṃ. Āṭhapitanti upanikkhittaṃ.
218 “那”是指家生奴隶等当中的任何一个奴隶。“想让逃走”,就是想要让他逃跑、想要把他带出去。或者也可以这样理解:用双臂把那个奴隶抱起来,这就叫“他想让这个奴隶逃走”。“用双臂”,就是用两只手。“从那站立处”,那个奴隶站立的地方就是“那站立处”,从那地方、从那站立处。这样说,是为了表明不能理解成“从盗贼自己站立的地方”。“移动任何”,就是让他从那里挪到另一个地方,哪怕只有一根头发尖那么一点距离。“或用双臂”这里的“或”字,是关联到下面将要说的另一种方式,应当连起来理解为“或者移动”。巴利
218.Tanti antojātādīsu dāsesu yaṃ kañci dāsaṃ. Palāyitukāmovāti palāpetukāmo nīharitukāmo. Atha vā taṃ dāsaṃ bhujehi ukkhipitvā ayaṃ palāyitukāmotipi attho gahetabbo. Bhujehīti ubhohi hatthehi. Taṃ ṭhitaṭṭhānatoti tassa ṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ taṃṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ, tato taṃṭhitaṭṭhānato, corena attanā ṭhitaṭṭhānatoti attho na gahetabboti dassetumevaṃ vuttaṃ. Kiñci saṅkāmetīti kesaggamattampi tato aññaṃ ṭhānaṃ pāpeti. Bhujehi vāti ettha vā-saddo vakkhamānapakārantarāpekkho, ‘‘saṅkāmeti vā’’ti yojetabbaṃ.
219 “使他惊恐之后”:就是用让人害怕的话、暗示或者动作吓唬他,然后带着他走;这里“他”和“他的”是相互关联的。“从步道”:应当这样理解——与步道相应,就有土喇咤亚等罪成立。意思是:与第一步道相应,是土喇咤亚罪;与第二步道相应,则是波罗夷罪。巴利
219.Tajjetvāti bhayakarena vacanena lesena, iṅgitena vā tāsetvā nentassa tassāti sambandho. Padavāratoti padavārena yuttā thullaccayādayo āpattiyo hontīti yojanā. Paṭhamapadavārayuttā thullaccayāpatti, dutiyapadavārayuttā pārājikāpatti hotīti attho.
220 “手等”中的“等”字,把头发、衣布等也包括进来了。“那”指的是奴仆。“即使被拖拉”就是即使被牵引。“波罗夷”:因为“从步道”这个说法贯穿上下文,所以在第一步道时是土喇咤亚,越过第二步道时就是波罗夷,这是它的意思。“这个法则”:就是前面所说的“与步道相应的土喇咤亚等罪生起”这一法则。巴利
220.Hatthādīsūti ādi-saddena kesavatthādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Tanti dāsaṃ. Kaḍḍhatopīti ākaḍḍhatopi. Parājayoti ‘‘padavārato’’ti anuvattamānattā paṭhamapadavāre thullaccayaṃ, dutiyapadavāre atikkante pārājikanti attho. Ayaṃ nayoti ‘‘padavārato yuttā thullaccayādayo āpattiyo hontī’’ti vuttanayo.
221 “以速度”:只是以速度,也就是以强力的快速行进,不带有盗贼那句话里应当做的特别表示,这就是所说的意思。由此说明不犯戒的原因。巴利
221.Vegasāvāti vegeneva, corassa vacanena kātabbavisesarahitena balavagamanavegenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Iminā anāpattibhāvassa kāraṇaṃ dasseti.
222 缓慢地:就是以迟缓的步伐行走。说:就是讲出“去吧、走吧、逃吧”这类话。他也:指那个正以迟缓步伐走着、被这样告知的人,他也一样。巴利
222.Saṇikanti mandagatiyā. Vadatīti ‘‘gaccha, yāhi, palāyā’’tiādikaṃ vacanaṃ katheti. Sopi cāti yo mandagatiyā gacchanto evaṃ vutto, sopi ca.
223 逃走:就是丢下主人离开。他处:就是不属于主人的另一个地方。有店铺:就是具备街道和聚落布局的集镇。于彼处:就是从逃走后进入的村落等地方。彼:就是那个逃走后进入的奴隶。巴利
223.Palāyitvāti sāmikaṃ pahāya gantvā. Aññanti sāmikāyattaṭṭhānato aññaṃ ṭhānaṃ. Sāpaṇaṃ vīthisannivesayuttaṃ nigamampi vā. Tatoti palāyitvā paviṭṭhagāmādito. Tanti palāyitvā paviṭṭhaṃ taṃ dāsaṃ.
224 盗:即以盗心。有蛇的箱子:就是装蛇的睡篮。如其事:说的是粗罪。从处所:就是从蛇篮所在的地方。移动:就是超过了头发尖那么一点点。巴利
224.Theyyāti theyyacittena. Sappakaraṇḍanti sappasayanapeḷaṃ. Yathāvatthunti thullaccayamāha. Ṭhānatoti sappapeḷāya ṭhitaṭṭhānato. Cāvaneti kesaggamattātikkame.
225 箱是指蛇篮。打开是指揭开。从箱底是指从篮内的底部。于尾端是指在尾端的边缘。巴利
225.Karaṇḍanti sappapeḷaṃ. Ugghāṭetvāti vivaritvā. Karaṇḍatalatoti antopeḷāya talato. Naṅguṭṭheti naṅguṭṭhapariyante.
226 碰触过之后,就是碰到篮子的侧面。蛇箱的口缘,就是箱盖口的边缘。应理解为:从它的尾端刚刚脱离出来的量。巴利
226.Ghaṃsitvāti peḷāpasse phusāpetvā. Sappakaraṇḍassa mukhavaṭṭitoti karaṇḍapuṭamukhavaṭṭito. Tassa naṅguṭṭhe muttamatteti yojanā.
227 “以名”就是通过名字来说,也就是把名字说出来。“呼唤者”是指正在叫唤的人。“彼”就是指那个呼唤的人。巴利
227.Nāmatoti nāmena, nāmaṃ vatvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Pakkosantassāti avhāyantassa. Tassāti pakkosakassa.
228 “如是”是指打开箱盖。接着要这样理解:模仿青蛙和老鼠的叫声,然后称名呼唤。“或”这个字,则涵盖了撒炒米、弹指等做法。巴利
228.Tathāti karaṇḍaṃ vivaritvā. Maṇḍūkamūsikānaṃ ravaṃ katvā nāmena pakkosantassāti yojanā. Vā-saddena lājāvikiraṇaaccharapahārādikaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
229 “口”是指蛇篮的开口。同样,这样做的人,是指作青蛙想、作老鼠想,或者撒炒米,或者弹指,或者喊出名字来呼唤。“以任何方式”,是按所说方法,用这种方式或那种方式。巴利
229.Mukhanti sappakaraṇḍassa mukhaṃ. Evameva ca karontassāti maṇḍūkasaññaṃ, mūsikasaññaṃ katvā vā lājā vikiritvā vā accharaṃ paharitvā vā nāmaṃ vatvā pakkosantassa. Yena kenacīti vuttanīhārato yena vā tena vā.
230 不召唤:按照前面所说的方式连接起来,就是不称名呼唤。他的:指那位打开篮口的比丘。巴利
230.Na pakkosati ceti yathāvuttanayena yojetvā nāmaṃ vatvā na pakkosati. Tassāti karaṇḍamukhavivarakassa bhikkhussa.
231 “于象”即在象那里,这只是处所格的说法。巴利
231.Hatthinti hatthimhi, bhummatthe eva upayogavacanaṃ.
232 在象舍里,就是在象舍中。所谓“住处”,就是居住的地方,指王宫;它的内部就是内住处,意思是王宫里面。“庭院”是指在王宫内的庭院。“也”这个字,把虽然没有明说的“在内城”也一并包含进来。“住处与”的“与”字,则把庭院一起并列进来。所谓“整个庭院之处”,是就大象能够走动的庭院场所来说的,应当理解为整个象舍。巴利
232.Sālāyanti hatthisālāyaṃ. Vasati etthāti vatthu, rājāgāraṃ, tassa anto antovatthu, antorājagehanti attho. Aṅgaṇeti antorājaṅgaṇe. Pi-saddo ‘‘antonagare’’ti avuttampi sampiṇḍeti. Vatthu cāti ca-saddena aṅgaṇaṃ samuccinoti. Sakalaṃ aṅgaṇaṃ ṭhānanti hatthino vicaraṇayoggaṃ aṅgaṇaṭṭhānaṃ sandhāyāha, sakalasālāti gahetabbaṃ.
233 “未系缚者”这个说法,是就前面所说的象舍、王宫庭院等处的考量而说的。因为对于未系缚的象来说,整个象舍等处都是它所在的地方,一旦越过那个范围,就成了离开原处,这就是它的意思。“实”字,或者是用来强调的。应当看到,在连接成“系缚者实”时,所表达的正是那个特别的意义,也就是说“然而系缚者”。“然而系缚者”,是指安放在象舍等处的象而言的。“站立之处与”:指在象舍等处站立的地方,也就是四足所踏之处。“系缚处与”:指在颈部系缚的地方,或在后二足系缚环的地方,或在这两处系缚的地方。“因此”:由于站立之处和系缚处都算作处所,所以得到六处或五处。“那些处所”。“使成”:这里是以“罪”的构成能力来说的。“取走”:从象舍等处,以盗心取走象。“使成”:在触摸时,属于恶作;按处所区分来计算,直到最后处所之前,在前面那些处所犯的是土喇咤亚;从最后处所移动发尖那么一点的距离,就构成他胜,这就是它的意思。巴利
233.Abaddhassāti yathāvuttasālārājavatthaṅgaṇāpekkhāya vuttaṃ. Abaddhassa hi hatthino sakalasālādayo ṭhānaṃ, tadatikkame ṭhānācāvanaṃ hotīti attho. Hīti avadhāraṇe vā. ‘‘Baddhassa hī’’ti yojanāya visesatthova daṭṭhabbo, baddhassa panāti vuttaṃ hoti. Baddhassa panāti sālādīsu sannihitassa pana. Ṭhitaṭṭhānañcāti sālādīsu ṭhitaṭṭhānañca, catūhi pādehi akkantaṭṭhānanti vuttaṃ hoti. Bandhanañcāti gīvāya vā pacchā pādadvayabandhanavalaye vā ubhayattha vā bandhanaṭṭhānañca. Tasmāti yasmā ṭhitaṭṭhānañca bandhanañca ṭhānanti cha vā pañca vā ṭhānāni labbhanti, tasmā. Tesaṃ ṭhānānaṃ. Kārayeti ettha ‘‘āpatti’’nti sāmatthiyā labbhatīti. Haratoti hatthisālādito corikāya harantassa . Kārayeti āmasane dukkaṭaṃ, ṭhānabhedagaṇanāya yāva pacchimaṭṭhānā purimesu thullaccayāni, antimaṭṭhānā kesaggamattampi cāvane pārājikaṃ kāreyyāti attho.
234 站立之处:指象用四只脚踩踏的地方,这是针对还没被系缚的象说的。至于已被系缚的象,判定方式跟前面讲象舍等处的判定相似,因为意思已经清楚,就不再说了。巴利
234.Ṭhitaṭṭhānanti catūhi pādehi akkantaṭṭhānaṃ, idañca abaddhahatthiṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Baddhassa vinicchayo sālādīsu baddhassa vuttavinicchayasadisoti gatatthatāya na vutto.
235 “一处”是指睡觉的地方。“于彼”是指在那头象那里。“其”是指那位比丘的。对于马、水牛等,以及二足和多足类,也是这样。巴利
235.Ekaṃ ṭhānanti sayitaṭṭhānamattaṃ. Tasminti gaje. Tassāti bhikkhussa. Turaṅgamahisādīsu dvipade ca bahuppade ca.
236 这个道理同样应当这样理解,没有什么别的要说了,这就是它们的关联方式。其中,“马”就是马。“水牛”就是水牛。用“等”这个字,涵盖了牛、驴、骆驼等四足动物。所谓“没有什么别的要说”,是因为在马厩、王宫、庭院、城外等地方,没有被系缚而躺卧的马等,其处所的差别和前面所说的情况一样,所以不再另外说明。巴利
236. Eseva nayo ñeyyo, vattabbaṃ kiñcipi natthīti yojanā. Tattha turaṅgā assā. Mahisā lulāyā. Ādi-saddena gogadrabhaoṭṭhādicatuppadānaṃ saṅgaho. Natthi kiñcipi vattabbanti assasālārājāgāraṅgaṇabahinagarādīsu abandhitasayanaassādīnaṃ ṭhānabhedo yathāvuttasadisattā na vutto.
对于被绑好安置的马:如果它的四条腿都被绑住,按绑缚处和蹄子来算,有八个位置;如果嘴也被绑住,就有九个位置;如果只绑嘴,就有五个位置——位置的分类就是这样。对于鹿、猪等四足动物被绑好安置的情况,按照绑缚处和四只脚踩踏处来算,也能得出位置的分类。牛和水牛被绑时,同样如此得出位置的分类。至于把动物赶入栏圈等处、在门口拔掉或不拔掉木闩、叫名字或不叫名字来呼唤、拿折枝或草等给它看、呼唤或不呼唤来引诱、惊吓它让它出来、以及蛇在蛇笼里的情况,应当依照前面说蛇的方法来理解其中的差别。在这里,一切位置分类中,即使有很多,若在靠近边界的地方犯土喇咤亚,在边界上犯他胜罪,就像前面所说的那样。因为整个决断都可以用“这就是方法”这句话来涵盖,又因为引出来的内容里没有任何不为人知的差别,所以说“没有什么可说的”。巴利
Bandhitvā ṭhapitaassassa pana sace so catūsu pādesu baddho hoti, bandhanānaṃ, khurānañca gaṇanāya aṭṭha ṭhānāni, sace mukhe ca baddho hoti, nava ṭhānāni, mukheyeva baddho, pañca ṭhānānīti ṭhānabhedo ca tatheva sasamigasūkarādicatuppadesu bandhitvā ṭhapitesu baddhabaddhaṭṭhānehi saha catūhi pādehi akkantaṭṭhānavasena labbhamāno ṭhānabhedo ca gomahisesu baddhesu evameva labbhamāno ṭhānabhedo ca vajādīsu padesesu pavesitesu dvāresu rukkhasūciyo apanetvā vā anapanetvā vā nāmaṃ vatvā vā avatvā vā pakkosantassa, sākhābhaṅgatiṇādīni dassetvā pakkositvā vā apakkositvā vā palobhentassa tāsetvā nikkhamantassa sappakaraṇḍake sappassa vuttanayena labbhamāno viseso ca netabbo. Iha sabbattha ṭhānabhedesu bahukesupi upantaṭṭhānesu thullaccayaṃ, antaṭṭhāne pārājikaṃ vuttasadisanti imassa sabbassa vinicchayassa ‘‘eseva nayo’’ti imināva gatattā, āhaṭato aviññāyamānassa kassaci visesassābhāvā ca vuttaṃ ‘‘natthi kiñcipi vattabba’’nti.
“二足者”这一项:巴利经文里说“二足者,就是人和禽鸟”,这里指人,以及孔雀等长毛羽翅膀的、蝙蝠等长皮膜翅膀的、蜜蜂等长骨质翅膀的,诸如此类的一切众生。“多足者”这一项:巴利经文里说“多足者,就是蝎子、百足虫、蚰蜒”,意思就是指这些多足的众生。巴利
Dvipadepīti ‘‘dvipadaṃ nāma manussā pakkhajātā’’ti (pārā. 115) pāḷiyaṃ vuttā manussā ca mayūrādilomapakkhā ca vagguliādicammapakkhā ca bhamarādiaṭṭhipakkhā cāti evamādike satte ca. Bahuppadeti ‘‘bahuppadaṃ nāma vicchikā satapadī uccāliṅgapāṇakā’’ti (pārā. 117) pāḷiyaṃ vuttabahuppadasatte cāti attho.
到这里为止,为了堵住恶行比丘的借口空间,在词句分别中已说的“地摄等三十种抉择论母”里,先展示了二十五种论母的解说;在剩下的五种论母解说中,关于约定取、约定业、相业这三种论母的解说,正是站在开示不与取抉择所依的二十五种取这一位置上说的——巴利
Ettāvatā pāpabhikkhūnaṃ lesokāsapidahanatthaṃ padabhājane vuttabhūmaṭṭhāditiṃsavinicchayamātikākathāsu pañcavīsati mātikākathā dassetvā avasiṭṭhāsu pañcamātikākathāsu saṃvidāvahāro, saṅketakammaṃ, nimittakammanti mātikattayakathā paṭhamameva adinnādānavinicchayasambhārabhūtānaṃ pañcavīsatiyā avahārānaṃ dassanaṭṭhāne ṭhatvā –
过去的共同加行,以及约定而取,亦;
约定业、相业,以及前行等五种。巴利
‘‘Pubbasahapayogo ca, saṃvidāharaṇampi ca; Saṅketakammaṃ nemittaṃ, pubbayogādipañcaka’’nti. (vi. vi. 42) –
“由此所摄”这句话的意思是:除了那种情况之外,剩下的就是“侦察者”和“看守者”这两种说法。在这两种说法里,侦察者的说法涉及命令和加行的运用;而看守者所做的移离处所,无论是用自己亲手的方式,还是用命令的方式,都属于加行。因此,它也被“亲手与命令”这一项所包含,因为在亲手五种当中,第一种就已经摄入了它;而且它也被陆地、空中等八种说法所包含。所以这两者就不再另外提出来,应当这样理解。巴利
Iminā saṅgahitāti taṃ pahāya avasese ocarako, oṇirakkhakoti kathādvaye ocaraṇakakathāya āṇattikappayogattā, tañca oṇirakkhakena kariyamānaṃ ṭhānācāvanaṃ sāhatthikena vā āṇattikena vā payogena hotīti tassāpi ‘‘sāhatthāṇattiko cevā’’ti sāhatthikapañcake paṭhamameva saṅgahitattā ca thalaṭṭhavehāsaṭṭhakathādīsu saṅgahitattā ca tañca dvayaṃ na vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
这里,律文《波罗夷》118中说:“所谓侦察者,就是侦察货物后回来报告的人。”这里所说的为盗贼打探消息的人,应当知道就是“侦察者”。他去侦察,所以叫侦察者;意思是说,他到处走动,潜入里面打探。
同一律文《波罗夷》118中说:“所谓看守者,就是守护已运来的货物的人。”这里所说的暂时替别人保管货物的人,应当知道就是“看守者”。他守护被放下的东西,所以叫看守者。别人把货物带到他的住处,对他说:“尊者,请先帮我看一会儿这个,等我去办完某件事就回来。”他受托而守护,这就是那个称呼的意思。巴利
Tattha ‘‘ocarako nāma bhaṇḍaṃ ocaritvā ācikkhatī’’ti (pārā. 118) pāḷiyaṃ vutto corāpanapuriso ‘‘ocarako’’ti veditabbo. Ocaratīti ocarako, tattha tattha gantvā anto anupavisatīti vuttaṃ hotīti. ‘‘Oṇirakkho nāma āhaṭaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ gopento’’ti (pārā. 118) pāḷiyaṃ vutto muhuttaṃ attani ṭhapitassa parabhaṇḍassa rakkhako ‘‘oṇirakkho’’ti veditabbo. Oṇitaṃ rakkhatīti oṇirakkho, yo parena attano vasanaṭṭhāne ābhataṃ bhaṇḍaṃ ‘‘idaṃ tāva bhante muhuttaṃ oloketha, yāvāhaṃ idaṃ nāma kiccaṃ katvā āgacchāmī’’ti vutto rakkhati, tassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.
237 237. 按照“以五种方式取用不与取之物的人,犯波罗夷”等(《波罗夷》122)这样的方式,为了把律典中说的五个条件归纳起来,所以说了“他人的……”等话。其中,“他人的财物”这一句,说明是他人所拥有的;“知道是他人所有的”这一句,说明知道它属于他人支配;“重物”这一句,说明价值达到一巴陀或超过一巴陀;“以盗心”这一句,说明有偷盗的心;“从原处移动”这一句,说明具备二十五种不与取方式中的某一种。这样,在这里就应当知道五个条件已经归纳完毕。巴利
237. ‘‘Pañcahi ākārehi adinnaṃ ādiyantassa āpatti pārājikassā’’tiādinā (pārā. 122) nayena pāḷiyaṃ āgatāni pañcaṅgāni saṅgahetumāha ‘‘paresa’’ntiādi. Tattha ‘‘paresaṃ santakaṃ dhana’’nti iminā paramanussasantakatā, ‘‘paresanti vijānitvā’’ti iminā parāyattabhāvassa jānanaṃ, ‘‘garuka’’nti iminā pādaṃ vā atirekapādaṃ vā agghanakatā, ‘‘theyyacittenā’’ti iminā theyyacittatā, ‘‘ṭhānā cāvetī’’ti iminā pañcavīsatiyā avahārānaṃ aññatarassa samaṅgitāti evamettha pañcaṅgasaṅgaho veditabbo.
238 238. 到此为止,已经把三十条论母的讨论与判定收拢完毕。现在,为了收拢律文中依“于有自想者无犯、信赖取、暂时物、亡者遗物、畜生遗物、粪扫衣想者”等(波罗夷·一三一)这种方式所说的无犯段落,所以接着说“无犯”等语。其中,“有自想者”是指:即使是别人的东西,只要以“这是我的”这种单纯的想而取用,就无犯——这一原则应适用于一切情况。如果这样取用之后,物主看见了来索要,却不肯归还,那么双方都舍弃了各自的职责,就构成波罗夷。巴利
238. Ettāvatā tiṃsamātikākathāvinicchayaṃ saṅgahetvā idāni ‘‘anāpatti sasaññissa vissāsaggāhe tāvakālike petapariggahe tiracchānagatapariggahe paṃsukūlasaññissā’’tiādinā (pārā. 131) nayena pāḷiyaṃ āgataṃ anāpattivāraṃ saṅgahetumāha ‘‘anāpattī’’tiādi. Tattha sasaññissāti parasantakampi ‘‘sasantaka’’nti suddhasaññāya gaṇhantassa anāpattīti sabbattha yojetabbaṃ. Evaṃ gahitaṃ sāmikehi disvā yācite adentassa ubhinnaṃ dhuranikkhepena pārājikaṃ.
“畜生所持物”是指被畜生所执取的东西。即使龙、金翅鸟、摩纳婆、摩纳婆女等化作人形,开设店铺坐在那里,如果比丘以盗心取他们所属的东西,也说是无罪。对于狮子、老虎、豹子等猛兽所抓取的猎物,先让它松开,等它松口后,为了防止自己也被伤害而稍微取食,也没有过错。对于鹰等畜生以任何方式抓取的食物,让它放下是允许的。注释书里确实这样说:“鹰等拿了食物走时,可以让它掉落然后取走。”同样地,对于滑鼠蛇、水蛇等所抓取的青蛙之类,为了救护它们的生命而让它们放开,这也是允许的,应当这样理解。巴利
Tiracchānapariggaheti tiracchānehi pariggahitavatthumhi. Sacepi hi nāgagaruḷamāṇavakamāṇavikāpi manussavesena āpaṇaṃ pasāretvā nisinnā honti, bhikkhu ca theyyacittena tesaṃ santakaṃ gaṇhāti, anāpattīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sīhabyagghadīpipabhutīhi vāḷamigehi gahitagocaraṃ paṭhamaṃ mocāpentassa taṃ muñcitvā attanopi hiṃsanato thokaṃ khāyite vārentassa doso natthi. Senādīsu tiracchānesu yena kenaci gahitaṃ gocaraṃ mocāpetuṃ vaṭṭati. Vuttañhetaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘senādayopi āmisaṃ gahetvā gacchante pātāpetvā gaṇhituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.131). Evameva dhammanideḍḍubhādīhi gahitamaṇḍūkādayo jīvitarakkhanatthāya mocāpetuṃ vaṭṭatīti veditabbaṃ.
所谓“暂时拿”,是指心里想着“我会还回去”而暂时拿走。这样拿走以后,如果物主——不管是个人还是团体——同意说“你们就拿去吧”,那就可以。如果物主不同意,就不该拿,应当归还。如果不归还,双方都因为放弃责任而犯波罗夷。不过注释书里说:“如果是属于僧团的东西,那就只有归还这一条路。”巴利
Tāvakālikaggāheti ‘‘paṭikarissāmī’’ti tāvakālikaṃ gaṇhantassa evaṃ gahitaṃ sace bhaṇḍasāmiko puggalo vā gaṇo vā ‘‘tumheva gaṇhathā’’ti anujāneyya, vaṭṭati. Nānujāneyya, na gaṇheyya, dātabbaṃ. Adentassa ubhinnaṃ dhuranikkhepena pārājikaṃ. ‘‘Saṅghasantakaṃ pana paṭidātumeva vaṭṭatī’’ti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ.
关于“信赖取”,应当按照律典中这段话来了知:“诸比丘,我允许对具足五支的人作信赖取,也就是:是见过的熟人、是关系亲密的人、曾对他说过、他还活着、取用时他会满意。”(《大品》356)对于具足这五支的人,以信赖之心取他的东西时,这种取用的判定准则,应依照上述经文的注释来理解。正如《一切欢喜》中所说:巴利
Vissāsaggāheti ‘‘anujānāmi bhikkhave pañcahaṅgehi samannāgatassa vissāsaṃ gahetuṃ, sandiṭṭho ca hoti, sambhatto ca, ālapito ca, jīvati ca, gahite ca attamano hotī’’ti (mahāva. 356) pāḷiyaṃ āgataṃ pañcahaṅgehi samannāgatassa santakaṃ vissāsena gaṇhantassa gahaṇe vinicchayo yathāvuttasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ veditabbo. Yathāha samantapāsādikāyaṃ –
在这里,“已见面”指只有过一面之交的朋友;“已结交”指关系深厚牢固的朋友;“已打过招呼”指对方曾说过:“我的东西,你想要什么就拿去,不用先问过我”;“还活着”指即使他卧病在床,只要命根还没断;“拿时他满意”指拿的时候他心里高兴。对于这样的人,知道“我拿的时候他会高兴”而拿他的东西,就是可以的。这五支是从毫无遗漏、全部具备的角度来说的;但“信赖取”只要三支就能成立:已见面、还活着、拿时他满意;或者已结交、还活着、拿时他满意;或者已打过招呼、还活着、拿时他满意。巴利
Tattha sandiṭṭhoti diṭṭhamattakamitto. Sambhattoti daḷhamitto. Ālapitoti ‘‘mama santakaṃ yaṃ icchasi, taṃ gaṇheyyāsi, āpucchitvā gahaṇe kāraṇaṃ natthī’’ti vutto. Jīvatīti anuṭṭhānaseyyāya sayitopi yāva jīvitindriyupacchedaṃ na pāpuṇāti. Gahite ca attamanoti gahite tuṭṭhacitto hoti, evarūpassa santakaṃ ‘‘gahite me attamano bhavissatī’’ti jānantena gahetuṃ vaṭṭati. Anavasesapariyādānavasena cetāni pañcaṅgāni vuttāni, vissāsaggāho pana tīhaṅgehi ruhati – sandiṭṭho, jīvati, gahite attamano, sambhatto, jīvati, gahite attamano, ālapito, jīvati, gahite attamanoti.
如果那个人还活着,但取用他东西的时候他并不满意,那么即使是通过信赖取的方式拿了他的东西,也还是要还回去。还的时候,如果是死者的财物,首先应该还给对那份财物有权的人——不管是在家人还是出家人。如果是不满意的人的东西,就应该还给他本人。但如果一开始就用话说“你拿我的东西,拿得好”,或者只是心里表示认可,后来却因为某种原因生气了,那就不能要求拿回来。即使心里根本不想给,但只是默默忍着,什么也不说,那也不能要求拿回来。不过,如果被问“我拿了或用了你们的东西”时,他这样回答:“拿了也好,用了也好,但那是我为了某件事放在那里的,应该把它恢复原样”,这样的人就可以要求拿回来。巴利
Yo pana jīvati, na ca gahite attamano hoti, tassa santakaṃ vissāsaggāhena gahitampi puna dātabbaṃ. Dadamānena ca matakadhanaṃ tāva ye tassa dhane issarā gahaṭṭhā vā pabbajitā vā, tesaṃ dātabbaṃ. Anattamanassa santakaṃ tasseva dātabbaṃ. Yo pana paṭhamaṃyeva ‘‘suṭṭhu kataṃ tayā mama santakaṃ gaṇhantenā’’ti vacībhedena vā cittuppādamattena vā anumoditvā pacchā kenaci kāraṇena kupito paccāharāpetuṃ na labhati. Yopi adātukāmova, cittena pana adhivāseti, na kiñci vadati, sopi puna paccāharāpetuṃ na labhati. Yo pana ‘‘mayā tumhākaṃ santakaṃ gahitaṃ vā paribhuttaṃ vā’’ti vutte ‘‘gahitaṃ vā hotu paribhuttaṃ vā, mayā pana taṃ kenacideva karaṇīyena ṭhapitaṃ, taṃ pākatikaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vadati, ayaṃ paccāharāpetuṃ labhatīti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.131).
“饿鬼的所有物”:生在饿鬼界的众生,以及死后就在那同一个身体里投生的众生,还有四大王天等诸天——在这个意思里都叫“饿鬼”。取用这些饿鬼的东西,没有犯戒,这是这里的意思。因为,就算帝释天王铺开店铺坐在那里,具天眼通的比丘知道了,哪怕价值十万的衣物,也可以趁他还在叫喊抗议的时候直接夺过来拿走。为供养天人而挂在树上等处的细布之类,取用它们既然没有过失,那还用说吗。作粪扫衣想而拿,也无犯。这样拿到的东西,如果是有主人的,主人来索要时就应该归还——这一点要由这个标示推知。巴利
Petapariggaheti pettivisayuppannā ca maritvā tasmiṃyeva attabhāve nibbattā ca cātumahārājikādayo devā ca imasmiṃ atthe petā nāma, tesaṃ santakaṃ gaṇhantassa ca anāpattīti attho. Sacepi hi sakko devarājā āpaṇaṃ pasāretvā nisinno hoti, dibbacakkhuko ca bhikkhu taṃ ñatvā satasahassagghanakampi vatthaṃ tassa viravantasseva acchinditvā gaṇhituṃ vaṭṭati. Devapūjatthaṃ rukkhādīsu maṭṭhavatthādīni gaṇhato niddosatāya kimeva vattabbaṃ. Paṃsukūlasaññāya gaṇhatopi anāpatti. Tathā gahitampi sace sassāmikaṃ hoti, sāmike āharāpente dātabbanti upalakkhaṇato veditabbaṃ.
239 这里的“在此”,是指对第二波罗夷的判定。“及”字有集合未说之义的功用,把其余学处的判定也一并收摄进来。“应当说”:就像论母注疏等那样,要在最后才说。“经文之外的判定”:指生起等类内容,是各部学处经文中没有出现,而由优波离长老等人所立下的判定。巴利
239.Etthāti dutiyapārājikavinicchaye. Ca-saddena avuttasamuccayatthena avasesasikkhāpadavinicchaye saṅgaṇhāti. Vattabboti mātikaṭṭhakathādīsu viya avasāne kathetabbo. Pāḷimuttavinicchayoti samuṭṭhānādiko taṃtaṃsikkhāpadapāḷiyaṃ anāgato upālittherādīhi ṭhapito vinicchayo.
240 “已战胜众多垢秽”说的是:那位胜者已经战胜了贪等众多烦恼垢秽。他是怎么做到的呢?他是以无量百千俱胝劫所积集的波罗蜜所生、以一切知智为依处的漏尽智,连同习气一起彻底断除,从而战胜了那些垢秽,所以称为“已战胜众多垢秽”。这位已战胜众多垢秽的胜者所说的第二波罗夷,我已经简要说明了它的含义。但如果要毫无遗漏、以极广大的方式完整讲述它的含义,谁又能做得到呢?这是承接上文的话。这里的“及”字,是把第一波罗夷也一并收摄进来的意思。“实”字表示强调,由此表明:除了如来之外,确实没有别人能毫无遗漏地讲说它的含义。巴利
240.Parājitānekamalenāti aparimeyyakappakoṭisatasahassopacitapāramitāsambhūtena sabbaññutaññāṇapadaṭṭhānena āsavakkhayañāṇena saha vāsanāya samucchedappahānena parājitā rāgādayo anekakilesamalā yena so parājitānekamalo, tena parājitānekamalena . Jinena yaṃ dutiyaṃ pārājikaṃ vuttaṃ, assa dutiyapārājikassa ca attho mayā samāsena vutto. Asesena ativitthāranayena vattuṃ tassa atthaṃ kathetuṃ ko hi samatthoti yojanā. Ettha ca-saddo paṭhamapārājikasamuccayattho. Hi-saddo avadhāraṇe, tena asesena tadatthaṃ vattuṃ samattho nattheva aññatra tathāgatāti dīpeti.
《律抉择》的注释巴利
Vinayavinicchayavaṇṇanāya
第三波罗夷论的注释巴利
Tatiyapārājikakathāvaṇṇanā
241-2 就这样用极其细密的方式说明了第二波罗夷之后,现在为了说明第三波罗夷,说道“人类”等。其中,“人类”是指:因为出生,所以叫“生”,也就是结生,即色与无色的结生;在人类当中出生的人,就是“人类”,也就是说,他是“生在人中的”“具有人身的人”。这就是所说的人类。巴利
241-2. Evamatisukhumanayasamākulaṃ dutiyapārājikaṃ dassetvā idāni tatiyapārājikaṃ dassetumāha ‘‘manussajāti’’ntiādi. Tattha manussajātinti jāyatīti jāti, rūpārūpapaṭisandhi, manussesu jāti yassa so manussajāti, manussajātiko manussaviggahoti vuttaṃ hoti, taṃ manussajātiṃ.
这里,“在人中”是指:因为善心和不善心的力量很强,所以在被称为人的众生当中。按照“在母胎中最初生起的心”这一句的分别解释方式,在母胎中最初生起的结生心,以及与它相应的受、想、行这三蕴,还有与它一同生起的——巴利
Ettha ca manussesūti kusalākusalamanassa ussannattā manussasaṅkhātesu naresu. ‘‘Yaṃ mātukucchismiṃ paṭhamaṃ cittaṃ uppanna’’nti (pārā. 172) padabhājane vuttanayena mātukucchimhi paṭhamaṃ uppajjamānapaṭisandhicittañca taṃsampayuttavedanāsaññāsaṅkhārasaṅkhātakhandhattayañca taṃsahajātāni –
就像芝麻油的一滴,像没有杂质、清澈的酥油精华;
像这样,与颜色相似的东西,就被称为“羯罗蓝”。巴利
‘‘Tilatelassa yathā bindu, sappimaṇḍo anāvilo; Evaṃ vaṇṇappaṭibhāgaṃ, ‘kalala’nti pavuccatī’’ti. (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.172; vibha. aṭṭha. 26) –
把初生的羊毛丝浸入澄清的麻油或醍醐精中,提起来再抖一抖,这时尖端悬着的油滴大小的东西,就叫做“羯罗蓝”。有性根的,按身十法聚、性根十法聚、心基十法聚算,有三十种色法;没有性根的,按身十法聚、心基十法聚算,有二十种色法。这个名色结生,在这里就用“生”这个字来指代。而用“其”这个不同的词,是按照《词句分别》里说的“从那时起直到死前,这中间就叫做人身”的方式,从最初有分开始,一直到死心之前的有分为止,这整个相续就叫做有情。这样,就说明了人身从结生开始,就已经是波罗夷事的状态了。巴利
Vuttāni jātiuṇṇaṃsumhi pasannatilatele vā sappimaṇḍe vā otāretvā ukkhipitvā vidhunite agge lambamānabinduppamāṇakalalasaṅkhātāni sabhāvakānaṃ kāyabhāvavatthudasakavasena tiṃsa rūpāni ca abhāvakānaṃ kāyavatthudasakavasena vīsati rūpāni cāti ayaṃ nāmarūpapaṭisandhi idha ‘‘jātī’’ti gahitā. ‘‘Yassā’’ti iminā aññapadena ‘‘yāva maraṇakālā etthantare eso manussaviggaho nāmā’’ti (pārā. 172) padabhājane vuttanayena paṭhamabhavaṅgato paṭṭhāya cuticittāsannabhavaṅgapariyantasantānasaṅkhātasatto gahito. Iminā manussaviggahassa paṭisandhito paṭṭhāya pārājikavatthubhāvaṃ dasseti.
“知者”,就是知道“这是有情”。“从命分离”,是说如果有比丘让人与命根分离、夺去其命,那就是断掉他的命根、令其止息。因此《词句分别》中说:“‘断命’,就是断除命根、令其止息。”巴利
Jānantoti ‘‘satto aya’’nti jānanto. Jīvitā yo viyojayeti yo bhikkhu jīvitindriyā viyojeyya voropeyya, tassa jīvitindriyaṃ upacchindeyya uparodheyyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tenāha padabhājane ‘‘jīvitā voropeyyāti jīvitindriyaṃ upacchindati uparodhetī’’ti (pārā. 172).
命根依色与非色分成两种。其中,非色命根因为没有形体,不能成为加行的对象。但是,由于非色命根依靠色命根才能维持运作,所以当色命根被切断时,它也在同一时刻被切断。因此,在这里应当从共通的角度把两者一起纳入。这里不应纳入过去和未来的命根,因为它们不存在。只有现在存在、可以作为加行对象的命根才应当纳入。而这现在的命根又依刹那、相续、时段分为三种。巴利
Tañca jīvitindriyaṃ rūpārūpavasena duvidhaṃ hoti. Tattha arūpajīvitindriyaṃ aviggahattā upakkamavisayaṃ na hoti. Rūpajīvitindriyupacchedena pana tadāyattavuttitāya taṃsamakālameva occhijjamānatāya ettha sāmaññena ubhayampi gahetabbaṃ. Idañca atītānāgataṃ na gahetabbaṃ tassa avijjamānattā. Upakkamavisayārahaṃ pana paccuppannameva gahetabbaṃ. Tañca khaṇasantatiaddhāvasena tividhaṃ hoti.
在这里,按生、住、灭三刹那来划分的存在,叫作刹那现在。它因为本身就是坏灭的,所以不会在自己正在坏灭时还能通过加行去破坏。比如一个人站在烈日下,然后进入暗室,黑暗消失的那一段时间;或者一个受寒的人进入温室,因不同时节生起而寒冷被消除的那一段时间,这期间的色相续叫作相续现在。从结生到死亡之间不断运行的蕴相续,叫作时段现在。在这后两种现在里,加行是可以发生的。依加行而被中断的生命,因为成为相续衰减的原因,所以在相续现在和时段现在这两种情况中,还没有达到各自限定的时间,就在中间依加行而灭尽了。因此应当知道,这里用“生命”一词,既包括相续现在和时段现在中的色命根,也包括因它灭尽而灭尽的非色命根。正是针对这一点,《词句分别》中说“破坏相续”。巴利
Tattha uppādaṭṭhitibhaṅgavasena khaṇattayapariyāpanno bhāvo khaṇapaccuppannaṃ nāma. Taṃ sarasabhaṅgabhūtattā sayaṃ bhijjamānaṃ upakkamasādhiyaṃ vināsavantaṃ na hoti. Ātape ṭhatvā gabbhaṃ paviṭṭhassa andhakāravigamantarañca sītena ovarakaṃ paviṭṭhassa visabhāgautusamuṭṭhānena sītapanūdantarañca rūpasantati santatipaccuppannaṃ nāma. Paṭisandhicutīnamantarāḷappavatti khandhasantati addhāpaccuppannaṃ nāma. Imasmiṃ dvaye upakkamasambhavo, taṃvasena upacchijjamānaṃ jīvitaṃ santānaparihānipaccayabhāvato santatiaddhāpaccuppannadvayaṃ yathāparicchinnakālamappatvā upakkamavasena antarāyeva nirujjhati, tasmā santatiaddhāpaccuppannarūpajīvitindriyañca taṃnirodhena nirujjhamānaarūpajīvitindriyañcāti ubhayaṃ ettha ‘‘jīvitā’’ti gahitanti veditabbaṃ. Idameva sandhāyāha padabhājane ‘‘santatiṃ vikopetī’’ti (pārā. 172).
正因为这杀生这件事本身就是犯戒,所以站在这个角度,注疏里(《巴帝摩卡注》2.172)展示了生命、杀生、杀生者、杀生加行这四者的区分。其中,“生命”,从世俗说法来讲就是有情众生,从究竟真实来讲则是正在被切断的命根,这就是用“命”这个词所表达的意思。“杀生”指的是杀害的思心所,这是用“分离”这个词所指示的。“杀生者”指的是人,这是用“谁”这个词所指示的。至于“杀生加行”,则是——巴利
Imissāva pāṇātipātabhāve āpattibhāvato ettha ṭhatvā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.172) pāṇapāṇātipātapāṇātipātīpāṇātipātappayogānaṃ vibhāgo dassito. Tattha pāṇoti vohārato satto, paramatthato upacchijjamānaṃ jīvitindriyaṃ, taṃ ‘‘jīvitā’’ti iminā vuttaṃ. Pāṇātipāto nāma vadhakacetanā, so ca ‘‘viyojaye’’ti iminā sandassito. Pāṇātipātī nāma puggalo, so ca ‘‘yo’’ti iminā sandassito. Pāṇātipātappayogo pana –
‘‘Vuttā pāṇātipātassa; Payogā cha mahesinā’’ti –
按照这个方式,因为这里正要说明它的分类,所以就应该按照即将说明的方式来理解。巴利
Ādinā nayena idheva vakkhamānavibhāgattā vakkhamānanayeneva daṭṭhabbo.
“应当为他放下武器”这句话要这样连接理解。“为他”指的是人。“在手边”是经文省略后的补充说法。所谓“手边”,就是近处。“为他”是表示近处关系的属格。“武器”在这里应当理解为:以伤害生命为助缘而被认可的有刃刀剑等,以及没有刃的棍棒、投枪、石块等,都包括在内。因为它能伤害、杀害,所以叫“武器”。因此《词句分析》中说:“刀、矛、投枪、棍棒、石块、武器、毒药、绳索。”这里所说的手刀、小刀等一切,都被“武器”这个词涵盖。“应当放下”的意思是:应当放在近处,使他为了财物能够拿到;当他想要自杀时,能以那样的心拿到——这就是这里所说的意思。由此显示了静态的加行。巴利
Assa satthaṃ nikkhipeyya vāti yojanā. Assāti manussajātikassa. ‘‘Hatthapāse’’ti pāṭhaseso. Hatthapāso nāma samīpoti. Assāti samīpasambandhe sāmivacanaṃ. Satthanti ettha jīvitavihiṃ sanupakaraṇabhāvena sammatā dhārāvantaasiādi ca dhārārahitayaṭṭhibhindivālalaguḷādi ca upalakkhaṇavasena gahetabbā. Sasati hiṃsatīti satthaṃ. Tenevāha padabhājane ‘‘asiṃ vā sattiṃ vā bhindivālaṃ vā laguḷaṃ vā pāsāṇaṃ vā satthaṃ vā visaṃ vā rajjuṃ vā’’ti. Idhāvuttaṃ karapālikāchurikādi samukhaṃ ‘‘satthaṃ vā’’ti iminā saṅgahitaṃ. Nikkhipeyyāti yathā bhogahetuṃ labhati, tathā upanikkhipeyya, attavadhāya icchitakkhaṇe yathā gaṇhāti, tathā samīpe teneva cittena ṭhapeyyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Iminā thāvarappayogo sandassito.
为了死亡而说死亡的功德,这句话的意思是:为了死,而赞叹死的好处。因为词句分析里说“显示生命的过患,宣说死亡的功德”,所以当人以“你这恶劣的苦命有什么用?你连美妙的食物都吃不上”这类方式,为死亡而说生命的过失;又以“你是近事男,已作善业,未作恶业,对你来说死胜过生。你从此处命终后,将投生在有各种鸟儿鸣叫、以极香花朵装饰的树林、有天女众以极乐妙丽的姿态言语、歌唱、游行的胜妙园林中,被天女众围绕而游行”这类方式,为死亡而显示死亡的利益——这才叫作“应当说死的功德”。巴利
Maraṇe guṇaṃ vā vadeyyāti yojanā, maraṇatthāya maraṇe guṇaṃ vaṇṇetīti attho. ‘‘Jīvite ādīnavaṃ dasseti, maraṇe guṇaṃ bhaṇatī’’ti (pārā. 172) padabhājane vuttattā ‘‘kiṃ tuyhiminā pāpakena dujjīvitena, yo tvaṃ na labhasi paṇītabhojanāni bhuñjitu’’miccādinā nayena maraṇatthāya jīvite avaṇṇaṃ vadanto ca ‘‘tvaṃ khosi upāsaka katakalyāṇo akatapāpo, mataṃ te jīvitā seyyo, ito tvaṃ kālakato vividhavihaṅgamavikūjite paramasurabhikusumabhūsitataruvaranicite paramaratikaralaḷitagatibhāsitavilapitasurayuvatigaṇavicarite varanandane accharāsaṅghaparivārito vicarissasī’’tiādinā nayena maraṇatthāya maraṇānisaṃsaṃ dassento ca ‘‘maraṇe guṇaṃ vadeyya’’icceva vuccati.
应当教导死亡的方法,这是句子的连接方式。正是以死亡为目的,在词句分析中说到“拿刀来,或者吃毒药,或者用绳子上吊而死”,其中所说的拿刀等,以及没有说到的从悬崖、坑洞等处跳下去等,像这样一类死亡的方法,都应当讲说。“这也有”是词句的切分,“也”字把前面所说的两种一起收进来。应当知道,就像裂成两半的石头无法再合在一起,意思是:就像裂成两半的石头,那个人以世尊的修行与证悟这两种教法,在现在这一生中不可能再连接起来。巴利
Maraṇūpāyaṃ deseyyāti yojanā. Maraṇādhippāyeneva ‘‘satthaṃ vā āhara, visaṃ vā khāda, rajjuyā vā ubbandhitvā kālaṅkarohī’’ti padabhājane vuttasatthaharaṇāni ca avuttampi sobbhanarakapapātādīsu papatanañcāti evamādikaṃ maraṇūpāyaṃ ācikkheyya. ‘‘Hoti ayampī’’ti padacchedo, apīti pubbe vuttadvayaṃ samuccinoti. Dvedhā bhinnasilā viya asandheyyovaso ñeyyoti dvidhā bhinnapāsāṇo viya bhagavato paṭipattipaṭivedhasāsanadvayena so paccuppanne attabhāve sandhātumasakkuṇeyyovāti ñātabboti attho.
243 “不动等”里的“等”字,包含了明咒所成和神通所成这两种加行。巴利
243.Thāvarādayoti ādi-saddena vijjāmayaiddhimayapayogadvayaṃ saṅgahitaṃ.
244 其中,“于彼”是指在六种加行之中。自己的手叫“自手”,由它所产生的叫“自手行”,也就是加行。这里举出“手”只是作为代表,因此应当知道,用手等自己的肢体部分所完成的杀害加行,就称为“自手行”。巴利
244.Tatthāti tesu chasu payogesu. Sako hattho sahattho, tena nibbatto sāhatthiko, payogo. Idha hatthaggahaṇaṃ upalakkhaṇaṃ, tasmā hatthādinā attano aṅgapaccaṅgena nipphādito vadhappayogo sāhatthikoti veditabbo.
245 比丘这样命令别人说“你照这样打他,然后杀掉他”,这就是命令方式。所谓命令方式,就是命令本身就是命令方式。“方式”是使事情进行的意思,这是这种加行的名称。巴利
245. ‘‘Tvaṃ taṃ evaṃ paharitvā mārehī’’ti bhikkhuno parassa yaṃ āṇāpanaṃ, ayamāṇattiko nayoti yojanā. Āṇattiko nayoti āṇattiyeva āṇattiko. Neti pavattetīti nayo, payogassetaṃ nāmaṃ.
246 远,是指处在远处。这里说以身所系,是把手等身体的部分说成身,这是用整体来指代部分,就像说村子被烧了。而弓等属于身所系的东西,称为所系,这是省略了前面的词,就像提婆达多略称为达多。或这个字虽然省略了没有说出来,意思就是以身或以身所系,这跟射箭等这句话连在一起。施设就是施设,也就是加行的意思。巴利
246.Dūranti dūraṭṭhaṃ. Kāyena paṭibaddhenāti ettha kāyekadeso hatthādi kāyo avayave samudāyopacārato ‘‘gāmo daḍḍho’’ti yathā. Kāyapaṭibaddhaṃ cāpādikaṃ paṭibaddhaṃ nāma pubbapadalopena ‘‘devadatto datto’’ti yathā. Vā-saddo luttaniddiṭṭho, kāyena vā kāyapaṭibaddhena vāti vuttaṃ hoti, ‘‘usuādinipātana’’nti iminā sambandho. Vidhānaṃ vidhi, payogoti attho.
247 以不动的方法,就是以不移动、不摇动的方法。东西掉落到这里,所以叫“堕处”;堕处是陷阱、毒药、药物配制等事物的为首者,所以有“堕处等”。对它们的安排,叫“堕处等施设”,也就是挖陷阱之类的行为。巴利
247.Asañcārimupāyenāti asañcārimena niccalena upāyena. Opatanti etthāti opāto, so ādi yesaṃ apassenavisabhesajjasaṃvidhānādīnaṃ te opātādayo, tesaṃ vidhānaṃ opātādividhānaṃ, opātakkhaṇanādikiriyā.
248 所谓“明”,是指阿闼婆吠陀中传来的、被称为死亡咒语的明。所谓“念诵”,是指为了让别人听不到而反复念诵。巴利
248.Vijjāyāti āthabbanavedāgatamaraṇamantasaṅkhātavijjāya. Jappananti yathā paro na suṇāti, tathā punappunaṃ vacanaṃ.
249 249. 能致死亡伤害的业报所生神通,这就叫作“神通加行”——这是整句的注释方式。从业的果报而生起,所以叫“业报所生”。神通,就是注疏里以“龙有龙神通,金翅鸟有金翅鸟神通,夜叉有夜叉神通”等等方式多处说到的那个。其中,龙通过见到、咬了、触到其毒牙来对其他众生造成伤害,应当知道这就是龙神通。其余也是这样。神通本身就是神通加行,但这里不应取修习所成的神通加行。因为注疏中已经这样说:巴利
249. Māraṇe samatthā yā kammavipākajā iddhi, ayaṃ iddhimayo payogo nāmāti samudīritoti yojanā. Kammavipāke jātā kammavipākajā, iddhi, yā ‘‘nāgānaṃ nāgiddhi supaṇṇānaṃ supaṇṇiddhi yakkhānaṃ yakkhiddhī’’tiādinā (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.172) bahudhā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttā. Tattha diṭṭhadaṭṭhaphuṭṭhavisānaṃ nāgānaṃ disvā, ḍaṃsitvā, phusitvā ca parūpaghātakaraṇe nāgiddhi veditabbā. Evaṃ sesānampi. Iddhiyeva iddhimayo, bhāvanāmayo iddhippayogo panettha na gahetabbo. Vuttañhetaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ –
有些人却说,依靠修习所成的神通也能伤害他人的身体。他们还认为,在伤害他人身体的同时,神通也会随之毁坏,就像投向着火房屋的水瓶会破碎一样。这只是他们自己的想法罢了。为什么呢?因为这种说法和善、受、寻、狭小这些三分法都不相符。怎么个不符法呢?这种修习所成的神通,是依第四禅而生的,在善的三分法里,它属于善或者无记,而杀生是不善;在受的三分法里,神通和不苦不乐受相应,杀生则和苦受相应;在寻的三分法里,神通是无寻无伺,杀生则是有寻有伺;在狭小的三分法里,神通是广大,杀生只是狭小。巴利
‘‘Keci pana bhāvanāmayiddhiyāpi parūpaghātakaraṇaṃ vadanti. Saha parūpaghātakaraṇena ca ādittagharūpari khittassa udakaghaṭassa bhedanaṃ viya iddhivināsañca icchanti, taṃ tesaṃ icchāmattameva. Kasmā? Yasmā taṃ kusalavedanāvitakkaparittattikādīhi na sameti. Kathaṃ? Ayañhi bhāvanāmayiddhi nāma catutthajjhānamayā kusalattike kusalā ceva abyākatā ca, pāṇātipāto akusalo. Vedanāttike adukkhamasukhasampayuttā, pāṇātipāto dukkhasampayutto. Vitakkattike avitakkaavicārā, pāṇātipāto savitakkasavicāro. Parittattike mahaggatā, pāṇātipāto parittoyevā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.172).
250 这里说的“于彼”,是指在前面那六种方便里。“连标示也”是说:标示就是指出,和标示一起的方便也叫标示,就像说“用长矛刺入”那样。因为应当这样说,所以“非标示”就是与此相反的说法,应当知道这是在表明相反的意思。在这里,每一种既可以是标示,也可以是非标示,所以它们的区分有两种,这是已经说明的,这就是句子的连接方式。在这六种方便中,正因为每一种都有被标示地做和非标示地做这两种情况,所以它们共有十二种区分,这在词句分析和注疏中都已经说明了。现在我要显示其中的判定,这就是本段的意趣。巴利
250.Tatthāti tesu chabbidhesu payogesu. Uddesopīti uddisanaṃ uddeso, taṃsahito payogopi uddesoti vuttaṃ hoti ‘‘kunte pavesehī’’ti yathā. Evaṃ vattabbatāya ca anuddesoti tabbiparītavacanameva ñāpakanti veditabbaṃ. Ettha ekeko uddesopi anuddesopi hotīti tesamayaṃ bhedo pana duvidho hotīti paridīpitoti yojanā. Imesu chasu payogesveva ekekasseva uddissānuddissakiriyamānatāya duvidhabhāvato tesaṃ dvādasavidho bhedo padabhājane ca aṭṭhakathāya ca dīpito, tattha vinicchayamidāni dassayissāmīti adhippāyo.
251 在很多人当中,就是在众多人里面。以那业,就是被称为打击的业。被缚,意思是:通过业的绳索将人引向恶趣,阻止其他业,而被缚。巴利
251.Bahūsupīti manussesu bahūsupi. Tena kammenāti pahāradānasaṅkhātena kammena. Bajjhatīti apāyaṃ netuṃ kammapāsena kammantaraṃ nivāretvā bajjhatīti attho.
252 在打击时,也就是在击打时。有身者的,即人身的。彼的,即被打者的。巴利
252.Pahārepīti paharaṇepi. Dehinoti manussaviggahassa. Tassāti pahaṭassa.
253 “刚被打时”是指被打的那一刹那。“之后”是指因为这个原因而在后来的时间里。“两种情况下都死”是指以这两种方式中的任意一种而死。“杀者”就是杀害的人。“仅从被打时”是指在他得到那足以致命的打击的那一刹那,也就是在死亡之前的阶段,用“仅”这个字来表示。在为致死以及为其他目的而给出的许多次打击中,无论什么时候,如果因为那个为致死而给出的打击而死亡,那么在给出打击的那一刹那,就犯波罗夷。如果不是出于致死的意图而给出打击,却因为那打击的力量而死了,那就不犯——这是这里要说明的意思。巴利
253.Pahaṭamatte vāti pahaṭakkhaṇe vā. Pacchāti tappaccayā kālantare vā. Ubhayathāpi ca mateti dvinnaṃ ākārānamaññatarena matepi. Hantā vadhako. Pahaṭamattasminti tasmiṃ maraṇārahapahārassa laddhakkhaṇeyeva, maraṇato pubbabhāgeyevāti mattasaddena dīpeti. Maraṇatthāya ca aññatthāya ca dinnesu anekesu pahāresu maraṇatthāya dinnappahāreneva yadā kadāci marissati, pahāradānakkhaṇeyeva pārājikaṃ hoti. Amaraṇādhippāyena dinnappahārabalena ce mareyya, na hotīti vuttaṃ hotīti.
254 两种加行:按照对指定对象所做与对未指定对象所做的差别来区分,就是亲手做和命令他人做这两种加行。巴利
254.Dve payogāti uddissānuddissakiriyābhedabhinnā sāhatthikāṇattikā dve payogā.
255 “作”是指行为。“差别”是指多样性。“命令的确定者”是指他们决定、确立命令,所以叫命令的确定者。巴利
255.Karaṇassāti kiriyāya. Visesoti nānattaṃ. Āṇattiniyāmakāti āṇattiṃ niyāmenti vavatthāpentīti āṇattiniyāmakā.
256 其中,“于彼”是指在那些命令决定者的六种方式当中。“青春等”则是用“等”这个字,把坚住、迟缓、嬉戏、老年等不同状态也都包括进来了。巴利
256.Tatthāti tesu āṇattiniyāmakesu chasu ākāresu. Yobbanādi cāti ādi-saddena thāvariyamandakhiḍḍavuddhādiavatthāviseso saṅgahito.
257 257. 论母中所说的“武器”是哪一个?所谓“杀有情”,就是用这个来杀害有情,所以叫杀有情,也就是刀等用来杀戮的工具。巴利
257. Yaṃ mātikāya niddiṭṭhaṃ satthaṃ, taṃ katamaṃ?. Sattamāraṇanti satte mārenti etenāti sattamāraṇaṃ, asiādivadhopakaraṇaṃ.
258 射,就是用箭等来射击。破,就是用锯等把东西分成两半。斩,就是用剑等把东西砍成两截。打,就是用槌等来击打。如是等种,就是这一类的方式。种种,就是很多种类。作之差别,意思是工具的差别,也就是杀害行为的差别。巴利
258.Vijjhananti usuādīhi vijjhanaṃ. Bhedananti kakacādīhi dvidhākaraṇaṃ. Chedananti khaggādīhi dvidhākaraṇaṃ. Tāḷananti muggarādīhi āghātanaṃ. Evamādividhoti evamādippakāro. Anekoti bahuko bhedo. Karaṇassa viseso kiriyāvisesoti attho.
259-60 如果命令者说“从前面打,杀掉”,而受命者却从后面……杀害,就应该这样连接理解。在这里,“事与命令相违”中,通过“凡说‘杀’……由此”显示了事上的相违;“从前面……杀害”则显示了命令上的相违。“根本住者”就是命令者。因为“根本”是指与先前行为相应的命令,住于其中,所以叫根本住者。巴利
259-60. ‘‘Purato paharitvāna mārehī’’ti yo bhāsito āṇāpakena, tena āṇattena pacchato…pe… māriteti yojanā. Vatthāṇatti visaṅketāti ettha ‘‘yaṃ ‘mārehī’ti…pe… tato’’ti vatthuvisaṅketo dassito. ‘‘Purato…pe… mārite’’ti āṇattivisaṅketo dassito. Mūlaṭṭhoti āṇāpako. Mūlanti hi pubbakiriyānurūpaṃ āṇāpanaṃ, tattha ṭhitoti mūlaṭṭho.
261 261. 用这个(例子)显示了相违时命令者不犯戒之后,为了显示约定没有违犯时两者都犯波罗夷,所以说“事”等等。应当这样连接:没有违越那件事而杀时,两者……已说;按照命令而杀时……已说。“杀于事中”,这是依其含义而得的。“两者”,指命令者和被命令者。“如时”,指不超越命令者下令的那一刻和被命令者杀害的那一刻。系缚就是束缚,由业而束缚,所以是业缚。或者这样说:以此而被束缚,所以是束缚;业本身就是束缚,所以是业缚。巴利
261. Iminā visaṅkete āṇāpakassa anāpattiṃ dassetvā saṅkete avirādhite ubhinnampi pārājikaṃ dassetumāha ‘‘vatthu’’ntiādi. Taṃ vatthuṃ avirajjhitvā mārite ubhayesaṃ…pe… udīrito, yathāṇatti ca mārite…pe… udīritoti yojanā. Mārite vatthusminti sāmatthiyā labbhati. Ubhayesanti āṇāpakaāṇattānaṃ. Yathākālanti āṇāpakassa āṇattikkhaṇaṃ, āṇattassa māraṇakkhaṇañca anatikkamitvā. Bandhanaṃ bandho, kammunā bandho kammabandho. Atha vā bajjhati etenāti bandho, kammameva bandho kammabandho.
264 没有约定就不存在违越约定。意思是:对双方来说,在各自的时间界限内,就只是业力的系缚。巴利
264.Visaṅketo nāti visaṅketo natthi, dvinnampi yathākālaparicchedaṃ kammabandhoyevāti attho.
265 “一切”是指在一切时间差别中;或者应该这样连接:应当以一切方式了知。“一切”就是以一切方式。“善分别者”是指智者,因为他能分别义理,所以这样称呼他。巴利
265.Sabbasoti sabbesu kālabhedesu, sabbaso veditabboti vā sambandho. Sabbasoti sabbappakārena. Vibhāvināti paṇḍitena. So hi atthaṃ vibhāvetīti tathā vutto.
266-7-8 “住在这个村里”这句话,是为了让人认出那个人而说的,并不是为了限定杀害的时机和地点。所以说了“无论住在哪里”,接着又说“对他没有偏离约定”。“对他”是指对下命令的人。也有写本写作“在那里”,意思是在那个命令中。文意连贯起来是:如果被明确命令“杀掉住在村里的仇敌”,却杀了住在林中的;或者被明确命令“杀掉住在林中的仇敌”,却杀了住在村里的。有些写本写作“比丘尼明确”,这不采纳,应当采用“或林或明确”这个读法。这里说的“没有偏离约定”,是指没有脱离命令的确切限定。巴利
266-7-8.‘‘Imaṃ gāme ṭhita’’nti idaṃ taṃ sañjānituṃ vuttaṃ, na māraṇakkhaṇaṭṭhānaniyamatthāyāti ‘‘yattha katthaci ṭhita’’nti vatvāpi ‘‘natthi tassa visaṅketo’’ti āha. Tassāti āṇāpakassa. ‘‘Tatthā’’ti vā pāṭho, tassaṃ āṇattiyanti attho. ‘‘Gāmeyeva ṭhitaṃ veriṃ mārehī’’ti sāvadhāraṇaṃ āṇatto vane ce ṭhitaṃ māreti vā ‘‘vaneyeva ṭhitaṃ veriṃ mārehī’’ti sāvadhāraṇaṃ vutto gāme ṭhitaṃ ce māreti vāti yojanā. ‘‘Bhikkhunā sāvadhāraṇa’’nti ca potthakesu likhanti, taṃ aggahetvā ‘‘vane vāsāvadhāraṇa’’nti pāṭhoyeva gahetabbo. Vigato saṅketo āṇattiniyāmo etthāti visaṅketo.
269 在一切处,指的是村庄、树林、庭院、房屋等所有地方。从差别,指的是从各不相同而言。巴利
269.Sabbadesesūti gāmavanaaṅgaṇagehādīsu sabbesu ṭhānesu. Bhedatoti nānattato.
270 如果有人被吩咐“用刀杀”,那么不管他用什么刀去杀,都不算偏离约定。巴利
270. ‘‘Satthena pana mārehī’’ti yena kenaci yo āṇatto, tena yena kenaci satthena mārite visaṅketo natthīti yojanā.
271-2 用这把剑杀,这里“hi”是补足音节的虚词。如果被吩咐说“用这把剑杀”,却用另一把剑杀;或者被吩咐说“用这把剑的这个刃杀那个敌人”,却用另一个刃杀,或用剑柄杀,或用剑尖杀——这样杀的话,就只是违背了约定而已。这是说:仅仅违背约定,并不构成波罗夷。剑柄,就是剑的握把。剑尖,就是剑的尖端。“只是违背约定而已”,这句话是在表明:仅仅违背约定,不构成波罗夷。巴利
271-2.Iminā vāsinā hīti ettha hīti padapūraṇe. ‘‘Iminā asinā māreyyā’’ti vutto aññena asinā māreti vā ‘‘tvaṃ imassa asissa etāya dhārāya māraya’’ iti vutto taṃ veriṃ sace itarāya dhārāya māreti vā tharunā māreti vā tuṇḍena māreti vā, tathā mārite visaṅketoyeva hotīti yojanā. Tharunāti khaggamuṭṭhinā. Tuṇḍenāti khaggatuṇḍena. ‘‘Visaṅketovā’’ti saṅketavirādheneva pārājikaṃ na hotīti dassanapadametaṃ.
273 一切武器种类:这里说的是刀、剑等一切武器的统称。特别地:是从差别来说的。巴利
273.Sabbāvudhakajātisūti idhāvuttakarapālikāchurikādisabbapaharaṇasāmaññesu. Visesatoti bhedato.
274 “被他人”是指被另一位比丘。“他”是指被命令的那个人。杀坐着的他,并不构成错杀;因为没有明确限定说“只杀正在走的人”,所以“坐着的也还是同一个人”,杀他的人不算错杀。不作限定的说法,是为了让他人明白所指。意思是:并不是按行住坐卧的威仪姿态来限定。巴利
274.Parenāti bhikkhunā. Soti āṇatto. Nisinnaṃ naṃ māreti, visaṅketo na vijjatīti ‘‘gacchantameva mārehī’’ti sāvadhāraṇaṃ avuttattā ‘‘nisinnopi soyevā’’ti taṃ mārentassa visaṅketo na hoti, avadhāraṇaṃ antarena kathanaṃ taṃ sañjānāpetuṃ vuccatīti iriyāpathaniyāmakaṃ na hotīti adhippāyo.
275-6 在没有限定词的情况下,已经说明了不存在混淆;现在为了指出在有明确限定时,不同威仪姿态之间会有混淆,所以说“只杀害坐着的”等等。如果一个人被告知“只杀害坐着的”,却去杀害行走的人,就应知道这是混淆。如果被告知“只杀害行走的”,却去杀害坐着的人,也应知道这是混淆。这就是句义关联。正是针对这个关联顺序,才说“如其次第”。巴利
275-6. Asati sāvadhāraṇe visaṅketābhāvaṃ dassetvā idāni sāvadhāraṇe iriyāpathantaresu visaṅketaṃ dassetumāha ‘‘nisinnaṃyevā’’tiādi. ‘‘Nisinnaṃyeva mārehī’’ti vutto gacchantaṃ māreti, visaṅketanti ñātabbaṃ. ‘‘Gacchantaṃyeva mārehī’’ti vutto nisinnaṃ māreti, visaṅketanti ñātabbanti yojanā. Imameva yojanākkamaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘yathākkama’’nti.
277 因为已经射中,所以用箭等射中。巴利
277.Vijjhitvāti sarādīhi vijjhitvā.
278 切断:用刀等切断。又:指加行。巴利
278.Chinditvāti asiādīhi chinditvā. Puna soti payogo.
279 在“所作”当中,指的是刺击等各类动作的差别。巴利
279.Karaṇesūti vijjhanādikiriyāvisesesu.
280-1 到这里,已经说明了教令有明确限定的情况。现在为了显示即使依据长、短等特征也能成立的情形中可能发生的偏离约定,所以接着说“长”等等。
依照注疏中的话:“长……(中略)……粗,杀了他,这是没有限定地教令”,正是由于这段注疏文字,去掉“就”这个字之后,所谓“长,杀了他”,就是没有限定地教令了某人。如果那个被教令的人杀了任何像那样的人,在这里就没有混淆,双方都犯波罗夷。应当这样连接理解。
同样地,对“短”等一切词,也应当逐一分别连接理解。
“没有限定地”,是为了显示没有混淆的原因。“就”字是句子的修饰。“在这里”,是指在教令的运用中。因为说了“双方都犯波罗夷”,所以除了教令者之外,其他在所说的那个时刻的人,就用“任何像那样的”这句话来显示。巴利
280-1. Ettāvatā āṇattiniyāmakaniddesaṃ dassetvā idāni dīghādiliṅgavasenāpi sambhavantaṃ visaṅketaṃ dassetumāha ‘‘dīgha’’ntiādi. ‘‘Dīghaṃ…pe… thūlaṃ mārehīti aniyametvā āṇāpetī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.174) aṭṭhakathāvacanato eva-kāraṃ vinā ‘‘dīghaṃ mārehī’’ti aniyametvā kenaci yo āṇatto hoti, sopi āṇatto yaṃ kiñci tādisaṃ sace māreti, natthi tattha visaṅketo, ubhinnampi parājayoti yojanā. Evaṃ ‘‘rassa’’ntiādisabbapadehipi paccekaṃ yojanā kātabbā. Aniyametvāti visaṅketābhāvassa hetudassanaṃ. Evakāro vākyālaṅkāro. Tatthāti āṇattikappayoge. ‘‘Ubhinnampi parājayo’’ti vuttattā āṇāpakaṃ vinā aññaṃ yathāvuttakkhaṇaṃ manussaviggahaṃ ‘‘yaṃ kiñci tādisa’’nti iminā dasseti.
如果教唆者下完命令后使被教唆者杀害教唆者自己,教唆者犯恶作罪后死去,被教唆者犯波罗夷。如果教唆者是为了自己而下命令,被教唆者不知情却杀了同类的其他人,因为地点没有限定,教唆者得以脱罪,另一个人则被业力缠缚。如果限定了地点说“在某处夜宿处或日间住处坐着的这类人,杀了他”,结果在那里杀了教唆者以外的人,那么两人都犯波罗夷。如果在那个范围之外杀,就只有杀人者被业力缠缚。如果教唆者是为了自己而下命令,另一个人就在那里杀了那个人,教唆者犯恶作罪,被教唆者犯波罗夷。如果在别处杀,教唆者脱罪。如果不知情而在那里或别处杀了其他人,杀人者犯波罗夷,教唆者脱罪。涉及无间业的情形,应当与无间业联系起来理解。巴利
Sace āṇāpako āṇāpetvā attānameva māreti, āṇāpako dukkaṭaṃ āpajjitvā marati, āṇattassa pārājikaṃ. Āṇāpakena attānamuddissa āṇattiyā katāya āṇatto ajānitvā tādisaṃ aññaṃ māreti, okāsassa aniyamitattā āṇāpako muccati, itaro kammunā bajjhati. Yadi ‘‘amukasmiṃ rattiṭṭhāne vā divāṭṭhāne vā nisinnaṃ īdisaṃ mārehī’’ti okāsaṃ niyametvā āṇāpeti, tattha āṇāpakato aññasmiṃ mārite ubhinnampi pārājikaṃ. Tato bahi mārite vadhakasseva kammabandho. Āṇāpako attānameva uddissa āṇāpeti, itaro ca tameva tattha māreti, āṇāpakassa dukkaṭaṃ, āṇattassa pārājikaṃ. Sace aññattha māreti, mūlaṭṭho muccati. Ajānitvā aññaṃ tattha vā aññattha vā māreti, vadhako pārājikaṃ āpajjati, mūlaṭṭho muccati. Ānantariyavatthumhi ānantariyena saddhiṃ yojetabbaṃ.
282 282. 如果有人为了某个人而挖陷阱,那么对于这样挖陷阱的人,就犯下叫做恶作的罪——这是补入连结的运用。连结有两种:如文连结和补入连结。其中,只是把经文中出现的词直接连接起来,就是如文连结;为了补足文义,把经文中的词和补入的词一起连接起来,应当知道这就是补入连结。在某些版本中可以看到“‘掘者’和‘陷阱’”这样的读法。有人说“‘掘者如是陷阱’这个读法更好”,对此没有疑惑。又说:“‘坑’是‘陷阱’的另一种说法。”由此——巴利
282. Yo manussaṃ kañci uddissa sace opātaṃ khaṇati, tathā opātaṃ khaṇantassa tassa dukkaṭaṃ nāma āpatti hotīti ajjhāhārayojanā. Yojanā ca nāmesā yathārutayojanā, ajjhāhārayojanāti duvidhā. Tattha pāṭhāgatapadānameva yojanā yathārutayojanā, ūnapūraṇatthamajjhāhārapadehi saha pāṭhāgatapadānaṃ yojanā ajjhāhārayojanāti veditabbā. ‘‘Khaṇantassaca opāta’’nti potthakesu pāṭho dissati. ‘‘Khaṇantassa tathopāta’nti pāṭho sundaro’’ti nissandehe vuttaṃ. ‘‘Āvāṭanti etassa ‘opāta’nti pariyāyo’’ti ca vuttaṃ. Tatopi –
如果有人为了某个人,
如果有人挖了陷阱坑,
在刹那,它对他也是如此;
犯恶作罪。巴利
‘‘Manussaṃ kañci uddissa; Yo ce khaṇativāṭakaṃ; Khaṇato taṃ tathā tassa; Hoti āpatti dukkaṭa’’nti. –
这个读法更好。因为对挖掘天然土地的人而言,属于波罗夷的加行,所以按加行计算,是恶作。巴利
Pāṭho sundarataro. Jātapathaviṃ khaṇantassa pārājikapayogattā payogagaṇanāya dukkaṭaṃ.
283 这里,“在那里”是指那个坑里。“那个人的”是指掉进去的人的身体。“苦的生起”是指苦生起的原因。“那个比丘的”是指挖这个坑的那个比丘。如果那人掉进去后死了,当他死亡时,那个比丘就犯波罗夷。巴利
283.Tatthāti tasmiṃ āvāṭe. Tassāti patitassa manussaviggahassa. Dukkhassuppattiyāti dukkhuppattihetu. Tassāti yena āvāṭo khato, tassa bhikkhuno. Patitvā so ce marati, tasmiṃ mate tassa bhikkhuno pārājikaṃ bhaveti yojanā.
284 “于他处”是指为了某个特定对象而挖的坑,却用于另一处。“不针对”是修饰动作的词,意思是“不针对地做”。如果它是修饰陷阱的词,就拆成“不针对的陷阱”。就像在“被称为最上”等说法里那样,o 的位置变成 a,还加上 ma,意思是挖了一个不针对任何对象的陷阱。巴利
284.Aññasminti yaṃ samuddissa āvāṭo khato, tato aññasmiṃ. Anuddissakanti kiriyāvisesanaṃ, anuddissakaṃ katvāti attho. Opātavisesanaṃ ce, ‘‘anuddissako opāto’’ti padacchedo. ‘‘Aggamakkhāyatī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 5.139; a. ni. 4.34; 10.15; itivu. 90; netti. 170) viya o-kāraṭṭhāne a-kāro, ma-kārāgamo ca daṭṭhabbo, anodissako opāto khato hotīti attho.
285 如果挖了一个不针对特定对象的陷阱,心里想着“不管是谁,掉到这里面摔死”,那么有多少人掉进去摔死,他就有多少过失。这里用“不管是谁”这个说法,就把自己的父母也算进去了。“过失”指的是业系缚的过失,而波罗夷罪只有一条。“他的”,指的是那个挖不针对特定对象的陷阱的人。巴利
285. ‘‘Ettha patitvā yo koci maratū’’ti anodissako opāto sace khato hoti, yattakā nipatitvā maranti ce, assa tattakā dosā hontīti yojanā. ‘‘Yo kocī’’ti iminā attano mātāpitaro ca saṅgahitā. Dosāti kammabandhadosā, pārājikaṃ pana ekameva. Assāti yena anodissa opāto khato, tassa.
286 286.“在无间业事中死亡”这句是文句的补充说明。“在那里堕落后”是承接语,意思是:对阿拉汉、母亲、父亲,在那处堕落后死亡、命终。“无间业”这个词里,ka 这个后缀应当理解为表示自义、卑劣义或名称义。“如是”这个词,把复合词“在无间业事中”里作为组成部分的“在事中”,以及“在那里堕落后死亡”这一句,都一并带出来。应当这样连接:在土喇咤亚等事中,在那里堕落后死亡时,就构成土喇咤亚等罪。这里说的是:堕入那个坑穴,导致夜叉等死亡时,以及在波罗夷事中产生痛苦时,构成土喇咤亚;导致人身死亡时,构成波罗夷;导致畜生死亡时,构成波逸提。巴利
286.Ānantariyavatthusmiṃ mateti pāṭhaseso, ‘‘tattha patitvā’’ti adhikāro, arahante, mātari, pitari ca tasmiṃ patitvā mate kālakateti attho. Ānantariyakanti ettha sakatthe, kucchite , saññāyaṃ vā ka-paccayo daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Tathā’’ti iminā ‘‘ānantariyavatthusmi’’nti imasmiṃ samāsapade avayavabhūtampi ‘‘vatthusmi’’nti idañca ‘‘tattha patitvā mate’’ti idañca ākaḍḍhati. Thullaccayādīnaṃ vatthusmiṃ tattha patitvā mate thullaccayādayo hontīti yojanā. Tasmiṃ āvāṭe patitvā yakkhādīsu matesu, pārājikavatthuno dukkhuppattiyañca thullaccayaṃ, manussaviggahe mate pārājikaṃ, tiracchāne mate pācittiyanti vuttaṃ hoti.
287 杀生有两种:因为有两种死亡,所以杀生有两种。一种犯波罗夷,另一种只是结下业缚。所谓“一者一次杀害”:当母亲或胎儿死亡时,就只有一种杀生。巴利
287.Pāṇātipātā dveti dvinnaṃ matattā dve pāṇātipātā, ekena pārājikaṃ, itarena kammabandhoyeva. Ekovekekadhaṃsaneti mātu vā dārakassa vā maraṇe eko pāṇātipātova.
288 288. 如果被贼追赶,在这里掉进陷阱就会死,那么挖陷阱的人就已经犯了波罗夷——这是传闻,应该这样连接。“传闻”这个词表示对传闻有所不信服。巴利
288. Corehi anubaddho ettha āvāṭe patitvā marissati ce, opātakhaṇakasseva pārājikaṃ hoti kirāti yojanā. Kirāti anussavane arucisūcakaṃ.
289-90 289-90. “比丘的仇敌”是指其他与比丘有仇怨的人。其中,如果有人在陷阱里把人弄下去杀死,同样,仇敌把自行掉进陷阱的人拖出来杀死,或者化生的人出生在陷阱里、无法从中出来而死,那么在所有情况和上述每一种情形中,都是挖陷阱的人犯波罗夷——应当这样连接理解。“出生后”中的“后”字,只是用来补足音节。凡是哪里没有说明这些虚词的含义,就应当知道那里它们只是补足音节而已。巴利
289-90.Verino bhikkhuto aññe veripuggalā. Tattha tasmiṃ opāte sace manussaṃ pātetvā mārenti, tathā verino tattha sayameva patitaṃ manussaṃ bahi nīharitvā sace mārenti, tattha opapātikā manussā opāte nibbattitvā tato nikkhantuṃ asakkontā matā ce siyuṃ, sabbattha ca yathāvuttasabbavāresu opātakhaṇakasseva parājayoti yojanā. Nibbattitvā hīti ettha hīti padapūraṇe. Yattha yattha nipātasaddānaṃ attho na dassito, tattha tattha padapūraṇamattatā veditabbā.
291 “夜叉等”里的“等”字,把畜生也包括进去了。“依事物”是指以夜叉和畜生作为土喇咤亚和波逸提所依的事物。“土喇咤亚等”里的“等”字,把波逸提也包括进去了。巴利
291.Yakkhādayoti ādi-saddena tiracchānānaṃ saṅgaho. Vatthuvasāti thullaccayapācittiyānaṃ vatthubhūtayakkhatiracchānānaṃ vasā. Thullaccayādayoti ādi-saddena pācittiyasaṅgaho.
293 这个“方法”指的是前面说过的“无犯”。巴利
293.Ayaṃnayoti ‘‘anāpattī’’ti yathāvutto nayo.
294-5 “被缚住”:如果是必定会被缚住。“在那里”:就是在那陷阱里。“刚从手中脱离的时候”这句话,说明这个做法确实能达到目的。巴利
294-5.Bajjhantīti sace avassaṃ bajjhanti. Tatthāti tasmiṃ pāse. ‘‘Hatthato muttamattasmi’’nti iminā payogassa atthasādhakataṃ dīpeti.
296 如果有人特意设下陷阱,那么当它绑住的是别的众生时,就不构成犯戒——这句话应当这样连贯理解。巴利
296. Yaṃ pana uddissa pāso oḍḍito, tato aññassa bandhane tu anāpatti pakāsitāti yojanā.
297 “无偿”就是不要报酬。“罗网制作者本人”就是罗网制作者自己。“业缚”就是杀生。众生被它系缚,所以叫“缚”;业本身就是缚,所以叫“业缚”。本来应当说到波罗夷罪的程度,但只要这个业还在持续,众生就在其中被系缚而死。对于死去的众生,以最初死亡者来说,构成波罗夷;对其余的众生,则因为生起被称为杀生的不善积聚,为了把这一切都总摄起来,并以共通的方式显示这两者,所以说“业缚”。巴利
297.Mudhā vāpīti amūlena vāpi. Mūlaṭṭhassevāti pāsakārakasseva. Kammabandhoti pāṇātipāto. Bajjhati etenāti bandho, kammameva bandho kammabandho. Pārājikamatte vattabbepi yāva so vattati, tāva tattha bajjhitvā matasattesu paṭhamamatassa vasena pārājikaṃ, avasesānaṃ pāṇātipātasaṅkhātassa akusalarāsino sambhavato taṃ sabbaṃ saṅgahetvā sāmaññena dvayampi dassetumāha ‘‘kammabandho’’ti.
298 如果得到罗网的人,把已经脱落的罗网重新安设好;或者看见众生从旁边经过,就造一道围栏,把他们引到面前来;或者把罗网杆立得更牢;或者把罗网绳绑得更紧;或者把木桩打得更稳固。这是为了总摄注疏中已有的判定,所以说“或者把已经脱落的罗网重新安设好”。这里用“或者”这个字来表示没有明说的总摄之义,从而显示出从“安设”等一直到“绑紧”所说明的行为为止的各种加行。在“或者更稳固”这里,“或者”这个字总摄了注疏中剩下的“把木桩打得更稳固”这一行为,应当理解为在两处都是表示不同方式的变换。“如是”就是指在这样的情况下。也就是说,当得到罗网的人也对罗网做了这样的特殊处理时,就是所说的意思。“二者”是指造罗网的人和现在得到并守护罗网的人,这两者。巴利
298. ‘‘Sace yena laddho, so uggaḷitaṃ vā pāsaṃ saṇṭhapeti, tassa passena vā gacchante disvā vatiṃ katvā sammukhe paveseti, thaddhataraṃ vā pāsayaṭṭhiṃ ṭhapeti, daḷhataraṃ vā pāsarajjuṃ bandhati, thirataraṃ vā khāṇukaṃ ākoṭetī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.176) aṭṭhakathāgataṃ vinicchayaṃ saṅgahitumāha ‘‘pāsamuggaḷitampi vā’’ti. Ettha avuttasamuccayatthena pi-saddena ‘‘saṇṭhapetī’’tiādikā ‘‘bandhatī’’ti dassitakiriyāvasānā payogā dassitā. Thiraṃ vāpīti ettha api-saddo aṭṭhakathāya avasiṭṭhaṃ ‘‘khāṇukaṃ ākoṭetī’’ti kiriyaṃ samuccinoti ubhayatthapi pakārantaravikappatthattāti gahetabbā. Evanti evaṃ sati. Yena pāso laddho, tenāpi evaṃ pāse katavisese satīti vuttaṃ hoti. Ubhinnanti pāsakārakassa ca idāni labhitvā paṭijaggantassa cāti ubhayesaṃ.
299-300 “凡”是指做罗网的人,“得罗网者”是指这些人当中的任何一个。令脱落,就是破坏掉,意思是说,让那里的众生不被缠住。“于其中”是指重新设置好的罗网。谁解脱?得到罗网的那个人,他就解脱。巴利
299-300.Yoti pāsakārako, laddhapāsakoti imesaṃ yo koci. Uggaḷāpetvāti vighāṭetvā, yathā tattha pāṇino na bajjhanti, evaṃ katvāti attho. Tattha cāti puna saṇṭhapite pāse ca. Ko vimuccati? Yena laddho, so.
301-2 “守护”是指:因为守护,所以不得解脱,应当这样连接理解。就像“看见狮子而生起恐惧”这类说法里一样,应当知道这里的 tvā 词尾是表示原因。“那另一个人……中略……也不得解脱”这里,“不”就是“并非”的意思。“或者彻底灭除”是指:让那罗网杆不再成为任何众生丧命的助缘,就用切断等方式把它彻底灭除。那根罗网杆。谁得解脱?制作罗网的人。巴利
301-2.Gopetvāti gopanahetu mokkho na hotīti yojanā. ‘‘Sīhaṃ disvā bhayaṃ hotī’’tiādīsu viya hetumhi tvā-paccayo daṭṭhabbo. Tamañño…pe… na ca muccatīti ettha na cāti neva. Nāsetvā sabbaso vāti so yathā yassa kassaci sattassa vināsopakaraṇaṃ na hoti, tathā chindanādīhi nāsetvā. Taṃ pāsayaṭṭhiṃ. Ko vimuccati? Pāsakārako.
303 把尖桩竖起来的人,就是指把尖桩埋进地里的人。装置的人,就是指把它安放好的人。巴利
303.Sūlaṃropentassāti sūlaṃ nikhaṇantassa. Sajjentassāti saṇṭhapentassa.
304 “无意”在这里省略了“以某种行为方式”这个说法,要和“即使死了也无罪”这些词连起来理解。意思是:没有事先想过“我要用这个办法杀死这个人”,没有预谋,没有杀心,而是为了别的目的去做,即使对方死了,也没有罪。就像用杵击打、投掷等事例里说的那样:虽然知道对方是有情,但没有“我要用这个办法杀死这个人”这种与违犯生起心相应的分别,只是为了别的目的而行动,即使人死了,也没有波罗夷罪。巴利
304.Asañciccāti ettha ‘‘katena payogenā’’ti pāṭhaseso, ‘‘matepi anāpattī’’ti etehi sambandho. ‘‘Imināhaṃ upakkamena imaṃ māressāmī’’ti acetetvā apakappetvā avadhakacetano hutvā katena aññatthikenapi upakkamena pare matepi āpatti natthīti attho, musalussāpanādivatthūsu (pārā. 180) viya ayaṃ sattotisaññī hutvā ‘‘iminā upakkamena imaṃ māressāmī’’ti vītikkamasamuṭṭhāpakacetanāsampayuttavikapparahito hutvā aññatthikena payogena manusse matepi pārājikaṃ natthīti vuttaṃ hoti.
不知道“用这个手段,这个人会死”而做,即使别人因此死了,也无犯。就像毒食那件事(《波逸提》181)里说的:不知道“这是致死的原因”而做,即使人死了,也无犯。这里说的就是这个意思。“如是”这个词是用来承接“无犯”的。怀着非致死之心,即伴随不欲其死之愿的心,以某种手段行事,即使别人因此死了,也无犯,就像老年出家者等事例(《波罗夷》180)里说的那样。疯狂者等的情况,和前面所说的一样。巴利
Ajānantassāti ‘‘iminā ayaṃ marissatī’’ti ajānantassa upakkamena pare matepi anāpatti, visagatapiṇḍapātavatthumhi (pārā. 181) viya ‘‘idaṃ kāraṇa’’nti ajānitvā katena manusse matepi anāpattīti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Tathā’’ti iminā ‘‘anāpattī’’ti ākaḍḍhati. Amaraṇacittassa amaraṇicchāsahitacittassa upakkamena pare matepi anāpatti vuddhapabbajitādivatthūsu (pārā. 180) viyāti attho. Ummattakādayo vuttasarūpāyeva.
305 通过“在人中”这一说法,以“支分”的方式说明了人的状态。通过“如果他的心与死亡相连”这一说法,说明了心与死亡相连的性质。巴利
305.‘‘Manussapāṇimhī’’ti iminā manussabhāvo aṅgabhāvena dassito. ‘‘Sacassa cittaṃ maraṇūpasaṃhita’’nti iminā maraṇūpasaṃhitacittatā dassitā.
《律抉择》的注释巴利
Vinayavinicchayavaṇṇanāya
第四波罗夷论的注释巴利
Catutthapārājikakathāvaṇṇanā
306-7 像这样,用不太简略也不太详细的方式说明了第三波罗夷的判定之后,现在为了说明第四波罗夷的判定,说出了“不存在”等话。其中,把“不存在”和“于自身”对应起来看,把“禅那等差别”和“上人法”对应起来看,把“宣说”和“若比丘”对应起来看,按能力补足后,应当用“于自身不存在”等方式来连接理解。巴利
306-7. Evaṃ nātisaṅkhepavitthāranayena tatiyapārājikavinicchayaṃ dassetvā idāni catutthapārājikavinicchayaṃ dassetumāha ‘‘asanta’’ntiādi. Tattha ‘‘asanta’’nti apekkhitvā ‘‘attanī’’ti ca ‘‘jhānādibheda’’nti apekkhitvā ‘‘uttarimanussadhamma’’nti ca ‘‘samudācareyyā’’ti apekkhitvā ‘‘yo bhikkhū’’ti ca sāmatthiyā labbhatīti ajjhāharitvā ‘‘attani asanta’’ntiādinā nayena yojetabbaṃ.
在自身中不存在:因为在那个生命体、自己的相续里没有生起,所以是不存在的。当作是自己所有的:就是当作自己所摄属的,当作好像在自己身上真实存在一样,把它引到自己这里。依有而转:从结生开始就转起的存在,以心去决意、推度,安立在心里,这样说。且除去他说:就是除去后面将要说的“住在你精舍里的比丘”这类比喻性的说法。且除去增上慢:就是除去那种把未见当作已见的已得慢,也就是“我已证得上人法”的增上慢。禅那等差别:禅那等是殊胜的差别,具有禅那等差别,也就是“所谓上人法,就是禅那、解脱、定、等至、智见、道修习、果作证、烦恼断除、离盖、心乐于空寂处”,这是词句分别里所说的禅那等法的殊胜,就是这个意思。“上人法,就是上人的禅那者以及圣者之法”:这是注释里说的,因为是由得禅那的人和八种圣者所证得的,所以属于他们所有,这就算作他们所有的上人法。巴利
Attaniasantanti tasmiṃ attabhāve attano santāne anuppāditatāya avijjamānaṃ. Attassitameva katvāti attupanāyikaṃ katvā attani vijjamānaṃ viya katvā taṃ upanetvā . Bhavaṃ adhiṭṭhāya ca vattamānanti paṭisandhito paṭṭhāya ca vattantaṃ bhavaṃ cittena adhiṭṭhahitvā takketvā, citte ṭhapetvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Aññāpadesañca vināti ‘‘yo te vihāre vasatīdha bhikkhū’’tiādinā nayena vakkhamānaṃ pariyāyakathaṃ ṭhapetvā. Adhimānañca vināti adiṭṭhe diṭṭhasaññitādisabhāvaṃ adhigatamānasaṅkhātaṃ ‘‘adhigatauttarimanussadhammo ahamhī’’ti adhimānañca ṭhapetvā. Jhānādibhedanti jhānādayo bhedā visesā yassa taṃ jhānādibhedaṃ, ‘‘uttarimanussadhammo nāma jhānaṃ vimokkho samādhi samāpatti ñāṇadassanaṃ maggabhāvanā phalasacchi kiriyā kilesappahānaṃ vinīvaraṇatā cittassa suññāgāre abhiratī’’ti (pārā. 198, 199) padabhājane vuttaṃ jhānādidhammavisesanti attho. ‘‘Uttarimanussadhammanti uttarimanussānaṃ jhāyīnañceva ariyānañca dhamma’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.197) aṭṭhakathāya vuttaṃ jhānalābhīhi ceva aṭṭhahi ariyapuggalehi ca adhigatattā tesaṃ santakanti saṅkhyaṃ gataṃ uttarimanussadhammaṃ.
对于站在表露途径中的人,无论是以身还是以语,如果任何比丘宣说,应当把这句话接上前面的话来理解。“站在表露途径中的人”,是指在十二肘范围内的处所中站着的任何人,也就是律分别里所说的“女人或男子、在家者或出家者”。“以身”是指用手印等身体动作。由于义注中说“舍戒通过手印不成立,而妄称得上人法即使通过手印也成立”,所以此处手印等手部变化以及肢节的动摇都应当以“以身”这个词来摄受。“以语”是指站在能听到的范围内,用对方能听懂的任何说法。“任何比丘”是指任何已受具足戒的人,不论是长老、新学还是中等者。“宣说”是指在“我证入初禅”这类说法中,说出任何一种。“彼义”是指他所说那句话的意思。“被知即”就是仅仅被知道。对女人或男子,不论是对某个特定对象说的,还是没对特定对象说的,只要有一个站在能听到范围内的人,在话刚说完的当下,就以“这个人是初禅获得者”这类方式知道了他所说的意思。“彼”要接上前文来理解,即“那个人再也不可能在增长状态中”。意思是说,把自身并不存在的功德当成存在一样,站在贪欲行为中这样说话的人,虽然依戒而住,却不可能在教法中,通过逐步获得的世间和出世间功德,证得被称为觉的智慧。用什么譬喻呢?所以说“如同……乃至……增长状态”。“如”和“如是”相连,意思是:就像多罗树顶被砍断后不可能再生长,那个犯波罗夷的人也应这样看待。巴利
Viññattipathe ṭhitassa kāyena vā vācāya vā yo bhikkhu samudācareyyāti ajjhāharitvā yojetabbaṃ. Viññattipathe ṭhitassāti dvādasahatthabbhantare padese ṭhitassa ‘‘itthiyā vā purisassa vā gahaṭṭhassa vā pabbajitassa vā’’ti (pārā. 198) padabhājane vuttassa yassa kassaci. Kāyena vāti hatthamuddādivasena kāyena vā. ‘‘Sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hatthamuddāya sīsaṃ na otarati, idaṃ abhūtārocanaṃ hatthamuddāyapi otaratī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.215) aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttattā idha hatthamuddādihatthavikāro ca aṅgapaccaṅgacopanañca ‘‘kāyenā’’ti iminā gahetabbaṃ. Vācāya vāti yo savanūpacāre ṭhito tena viññātuṃ sakkuṇeyyena yena kenaci vohārena vā. Yo bhikkhūti yo upasampanno thero vā navo vā majjhimo vā. Samudācareyyāti ‘‘paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajjāmī’’tiādivacanappakāresu yaṃ kañci pakāraṃ vadeyya. Tadattheti tena vuttavākyassa atthe. Ñātevāti ñāte eva. Mātugāmaṃ vā purisaṃ vā yaṃ kiñci uddissa vutte, teneva vā anuddissa vutte savanūpacāre ṭhitena yena kenaci manussabhūtena vacanasamanantarameva ‘‘ayaṃ paṭhamajjhānalābhī’’tiādike yathāvutte atthappakāre ñāteyeva. ‘‘So’’ti ajjhāharitvā ‘‘so puna ruḷhibhāve abhabbo’’ti yojetabbaṃ, attani avijjamānaguṇaṃ santaṃ viya katvā icchācāre ṭhatvā evaṃ kathitapuggalo sīle patiṭṭhāya uparūpari labbhamānalokiyalokuttaraguṇehi buddhisaṅkhātaṃ sāsane buddhimadhigantuṃ anarahoti attho . Kiṃ viyāti āha ‘‘yatheva…pe… ruḷibhāve’’ti. ‘‘Yathā’’ti etena sambandho ‘‘tathā’’ti, yathā tālo matthakacchinno abhabbo puna viruḷhiyā, sopi pārājikaṃ āpanno tatheva daṭṭhabboti attho.
308-9 现在,为了显示在“仅被知道就不能”和“且没有另外的说法”这两个句子中,依差别之义而可能产生的罪堕差别,所以说“仅不存在”等。巴利
308-9. Idāni ‘‘ñāteva abhabbo’’ti ca ‘‘aññāpadesañca vinā’’ti ca etasmiṃ vākyadvaye byatirekatthavasena sambhavantaṃ āpattibhedaṃ dassetumāha ‘‘asantamevā’’tiādi.
“紧接着”是指在说完“我进入初禅”这类话之后紧接着。“那个人”是指站在十二肘距离内、听到了那番话的另一个人。“知道”则是说,以“这个人是初禅的获得者”这种方式,按照对方所说的话去理解而不弄错意思,不久就知道了,这就是它的含义。但如果有人自己没有得到禅那等,或者因为对经教的学习和提问等不熟悉,虽然不了解禅那等的真实面貌,仅仅因为曾经听过“禅那、解脱、定、等至”这些词,当听到“我进入初禅”这类话时,如果他能知道“这个人据说进入了禅那”这么一点意思,那么注疏中也把他算作“知道”。这里的“hi”字表示强调确定。对于自己所说的话,仅仅被对方知道到那种程度,就说明那个显示不实功德的人,虽然登上了这座具足果德成就的教法大阶梯,却不能享用果实,退失堕落了,这就叫“死”,这就是所说的意思。为了显示这一含义的差别,前面已经用“不存在”等说法讲过了,因为这里是随说的方式,所以不会犯重复的过失,应当这样理解。巴利
Anantaranti ‘‘paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajjāmī’’tiādivacanasamanantarameva. Soti dvādasahatthabbhantare ṭhatvā yena taṃ vacanaṃ sutaṃ, so paro puggalo. Jānāti ceti ‘‘ayaṃ paṭhamajjhānalābhī’’tiādivasena tena vuttavacanappakārena atthaṃ avirādhetvā acireneva sace jānātīti attho. Yo pana jhānādīnaṃ attanā aladdhabhāvena vā āgame uggahaparipucchādivasena aparicitattā vā jhānādisarūpaṃ ajānantopi kevalaṃ ‘‘jhānaṃ vimokkho samādhi samāpattī’’tiādivacanānaṃ sutapubbattā tena ‘‘paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajjāmī’’tiādivacane vutte ‘‘jhānaṃ kira esa samāpajjatī’’ti yadi ettakamatthampi jānāti, sopi ‘‘jānāti’’cceva aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.215) vuttoti gahetabbo. Cuto hīti hi-saddo avadhāraṇe, attanā vutte tena tattakeyeva ñāte so asantaguṇadīpako pāpapuggalo phalasampattisampannaṃ imaṃ sāsanāmatamahāpādapaṃ āruyhāpi phalaṃ aparibhuñjitvā virādhetvā patitvā mato nāma hotīti vuttaṃ hoti. Imassevatthassa ‘‘asanta’’miccādinā paṭhamaṃ vuttassapi byatirekatthaṃ dassetuṃ anuvādavasena vuttattā punaruttidoso na hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
现在为了说明这个反面的情况,经文说“如果不……中略……有”。如果那个人告诉对方,而对方不知道,那么对于这个宣说不实功德的人来说,他就是妄语者。巴利
Idāni taṃ byatirekatthaṃ dassetumāha ‘‘no ce…pe… hotī’’ti. Yassa so āroceti, so ce na jānāti, assa asantaguṇadīpakassa musāvādino.
“以别的说法”这句话,是为了说明:在要显示的意义之过剩的有无当中,可能出现的犯戒种类,所以才说“若有比丘……你”等。所谓“若有比丘……你”,应连起来理解为:你在这里、在这座精舍中居住。“显示”是指把自己的意图表露出来。“若知”:如果一个人听到了刚才那番话,在话刚说完时就知道“这人是在用别的说法显示自己得到了禅那”,或者知道“这人是禅那的获得者”。“彼”:指这样说话的那位比丘。另一个“彼”指他所说的那句话。这只是恶作罪,不是偷兰遮,这就是其含义。就像对自己住处的施主讲述别人的事情一样,把自己并不具备的功德说成好像具备,这种说话方式应当理解为就是这首偈颂所表达的意思。巴利
‘‘Aññāpadesañca vinā’’ti iminā dassitabyatirekatthassa bhāvābhāve sambhavantaṃ āpattibhedaṃ dassetumāha ‘‘yo te’’tiādi. Yo bhikkhu te tava idha imasmiṃ vihāre vasatīti yojanā. Dīpiteti attano adhippāye pakāsite. Jānāti ceti yo tathā vuttavacanaṃ assosi, so ‘‘esa aññāpadesena attano jhānalābhitaṃ dīpetī’’ti vā ‘‘eso jhānalābhī’’ti vā vacanasamanantarameva sace jānāti. Assāti evaṃ kathitavacanavato tassa bhikkhuno. Taṃ tena vuttavacanaṃ. Dukkaṭameva hoti, na thullaccayanti attho. Attano āvāsakārānaṃ dāyakānaṃ aññassa pavattiṃ kathentassa viya attanoyeva asantaguṇaṃ santamiva katvā kathanākāro imāya gāthāya atthato vuttoti daṭṭhabbo.
在这里,“禅那获得者”这个说法里的“且”字,由于它含有集合未说之义的缘故,应当知道:巴利圣典中出现的其余各种表述方式也都被包括在内了。同样,在“禅那获得者”这里,因为用“禅那”一词也一并标示了解脱等,所以,一个多闻的人听到以禅那等十种上人法为内容的方便说法时,如果当下就明白其中的意思,那么对于以方便说法来暗示的人,就犯土喇咤亚;如果不知道,或者过了很久才知道,就犯恶作。应当知道,这首偈颂的意义已经由此显示出来了。巴利
Ettha ca jhānalābhīti cāti avuttasamuccayatthena ca-saddena pāḷiyaṃ (pārā. 220) āgatā avasesapariyāyavārā ca saṅgahitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathā jhānalābhīti ettha jhānaggahaṇena vimokkhādīnañca upalakkhitattā jhānādidasavidhauttarimanussadhammavisayapariyāyakathaṃ sutavatā taṅkhaṇe tadatthe ñāte pariyāyasamullāpakena āpajjitabbaṃ thullaccayañca aviññāte vā cirena viññāte vā āpajjitabbaṃ dukkaṭañca imāya gāthāya atthato dassitamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
310 “此”是指前面所说的那种禅那等各类上人法。“增上慢”是指“我已经证得了”这样生起的慢,也就是增上之慢。意思是说:以“这个法我已经证得了”这样坚固生起的慢来说给别人听。“已说无犯之理”是说:罪的不存在就是无犯,那个道理应当被了解、应当被明白,所以说“无犯”。意思是世尊这样说“以增上慢”——以“已证得法”的增上慢而说“我是初禅的获得者”等等,这是无犯的。巴利
310.Etanti yathāvuttappakāraṃ jhānādibhedaṃ uttarimanussadhammaṃ. Adhimānāti ‘‘adhigatoha’’nti evaṃ uppannamānā, adhikamānāti attho, ‘‘ayaṃ dhammo mayā adhigato’’ti daḷhamuppannena mānena kathentassāti vuttaṃ hoti. Vutto anāpattinayoti āpattiyā abhāvo anāpatti, sā eva nayo netabbo bujjhitabboti katvā, anāpattīti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Adhimānenā’’ti evaṃ vutto bhagavatāti attho, ‘‘adhigatadhammoha’’nti adhimānena ‘‘ahaṃ paṭhamajjhānalābhī’’tiādīni vadantassa anāpattīti vuttaṃ hoti.
如果有人问:这种增上慢对谁有,对谁没有呢?对圣者来说是没有的,因为他们通过省察道等五种省察而生起喜悦,疑惑已经断尽。对破戒者来说也是没有的,因为他对证得圣者的功德没有精勤努力。对持戒清净但不用功修禅修业处、反而耽著睡眠等放逸行为的人,也是没有的,因为他舍弃了修行精进。然而,如果有人安住在善清净的戒成就上,精勤修习止禅,已经证得色界、无色界的定境而安坐其中;或者精勤修习观禅,获得了带有烦恼染污的生灭智——这时增上慢就会生起。应当知道:当他们在止观修行中,烦恼的现行活动暂时不存在时,增上慢生起了,但它并没有真正让他们达到殊胜的境界,只是让他们停留在某个阶段而已。巴利
Ayamadhimāno kassa hoti, kassa na hotīti ce? Ariyānaṃ na hoti maggapaccavekkhaṇādīhi pañcahi paccavekkhaṇāhi sañjātasomanassānaṃ vitiṇṇakaṅkhattā. Dussīlassāpi na hoti tassa ariyaguṇādhigame nirussāhattā. Susīlassāpi kammaṭṭhānānuyogarahitassa niddārāmatādimanuyuttassa na hoti vissaṭṭhabhāvanābhiyogattā. Suparisuddhāya sīlasampattiyā patiṭṭhāya samathabhāvanāmanuyuttassa rūpārūpasamāpattiyaṃ pattāsino vā vipassanābhiyuttassa sopakkilesodayabbayañāṇalābhino vā uppajjati. So samathavipassanābhāvanāhi kilesasamudācārassa abhāve uppanne te visesabhāgino bhavituṃ adatvā ṭhitibhāgino katvā ṭhapetīti veditabbo.
“然”这个词是“亦”的意思。用“如是”这句话,是在回指“已说无犯之理”。“不欲说者”这句来自圣典,和“无炫耀意图者”这句没有意义上的差别。应当连起来理解为:“不欲说者如是所说。”什么意思呢?他人被恶欲所覆,说“我是证得禅那等的人”,这种心态就叫炫耀意图;如果不是这样,而是向同梵行者告知别的事,同样也是无犯——这是世尊所说的,这就是其含义。应当连起来理解为:“对初业者亦如是所说。”“初业者无犯”,就是说初业者也无犯,这是世尊所说的,这就是其含义。在这个学处中,瓦古木达提利亚的比丘们是初业者。以“未说之集合”这一含义的“如是”一词,这里摄取了未说到的疯狂者、心乱者、受痛恼者。巴利
Panāti api-saddattho. ‘‘Eva’’nti iminā ‘‘anāpattinayo vutto’’ti paccāmasati. ‘‘Avattukāmassā’’ti idañca pāḷiyaṃ āgataṃ ‘‘anullapanādhippāyassā’’ti (pārā. 222, 225) idañca anatthantaraṃ. Avattukāmassāti evaṃ vuttoti yojanā. Kohaññena pāpicchāpakatassa ‘‘jhānādīnaṃ lābhimhī’’ti vadantassa ajjhāsayo ullapanādhippāyo nāma, tathā ahutvā sabrahmacārīsu aññaṃ byākarontassa evameva anāpattibhāvo vutto bhagavatāti attho. Ādikassāpi evaṃ vuttoti yojanā. ‘‘Anāpatti ādikammikassā’’ti (pārā. 222) ādikammikassāpi anāpattibhāvo vutto bhagavatāti attho. Imasmiṃ sikkhāpade vaggumudātīriyā bhikkhū ādikammikā. Avuttasamuccayatthena tathā-saddena idha avuttaummattakakhittacittavedanaṭṭā gahitā.
311 “恶欲”是指:怀着“众人会这样尊敬我”的想法,以得到禅那等为因由,为了获得尊敬、得到与尊敬相关的条件和供养,而生起这种被称作希求的卑劣、低下的欲望,并且具足这样的状态。“彼”是指他所炫耀的那与禅那等不同层次的上人法,也就是那个法。“不存在”是指在他自己的相续中,在这一生中从未生起过,处于根本没有的状态。“向人告知”是指所说那句话的意思,就是让当下能知道的同为人道者,处在能听到的近处,用“证得了初禅”这样的方式告知。要理解为“不是用暗示来告知”。“在你住的精舍里,那位比丘证得了初禅”等等,就是离开暗示、直接告知。“即彼智”是指就在那时就知道,也就是说了那句话的当下不久便知道,这是它的意思。“于此”是指在这个第四条波罗夷罪中。“智者”是指持律者。巴利
311.Pāpicchatāti ‘‘evaṃ maṃ jano sambhāvessatī’’ti jhānalābhitādihetukāya sambhāvanāya sambhāvanānimittassa paccayapaṭilābhassa patthanāsaṅkhātāya pāpikāya lāmikāya icchāya samannāgatabhāvo ca. Tassāti yaṃ jhānādibhedabhinnaṃ uttarimanussadhammaṃ samullapi, tassa dhammassa. Asantabhāvoti attasantāne paccuppannajātiyaṃ anuppāditabhāvena avijjamānabhāvo. Manussakassa ārocanañcevāti vuttavacanassa atthaṃ taṅkhaṇe jānanakassa manussajātikassa ‘‘paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajji’’ntiādinā nayena savanūpacāre ṭhatvā ārocanañca. Naññāpadesena ārocanañcāti sambandho. ‘‘Yo te vihāre vasati, so bhikkhu paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajjī’’tiādinā (pārā. 220) nayena pavattaaññāpadesaṃ vinā ujukameva ārocanañca. Tadeva ñāṇanti tadā eva ñāṇaṃ, acirāyitvā vuttakkhaṇeyeva jānananti attho. Etthāti imasmiṃ catutthapārājikāpattiyaṃ. Dhīrā vinayadharā.
312 在第一条和第二条中说的“其余”,是指除了涉及杀人(把人杀死)的波罗夷之外,上面所说的三种波罗夷。所谓“找不到迂回说法”,是说波罗夷罪的成立途径,不允许用间接含蓄的说法来成立。“然而其余的不是这样”这句话在这里也要接上去,意思是:但在第三条波罗夷中,也不存在间接含蓄的说法。像“赞叹死的功德”“喂,人,这对你有什么用”以及“这样死的人能得到财富”等等,用这种间接方式说的,就是波罗夷,这是这里所说的意思。“教令”是指构成波罗夷因的教令行为。“然而其余的不是这样”是说:在第一条和第四条这两种波罗夷中,找不到能构成波罗夷因的教令。巴利
312.Paṭhame dutiye canteti manussaviggahapārājikavajjite yathāvuttapārājikattaye. Pariyāyo na vijjatīti pārājikāpattipathaṃ pariyāyavacanaṃ na labhati. ‘‘Na panetare’’ti idaṃ etthāpi yojetabbaṃ, itare pana tatiyapārājike pariyāyo na vijjatīti attho. ‘‘Maraṇavaṇṇaṃ vā saṃvaṇṇeyyā’’ti (pārā. 172) ca ‘‘ambho purisa kiṃ tuyhiminā’’tiādinā (pārā. 171) ca ‘‘yo evaṃ marati, so dhanaṃ vā labhatī’’tiādinā (pārā. 175) ca pariyāyena vadantassa pārājikamevāti vuttaṃ hoti. Āṇatti pārājikahetuāṇattikappayogo. Na panetareti paṭhamacatutthapārājikadvaye pana pārājikahetubhūtā āṇatti na labhatīti attho.
313 313.“等”指第一条波罗夷。“一种等起”指一种因。罪从这而生起,所以叫等起,也就是因,包括身等。这有六种:身、语、身语、身心、语心、身语心。对它们的判定,我们将在后文(《律注》325等)相应的地方再解释。这里说的“一种等起”,是就它以身心这一种为等起而说的。因此说“二支,从身心”。“那等起”是补上去的词。以那种等起生起第一条波罗夷罪,那等起就是所说的因。名为身根的身和行淫的心,这两者是两支、两部分,所以叫“二支”,意思是这两者的自性,如同“二支的第四禅”。“余”指其余三个波罗夷。“三等起”指身心、语心、身语心这三种等起。“他们”指那些三等起。“诸支”指诸部分:七支,即身、心、语、心、身、语、心,这是说它们的自性。巴利
313.Ādīti paṭhamapārājikaṃ. Ekasamuṭṭhānanti ekakāraṇaṃ. Samuṭṭhāti āpatti etasmāti samuṭṭhānaṃ, kāraṇaṃ kāyādi. Taṃ pana chabbidhaṃ kāyo, vācā, kāyavācā, kāyacittaṃ, vācācittaṃ, kāyavācācittanti. Tesaṃ vinicchayaṃ uttare (u. vi. 325 ādayo) yathāgataṭṭhāneyeva ca vaṇṇayissāma. Tatridaṃ ekasamuṭṭhānaṃ ekaṃ kāyacittaṃ samuṭṭhānaṃ etassāti katvā. Tenāha ‘‘duvaṅgaṃ kāyacittato’’ti. ‘‘Taṃ samuṭṭhāna’’nti ajjhāhāro. Yena samuṭṭhānena paṭhamapārājikāpatti uppajjati, taṃsamuṭṭhānasaṅkhātaṃ kāraṇaṃ. Aṅgajātasaṅkhātaṃ kāyañca sevanacittañcāti dvayaṃ aṅgaṃ avayavaṃ etassāti duvaṅgaṃ, tadubhayasabhāvanti attho yathā ‘‘duvaṅgaṃ catutthajjhāna’’nti. Sesāti avasiṭṭhāni tīṇi pārājikāni. Tisamuṭṭhānāti kāyacittaṃ, vācācittaṃ, kāyavācācittanti tisamuṭṭhānā tīṇi samuṭṭhānāni etesanti katvā. Tesanti tesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ samuṭṭhānānaṃ. Aṅgānīti avayavāni. Satta kāyo, cittaṃ, vācā, cittaṃ, kāyo, vācā, cittanti, taṃsabhāvāti vuttaṃ hoti.
314 314.“等”指的是第一波罗夷,它的本质是与行淫法之心相应的思。经文说“与乐或舍俱”,这是连接方式。意思是:当存在获得可意所缘等喜悦的原因时,它就与乐受相应;当这个原因不存在时,它就与舍受相应。巴利
314.Ādīti methunadhammapaṭisevanacittasampayuttacetanāsabhāvaṃ paṭhamapārājikaṃ. Sukhopekkhāyutaṃ udīritanti yojanā. Iṭṭhālambaṇapaṭilābhādisomanassahetumhi sati sukhavedanāsampayuttaṃ hoti, tasmiṃ asati upekkhāvedanāya sampayuttaṃ hotīti vuttanti attho.
第三,苦受:第三个波罗夷,也就是人身波罗夷,因为它的自性是与嗔心相应的思,所以与苦受相应。意思就是这样。巴利
Tatiyaṃ dukkhavedananti tatiyaṃ manussaviggahapārājikaṃ dosacittasampayuttacetanāsabhāvattā dukkhavedanāya sampayuttanti attho.
“第二”是指第二波罗夷,以不予取的思为特相。出于贪心,以偷盗的方式拿走他人财物时,是与悦受相应的;被嗔怒压倒,自己抢夺或叫别人抢夺而拿取时,是与忧受相应的;远离悦受和忧受,像并不想拿取那样,以旁观的心态拿取时,是与舍受相应的。所以说“三受并说”。巴利
Dutiyanti adinnādānacetanālakkhaṇaṃ dutiyapārājikaṃ. Lobhena parasantakaṃ corikāya gaṇhantassa somanassasampayuttaṃ hoti, kodhena abhibhūtassa vilumpitvā vā vilumpāpetvā vā gaṇhato domanassasampayuttaṃ hoti, somanassaṃ, domanassañca vinā aggahetukāmo viya hutvā udāsīnassa gaṇhato upekkhāsampayuttaṃ hotīti ‘‘tivedanamudīrita’’nti āha.
第四是指以妄说上人法的思为特相的第四波罗夷。为了求得恭敬,或者为了得到供养,心里高兴欢喜,用“我已经进入初禅”这样的方式说自己获得了上人法时,是与悦受相应的;对别人心怀嗔恨,以争吵为先而说时,是与忧受相应的;因为得不到供养,无法忍受饥饿等痛苦,以旁观的心态来说时,是与舍受相应的。所以说“三受并说”。巴利
Catutthañcāti uttarimanussadhammasamullapanacetanālakkhaṇaṃ catutthapārājikañca. Sambhāvanicchāya paccayāsāya vā tuṭṭhatuṭṭhasseva ‘‘ahaṃ paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajjāmī’’tiādinā nayena attano uttarimanussadhammalābhitaṃ vadantassa somanassasampayuttaṃ hoti, aññapuggalesu paṭihatacittassa kalahapurekkhāratāya vadato domanassasampayuttaṃ hoti, paccayālābhena jighacchādidukkhaṃ sahitumasakkuṇeyyatāya udāsīnassa vadato upekkhāsampayuttaṃ hotīti ‘‘tivedanamudīrita’’nti āha.
315 “八心”应当连起来理解为:与贪俱行的八心被获得。意思是:它们被获得。这里说的是,它们以思为自性,与第一波罗夷相应。下面也同样如此。“二”是指与嗔相应的二心。“十心”是指与贪俱行的八心,以及与嗔相应的二心。“被获得”是指以相应的方式而获得。巴利
315.Aṭṭha cittānīti lobhasahagatāni aṭṭha cittāni labbhareti yojanā, labbhantīti attho, cetanāsabhāvena paṭhamapārājikena sampayuttānīti vuttaṃ hoti. Evamuparipi. Duveti paṭighasampayuttāni dve cittāni. Dasa cittānīti lobhasahagatāni aṭṭha, dve paṭighasampayuttānīti. Labbhareti sampayuttabhāvena labbhanti.
316 所谓“因此”,是因为与上面所说的那些心相应,以这个为原因。所谓“行为”,是因为通过造作而成为可违犯的,所以叫行为。由于没有违犯想而得以解脱,因此这个想就是解脱,所以叫想解脱。所谓“世间所呵责”,是说明并显示:因为是不善的性质,所以应当被世间呵责。巴利
316.Tasmāti yasmā yathāvuttacittehi sampayuttaṃ, tena hetunā. Kriyāti karaṇena āpajjitabbattā kiriyā. Vītikkamasaññāya abhāvena muccanato saññāya vimokkho etassāti saññāvimokkhaṃ. Lokavajjanti lokena akusalabhāvato vajjanīyanti dīpitaṃ pakāsitaṃ.
317 在“就是犯戒”这句话里,用“唯”这个字表明并不是指学处本身。这规定,就是上面说的那套规定,包括等起等内容。由有智慧、持律的人来辨别。巴利
317.Āpattiyaṃyevāti evakārena na sikkhāpadeti dasseti. Idaṃ vidhānanti samuṭṭhānādikaṃ idaṃ yathāvuttaṃ vidhānaṃ. Vibhāvināti paññavatā vinayadharena.
318-9 “软脊者”:就像藤蔓那样弯下身体,做出能跳舞的样子,也就是脊背柔软的人。“垂者”:具有下垂的长男根。“垂”就是下垂,指男根,谁有这个东西,谁就是“垂者”。这两种人在欲火逼身的时候,能把自己的男根插进自己嘴里或自己的肛门而犯下重罪,因为情形和犯了波罗夷差不多,所以要避开。“口取者”:用口去取,叫“口取”,谁有这种行为,谁就是“口取者”,意思是用口取别人的男根。“坐者”:用自己的肛门坐到别人的男根上。这两种人因为会毁掉共住者的戒行,不适合再和其他人共住,因为情形和犯了波罗夷差不多,所以要避开。“他们”:按不能共住这一点相同,把四种犯波罗夷的人归在一起。《无疑》里就是这样说的:“他们按道与非道的行为相同这一点,应当被看作与初波罗夷犯者同类。”从这里也可以知道,即使还没有实际犯下那种行为,软脊者等这四种人也具有顺波罗夷的性质。巴利
318-9.Mudupiṭṭhi cāti latā viya namitvā karaṇaṃ dassetvā naccituṃ samavāhitvā mudukatapiṭṭhiko ca. Lambī cāti palambamānena dīghena aṅgajātena yutto. Lambatīti lambaṃ, aṅgajātaṃ, taṃ yassa atthi so lambī. Ime dvepi kāmapariḷāhāturabhāve sati attano aṅgajātaṃ attano mukhaṃ, vaccamaggañca pavesetvā vītikkamitumarahattā pārājikāpannasadisattā parivajjitā. Mukhaggāhīti mukhena gahaṇaṃ mukhaggāho, so etassa atthīti mukhaggāhī, parassa aṅgajātaṃ mukhena gaṇhantoti attho. Nisīdakoti parassa aṅgajāte attano vaccamaggena nisīdanto. Ime dve sahavāsikānaṃ sīlavināsanato aññehi saṃvasituṃ anarahāti pārājikāpannasadisattā vivajjitā. Tesanti asaṃvāsatāsāmaññena cattāro pārājikāpanne saṅgaṇhāti. ‘‘Tesañca maggenamaggapaṭipattisāmaññena paṭhamapārājikāpannasseva anulomikāti gahetabbā’’ iccevaṃ nissandehe vuttaṃ. Iminā ca akatavītikkamānampi mudupiṭṭhiādīnaṃ catunnaṃ anulomapārājikabhāvo vuttoti viññāyati.
不过在《一切欢喜》中——巴利
Samantapāsādikāyaṃ pana –
还有另外四种情况:下垂者、软脊者、用嘴含住他人的男根、坐在他人的男根上。他们说,按照这四种情况,就有四条顺波罗夷。因为双方由贪欲而进入相似状态之法被称为“行淫法”,所以,以这些方式虽然没有真正行淫,仅仅是以道入道就构成违犯,因此这些是行淫波罗夷的随顺情形,被称为“顺波罗夷”。巴利
‘‘Aparānipi lambī, mudupiṭṭhiko, parassa aṅgajātaṃ mukhena gaṇhāti, parassa aṅgajāte abhinisīdatīti imesaṃ catunnaṃ vasena cattāri anulomapārājikānīti vadanti. Etāni hi yasmā ubhinnaṃ rāgavasena sadisabhāvūpagatānaṃ dhammo ‘methunadhammo’ti vuccati, tasmā etena pariyāyena methunaṃ dhammaṃ appaṭisevitvāyeva kevalaṃ maggena maggappavesanavasena āpajjitabbattā methunadhammapārājikassa anulomentīti ‘anulomapārājikānī’ti vuccantī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.233) –
因为前面已经说过,而且《萨罗他迪波尼》的注释里也这样说——巴利
Vuttattā ca tabbaṇṇanāya ca sāratthadīpaniyaṃ –
“垂长者”:因为他的阴茎长而下垂,所以叫垂长者。光是这样还不算波罗夷。可是,当他被不乐逼恼,把自己的阴茎放进自己嘴里或粪道里时,那就成了波罗夷。“软背者”:他的背是柔软的,也就是经过锻炼而拥有柔软的背。他也是在被不乐逼恼时,把自己的阴茎放进自己嘴里,那就成了波罗夷。“用口含取他人阴茎者”:被不乐逼恼,用自己口含取睡着或放逸的他人阴茎。“坐在他人阴茎上者”:被不乐逼恼,看见他人阴茎可以用来行淫,就用自己粪道坐到那上面,意思就是把它插入自己粪道里。垂长者等四种情况,虽然本来已被第一波罗夷所涵盖,但因为他们是以贪欲缠缚这种间接方式而没有真正行淫,所以另外单独说明。巴利
‘‘Lambaṃdīghatāya palambamānaṃ aṅgajātametassāti lambī. So ettāvatā na pārājiko, atha kho yadā anabhiratiyā pīḷito attano aṅgajātaṃ mukhe vā vaccamagge vā paveseti, tadā pārājiko hoti. Mudukā piṭṭhi etassāti mudupiṭṭhiko, kataparikammāya mudukāya piṭṭhiyā samannāgato. Sopi yadā anabhiratiyā pīḷito attano aṅgajātaṃ attano mukhe paveseti tadā pārājiko hoti. Parassa aṅgajātaṃ mukhena gaṇhātīti yo anabhiratiyā pīḷito parassa suttassa vā pamattassa vā aṅgajātaṃ attano mukhena gaṇhāti. Parassa aṅgajāte abhinisīdatīti yo anabhiratiyā pīḷito parassa aṅgajātaṃ kammaniyaṃ disvā attano vaccamaggena tassūpari abhinisīdati, taṃ attano vaccamaggaṃ pavesetīti attho. Lambīādayo cattāro kiñcāpi paṭhamapārājikena saṅgahitā, yasmā pana ubhinnaṃ rāgapariyuṭṭhānasaṅkhātena pariyāyena methunaṃ dhammaṃ appaṭisevino honti, tasmā visuṃ vuttā’’ti (sārattha. ṭī. 2.233) –
由于已经说过,这些实际犯越的人就应该被认定为波罗夷。巴利
Vuttattā ca katavītikkamāyevete ‘‘pārājikā’’ti gahetabbā.
在“比丘尼的四种”这一句里,“不共”是省略的说法,意思是:与比丘不共、只为比丘尼所特有的四种波罗夷,就是膝上摩触、覆藏他罪、随顺被举人、八事。应当把“随顺他们”引到这里,和“已退失的比丘尼自己”连接起来。连接后的意思是:那四种波罗夷的随顺者,就是自己已经退失的比丘尼。也就是说,当她被心所控制,即使自己已穿的袈裟,也按女人穿着方式自行穿上,欢喜在家装束并在执取那一刻,这位比丘尼就已经从教法中退失了。因为这样做,她就堕入在家人状态这一共性,不再适合共住,所以成为这四种波罗夷的随顺者。巴利
Bhikkhunīnañca cattārīti ettha ‘‘asādhāraṇānī’’ti pāṭhaseso, bhikkhūhi asādhāraṇāni bhikkhunīnameva niyatāni ubbhajāṇumaṇḍalikā, vajjapaṭicchādikā, ukkhittānuvattikā, aṭṭhavatthukāti cattāri pārājikāni ca. Vibbhantā bhikkhunī sayanti ettha ‘‘tesaṃ anulomikā’’ti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Tesaṃ catunnaṃ pārājikānaṃ anulomikā sayaṃ vibbhantā bhikkhunī cāti yojanā. Cittavasikā hutvā attanā nivatthacīvarampi hi mātugāmānaṃ nivāsananīhārena sayameva nivāsetvā gihivesaṃ rocetvā gahitamatte sāsanato cutā bhikkhunī cāti vuttaṃ hoti. Evaṃkaraṇena gihibhāvāpannatāsāmaññena saṃvāsārahā na hontīti imesaṃ catunnaṃ pārājikānaṃ anulomikā jātā.
“如是”的意思是:就像上面所说的这些人,因为不适合共住、没有资格做比丘,所以是波罗夷;同样地,十一种没有资格的人也是这样。所谓“十一种没有资格的人”,就是杀母者、杀父者、杀阿拉汉者、破僧者、出佛身血者、黄门、畜生趣者、二根者、盗住者、污比丘尼者、投靠外道者,这十一种。应当知道,这全部二十四种人合在一起,就是这个意思。巴利
Tathāti yathā ime dassitā tena asaṃvāsārahatāya, bhikkhubhāvāya abhabbatāya ca pārājikāva, tathā ekādasa abhabbapuggalāpi hontīti attho. Ekādasābhabbāti mātughātako, pitughātako, arahantaghātako, saṅghabhedako, lohituppādako, paṇḍako, tiracchānagato, ubhatobyañjanako, theyyasaṃvāsako, bhikkhunidūsako, titthiyapakkantakoti ekādasa. Sabbete catuvīsati ete sabbe catuvīsati puggalā samodhānato veditabbāti adhippāyo.
320 这二十四位波罗夷人,就像被砍掉脑袋的人无法再活下去一样,在这个教法里不可能再成为比丘,这样说,就是要把前后文连起来理解。巴利
320. Ime catuvīsati pārājikā puggalā sīsacchinnova jīvituṃ idha bhikkhubhāvāya abhabbāti vuttāti yojanā.
321 321. 为了说明这十一种人为什么没有资格,世尊说了“黄门以及”等等。
“黄门以及”说的是:被侵黄门、嫉妒黄门、半月黄门、侵害黄门、无性黄门,这就是所说的五种黄门。
“畜生”是因为横着走、横着去,所以叫“畜生”,这里包括了龙、金翅鸟等一切畜生道。
应当知道,夜叉等一切非人在这里也归入畜生道中。
“二根者以及”说的是:由业力而生起男女两种性征的人,凡是具有乳房等男女相状的,从语言习惯上称为女二根者、男二根者,这就是两种二根者。
“事坏”是说:因为具有那种体性,比丘的身份才能安住于此,所以叫“事”,也就是一个人堪任比丘身份的条件;那是指在出家具足篇中所说的远离一切过失、具足功德的状态。如果因为黄门身份等原因而坏失了这个条件,这些人就应当被认定为“事坏”。
“因为”这个词表示原因。因为事坏,所以说他们在此生中不堪出家。
用“无因结生”这句话,说明他们具有果报障;由此应当知道,这显示了他们被遮止了证得道果的可能。巴利
321. Imesaṃ ekādasannaṃ abhabbatāya hetudassanatthamāha ‘‘paṇḍako cā’’tiādi. Paṇḍako cāti āsittapaṇḍako, usūyapaṇḍako, pakkhapaṇḍako, opakkamikapaṇḍako, napuṃsakapaṇḍakoti vutto pañcavidho paṇḍako ca. Tiracchānoti tiriyaṃ añchati gacchatīti ‘‘tiracchāno’’ti gahito nāgasupaṇṇādiko sabbatiracchānayoniko ca. Yakkhādayo sabbe amanussāpi idha tiracchāneyeva saṅgahitāti veditabbā. Ubhatobyañjanopi cāti itthipurisabyañjanasādhakehi ubhato kammato jātāni thanādikāni byañjanāni yassāti nirutto itthiubhatobyañjano , purisaubhatobyañjanoti duvidho ubhatobyañjano ca. Vatthuvipannāti tabbhāvabhāvitāya bhikkhubhāvo vasati etthāti vatthu, puggalānaṃ bhikkhubhāvārahatā, sā pana pabbajjākkhandhakāgatasabbadosavirahitaguṇasampayuttatā, taṃ vipannaṃ paṇḍakabhāvādiyogena yesaṃ te ‘‘vatthuvipannā’’ti gahetabbā. Hi-saddo hetumhi. Yasmā vatthuvipannā, tasmā idha attabhāve pabbajjāya abhabbāti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Ahetupaṭisandhikā’’ti vacanena imesaṃ vipākāvaraṇayuttabhāvamāha, iminā etesaṃ maggādhigamassa vāritabhāvo dassitoti veditabbaṃ.
322 322.“五种无间罪”是指:因为被业障所缠,从生天和解脱的成就中退失,死后紧接着就决定投生到恶趣的杀母者等五种无间罪人。“盗住者”也有三种:盗形相者、盗共住者、两者兼具者。“污者”是指:对正常的比丘尼行淫,因为污损了她,所以叫“污比丘尼者”。“外道去者”是指:认可外道的见解和外表,接受那些,然后混入他们中间。如此,这八者因行为而丧失,这就是句法构造。“如是”是因为这个意思,所以这样说为“此”。“他们这些人”是连接关系。他们这些人就是:这八者因杀母等行为,在此生中变得不配比丘身份而丧失——这就是意思。到这里,已经显示了十一种不能者的不能之因。巴利
322.Pañcānantarikāti kammāvaraṇena yuttatāya saggamokkhasampattito parihāyitvā maraṇānantaraṃ apāyapaṭisandhiyaṃ niyatā mātughātakādayo pañcānantarikā ca. Theyyasaṃvāsopi cāti liṅgatthenako, saṃvāsatthenako, ubhayatthenakoti tividho theyyasaṃvāsako ca. Dūsakoti pakatattāya bhikkhuniyā methunaṃ paṭisevitvā tassā dūsitattā bhikkhuniṃ dūsetīti ‘‘bhikkhunidūsako’’ti vutto ca. Titthipakkantako cāti titthiyānaṃ laddhiṃ, vesañca rocetvā taṃ gahetvā tesamantaraṃ paviṭṭho ca. Iti aṭṭha pana kiriyānaṭṭhāti yojanā. Itīti idamatthattā imeti vuttaṃ hoti. Te imeti sambandho. Te ime aṭṭha pana mātuvadhādikiriyāya ihattabhāve bhikkhubhāvāya anarahā hutvā naṭṭhāti attho. Ettāvatā ekādasaabhabbānaṃ abhabbatāya kāraṇaṃ dassitaṃ hoti.
323 我所宣说的、关于波罗夷的核心判定,只要按照这个判定去理解和随顺它,其余的判定也都能被有智慧的人完整无遗地了知——这就是本句的关联方式。巴利
323. Mayā pārājikānaṃ sārabhūto yo ayaṃ vinicchayo vutto, tassa vinicchayassa anusārena anugamanena sesopi vinicchayo budhena paṇḍitena asesatova viññātuṃ sakkāti yojanā.
324 324. 对于想在具备种种方法、与殊胜理趣相应的律藏中求取最胜义方法的人,应当恒常学习这个——这是句义连接。其中,“种种”指各种各类。“以方法”中的“方法”,是指依据所说的内容而被引导、被阐发,也就是所说的轮说、复说等方法。“最胜义方法”中,最胜且是义理,所以叫最胜义;或者,应以殊胜方式决定之义理叫最胜义;那最胜义正是欲求判决者的智慧所应引导的;或者说,判决的方便由此被引导,因此称为“最胜义方法”,即指那最胜义方法。“渴求”是指在律藏中渴求判决或它的方便,意思是希求者。“此应学习”是词的分解。“玛”字是增音连声,“欧”字变为“阿”字。“应学习”是指应读诵、应听闻、应思惟、应受持——如是所说。“此”是指律的判决。巴利
324. Paṭubhāvakare parame vividhehi nayehi yutte vinayapiṭake paramatthanayaṃ abhipatthayatā ayaṃ satataṃ pariyāpuṇitabboti yojanā. Tattha vividhehi nānappakārehi. Nayehīti nīyanti vuttānusārena udīriyantīti ‘‘nayā’’ti vuttehi cakkapeyyālādīhi nayehi. Paramatthanayanti paramo ca so attho cāti paramattho, paramo vā visesena nicchitabbo attho paramattho, soyeva vinicchayatthikānaṃ buddhiyā netabboti paramatthanayo, vinicchayūpāyo nīyati etenāti katvā ‘‘paramatthanayo’’ti vuccati, taṃ paramatthanayaṃ. Abhipatthayatāti vinayapiṭake vinicchayaṃ vā tadupāyaṃ vā patthayatā, icchantenāti attho. ‘‘Pariyāpuṇitabbo aya’’nti padacchedo. Ma-kāro āgamasandhijo, o-kārassa a-kārādeso. Pariyāpuṇitabboti paṭhitabbo, sotabbo cintetabbo dhāretabboti vuttaṃ hoti. Ayanti vinayavinicchayo.
《律抉择》的注释巴利
Vinayavinicchayavaṇṇanāya